Biographical Note
Breon Mitchell, 1942- , is the former Director of the Lilly Library, a retired Indiana University professor of Germanic Studies, a translator of German to English, and a Samuel Beckett bibliographer.
Scope and Content Note
Consists of a collection formed by Professor Breon Mitchell of first and early editions of bi-lingual dictionaries of languages throughout the world, including the languages of Africa, the Americas, Asia, and the Pacific Rim. Many of the works are examples of the first dictionary of that language.
Arrangement
The collection is arranged alphabetically by language.
Restrictions
Access Restrictions:
This collection is open for research.
Many collections are housed offsite; retrieval requires advance notice. Please make an appointment a minimum of one week in advance of your visit.
Administrative Information
Preferred Citation
[Item], The Breon Mitchell Collection of Bi-lingual Dictionaries, Lilly Library, Indiana University, Bloomington, Indiana.
Acquisition Information
Donation: 2016
Collection Inventory
Box Box 48
Russko-abazinskii slovar: okolo 30 000 slov: s prilozheniem kratkogo grammaticheskogo ocherka abazinskogo iazyka, by Kh. D. Zhirov and N. B. Ekba. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1956.
Box Box 14
Lengua Abipona, by Elena Lidia Najlis. Two volumes. Buenos Aires: Universidad de Buenos Aires, Centro de Estudios Linguisticos, 1966.
Box Box 57
Remarks on the language of the St. John's, or Wlastukweek Indians with a Penobscot vocabulary, [by Horatio Hale]. Boston: [s.n.], 1834.
Box Box 31
The Abenaki Indians: their treaties of 1713 & 1717, and a vocabulary ; with a historical introduction, by Frederic Kidder [1804-1885]. Portland: Printed by Brown Thurston, 1859. Michael Brown.
Box Box 18
New familiar Abenakis & English Dialogues. The first ever published on the grammatical system, by Jos[eph] Laurent. Quebec: Leger Brousseau, 1884. Additional title page: New familiar Abenakis and English dialogues. The first vocabulary ever published in the Abenakis language, comprising: the Abenakis alphabet, the key to the pronunciation and many grammatical explanations, also synoptical illustrations showing the numerous modifications of the Abenakis verb, &c., to which is added the etymology of Indian names of certain localities, rivers, lakes, &c. &c. Original edition.
Box Box 18
Series:
ABORIGINAL LANGUAGES OF AUSTRALIA
Scope and Contents: see AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL LANGUAGES; KAURNA; SOUTH AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL LANGUAGES
Box Box 59
A Comparative Vocabulary of Abuan Dialects, by Hans Wolff. Evanston, IL: Northwestern University Press, 1969.
Box Box 20
Abuan-English. English-Abuan Dictionary, compiled by Ian Gardner. University of Port Harcourt, 1980.
Box Box 27
Woordenboek der Atjehsche taal,, by K[arel] F[rederik] H[endrik] van Langen [1848-1915]. 's Gravenhage: Martinus Nijhoff, 1889.
Box Box 13
Atjehsche tolk. Lijst der meest voorkomende woorden en enkele samenspraken, by L[ouis] C[onstant] Westenenk. 's-Gravenhage: Martinus Nijhoff, 1903.
Box Box 28
Malay, Achinese, French, and English vocabulary : alphabetically arranged under each of the four languages, with a concise Malay grammar, by A. J. W. Bikkers. London: Crosby Lockwood and Son, n.d. [1905]. First edition, second issue.
Box Box 24
Atjehsch handwoordenboek (Atjehsch-Nederlandsch), by J Kreemer. Leiden: E. J. Brill, 1931.
Box Box 17
A Study of the Acoóli Language: Grammar and Vocabulary, by J.P. Crazzolara. London: Oxford University Press, 1955. Second impression revised.
Box Box 57
A Short Acoli-English and English-Acoli Vocabulary, by G.A.R. Savage. Nairobi; Kampala; Dar-es-Salaam: The Eagle Press, 1955.
Box Box 64
English-Lwoo Dictionary, by Alfred Malandra. Bologna: Editrice Nigrizia, 1957.
Box Box 36
Achumawi Dictionary, by D. L. Olmsted. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1966.
Box Box 36
Series:
ACOÓLI
Scope and Contents: see ACHOLI
Box Box 36
Series:
ADANGME
Scope and Contents: see DANGME and GA
Box Box 36
Series:
ADELAIDE
Scope and Contents: see SOUTH AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL LANGUAGES
Box Box 36
Series:
ADIWASI ORIYA
Scope and Contents: see ORIYA, ADIVASI
Series:
AFGHANISTANI LANGUAGES AND DIALECTS
Box Box 21
[In Persian script] Da Afghanistan da zino zhibo aw lahjo qamus, by Abdullah Badakhshi. Cover title: A Dictionary of some Languages and Dialects of Afghanistan. Kabul: Pashto Tolana, 1960.
Series:
AFRICAN LANGUAGES AND DIALECTS: POLYGLOT
Box No Box
A voyage to Abyssinia, and travels into the interior of that country, executed under the orders of the British government, in the years 1809 and 1810; in which are included, an account of the Portuguese settlements on the east coast of Africa, visited in the course of the voyage; a concise narrative of late events in Arabia Felix; and some particulars respecting the aboriginal African tribes, extending from Mosambique to the borders of Egypt; together with vocabularies of their respective languages, by Henry Salt [1780-1827]. London: F. C. and J. Rivington, 1814.
Box No Box
Specimens of dialects: short vocabularies of languagues: and notes of countries and customs in Africa, by John Clarke. Berwick-upon-Tweed: Printed by Daniel Cameron, 1848.
Box Box 16
Sammlung und Bearbeitung Central-Afrikanischer Vokabularien. Collection of Vocabularies of Central African Languages, by Heinrich Barth [1821-1865]. Gotha: Justus Perthes, 1862-1866.
Box Box 24
Pallas und andere afrikanische Vokabularien vor dem 19. Jahrhundert: ein Beitrag zur Forschungsgeschichte, by Istvan Fodor. Hamburg: Helmut Buske, 1975.
Box Box 24
A Handbook of African Names, by Ihechukwu Madubuike. Washington, D.C.: Three Continents Press, 1976.
Box Box 37
South African multi-language dictionary and phrase book: English, Afrikaans, Northern Sotho, Sesotho, Tswana, Xhosa, and Zulu. Cape Town: Reader's Digest Association South Africa, 1991.
Box Box 49
Patriot. Woordeboek, dictionary: Afrikaans-Engels, Cape Dutch- English. Paarl: D.F. Du Toit, 1902 1904. Two parts in one volume.
Box Box 55
Praktisches Lehrbuch der Kapholl¨a;ndischen Sprache (Burensprache).| Sprachlehre, Gespr¨a;che, Lesestücke und Wörterbuch, by N[icolaas] Marais-Hoogenhout. Vienna: A. Hartleben's Verlag, [ca. 1904].
Box Box 17
Zuid Afrikaans Woordeboekje Hollands-Engels en Engels-Hollands in vereenvoudige Spelling en ok vele Kaapse woorden bevattende. Derde verbeterde druk, with separate title page: South Afrcan Pocket-Dictionary. Dutch-English and English-Dutch in simplified spelling and containing many Cape Dutch words. Third revised edition. Amsterdam, Pretoria and Johannesburg; Kaapstad: J. H. de Bussy: H.A.U.M. V/H, J. Dusseau & Co., 1916.
Box Box 61
Juta se Sakwoordeboek. Pocket Dictionary. Afrikanns-Engels English-Afrikaans (according to the latest spelling of the S.A. Akamenie). Cape Town & Johannesburg, S.A.: Juta & Co., n.d. [c. 1950].
Box Box 2
Dictionary Coetzee Woordeboek. Afrikaans-Engles. Engles-Afrikaans; pronouncing dictionary containing over 35,000 entries; uitspraak woordeboek met oor die 35,000 inskrywings., by Abel Coetzee. Johannesburg; Glasgow: Collins, 1953.
Box Box 65
First American edition, 1966: African English - English African Dictionary, by Abel Coetzee. Brooklyn: P. Shalom Publications, 1966.
Series:
AGTA, CENTRAL CAGAYAN
Box Box 15
A Vocabulary of Central Cagayan Negrito, by William J. & Lynette F. Oates. Manila: The Summer Institute of Linguistics affiliated with the University of North Dakota in cooperation with The Bureau of Public Schools and The Institute of National Language of The Department of Education, 1955.
Box Box 76
Ahtna Athabaskan Dictionary, compiled and edited by James Kari. Fairbanks, Alaska: University of Alaska, Fairbanks, 1990.
Box Box 76
Series:
AHTNA ATHABASKAN
Scope and Contents: see AHTENA
Box Box 76
Vocabulaire et grammaire de la langue Houaïlou, by Maurice Leenhardt. Paris: Institut d'Ethnologie, 1935.
Box Box 76
Series:
AKA-BEA
Scope and Contents: see ANDAMANESE LANGUAGES: POLYGLOT
Box Box 76
Series:
AKA-KOL
Scope and Contents: see ANDAMANESE LANGUAGES: POLYGLOT
Box Box 70
Second edition, revised and enlarged (1933): Dictionary of the Asante and Fante Language called Tshi (Twi), by Rev. J. G. Christaller. Basel: Evangelical Missionary Society, 1933.
Box Box 61
Mfantse Nkasafua Nkyerekyerease / Fante-English Dictionary, by Ngyiresi Kasa Mu. Cape Coast: Methodist Book Depot, n.d. [c. 1940].
Box Box 62
English-Twi-Ga Dictionary, by C. A. Akrofi & G. L. Botchey. Accra: Waterville Publishing House, n.d. [c. 1950].
Box Box 31
Bibliography and Vocabulary of the Akan (Twi-Fante) Language of Ghana, by Dennis M. Warren. Bloomington, Indiana: Indiana University, 1976.
Box Box 31
Series:
AKAR-BALE
Scope and Contents: see ANDAMANESE LANGUAGES: POLYGLOT
Box Box 16
Akha-English Dictionary, compiled by Paul Lewis. Ithaca, NY: Department of Asian Studies, Cornell University, 1968.
Box Box 31
Vokabularium der Nkosi-sprache (Kamerun), by H. Dorsch. Hamburg: Otto Meissner, 1915.
Box Box 31
Series:
AKPAFU
Scope and Contents: see LAFANA
Box Box 21
Dictionary of the Alabama Language, by Cora Sylestine, Heather K. Hardy, & Timothy Montler. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1993.
Box Box 21
Series:
ALACALUF
Scope and Contents: see KAWESQUAR
Box Box 65
Aleutian Indian and English Dictionary. Common words in the dialects of the Aleutian Indian Language as spoken by the Oogashik, Egashik, Egegik, Anangashuk and Misremie tribes around Sulima River and neighnoring parts of the Alaska Peninsula, compiled by Charles A. Lee. Seattle, Washington: Lowman & Hanford, 1896.
Box Box 79
Binding variant (1896): Identical to issue in gray wrappers, but in pale green wrappers, with illustrative portrait of Indian woman on front wrapper.
Box Box 21
The Aleut Language: the Elements of Aleut Grammar with a Dictionary in two Parts containing Basic Vocabularies of Aleut and English, by Richard Henry Geoghegan. Washington, D.C.: US Department of the Interior, 1944.
Box Box 75
Aleutian Indian and English Dictionary, by Charles A. Lee. Seattle: The Shorey Book Store, 1965. Also a second copy: second facsimile edition, 1966, limited to 100 copies.
Box Box 4
Aleut Dictionary. Unangam Tunudgusii. An unabridged lexicon of the Aleutian, Pribilof, and Commander Islands Aleut Languages, compiled by Knut Bergsland. Fairbanks, Alaska: Alaska Native Language Center, University of Alaska Fairbanks, 1994.
Series:
ALGONQUIAN
Scope and Contents: see also BLACKFOOT; DELAWARE; MAHICAN; MENOMINI; MICMAC; OJIBWA; WAMPANOAG; WESTERN ABENAKI
Box Box 70
Lexique de la langue Algonquine, by J.A. Cuoq. Montreal: Chapleau et Fils, 1886.
Box Box 49
Comparative Vocabulary of Algonquin Dialects. From Heckewelder's Manuscripts in the Collections of the American Philosophical Society, Philadelphia. Cambridge: John Wilson and Son. University Press, 1887.
Box Box 55
Dictionnaire français-algonquin, by Geo[rge Joseph Guyon] Lemoine [1860- ]. Chicoutimi: G. Delisle, impr. Bureaux du journal "Le Travailleur", 1909.
Box Box 23
A Computer-Generated Dictionary of Proto-Algonquian, by John Hewson. Hull, Quebec: Canadian Museum of Civilization, 1993.
Box Box 73
Alsea Texts and Myths, by Leo J. Frachtenberg. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1920. Hardbound without d.j.
Series:
ALTAIC LANGUAGES: POLYGLOT
Scope and Contents: see also TUNGUS
Box Box 16
Entwurf einer vergleichenden Grammatik der altaischen Sprachen: nebst einem vergleichenden Wörterbuch, by Joseph Grunzel. Leipzig: Wilhelm Friedrich, 1895.
Box Box 61
A Simple Alur Grammar and Alur-English-Alur Vocabularies, by Peter C. Ringe. [Kampala?]: The Eagle Press, [ca. 1948].
Box Box 35
Dictionary of the Amharic language. In two parts. Amharic and English, and English and Amharic, by Charles William Isenberg. London: printed for The Church Missionary Society, 1841.
Box Box 7
Raccolta delle frasi più usuali tradotte dall'italino in amarico, coll'aggiunta di un piccolo dizionario. 2a edizione reveduta e corretta, by F[ederico] Piano. Rome: Voghera Carlo, 1887.
Box Box 7
Piccolo dizionario eritreo: raccolta dei vocaboli piu usuali nelle principali lingue parlate nella Colonia Eritrea. Italiano-arabo-amarico, Alessandro Allori. Milano: Ulrico Hoepli, 1895.
Box Box 35
Initia Amharica. An Introduction to Spoken Amharic. Part I Grammar. Part II. English-Amharic Vocabulary with Phrases. Part III Amharic-English Vocabulary with Phrases. Vol. I. [H-S in Amharic script](H-S), 3 vols [of 4], by C[arl] H[ubert] Armbruster [1874-1957]. Cambridge: At the University Press, 1908, 1910, 1920. [PARTS 1-3]
Box Box 37
Dictionnaire amarigna-francais, suivi d'un vocabulaire français-amarigna, by J[oseph] Baeteman. Dire-Daoua, Ethiopia: Imprimèrie Saint Lazare, 1929.
Box Box 64
Vocabolario Pratico Italiano-Tigrai-Amarico, corredato d'alfabeto, frasario e nozioni grammaticali delle due lingue, by Prospero Maria da Milano. Milan: Editrice Genio, [1936].
Box Box 6
Short Manuel (with Vocabulary) of the Amharic Language prepared for the General Staff by Major J. P. Alone (West India Regiment) 1909. Revised 1940by Lieut. D. E. Stokes. Khartoum: Printed for the Sudan Government by McCorquodale & Co. 1941. 6/12/00.
Box Box 31
Russko-amkharskii slovar: okolo 23,000 slov, by E[mmanuil] B[erovich] Gankin. Moscow: Sovetskaia entsiklopediia, 1965.
Box Box 48
Amkharsko-russkii slovar: okolo 25 000 slov, by E[mmanuil] B[erovich] Gankin. Moscow: Sov. Entsiklopediia, 1969.
Box Box 12
Concise Amharic dictionary: Amharic-English, English-Amharic, by Wolf Leslau. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1976.
Box Box 5
Chinese-English Dictionary of the vernacular or spoken language of Amoy, with the principal variations of the Chang-Chew and Chin-Chew dialects. New edition, with corrections by the author, by Carstairs Douglas. London: Publishing Office of the Presbyterian Church of England, 1899.
Box Box 5
Supplement to Dictionary of the vernacular or spoken language of Amoy [Rev. Carstairs Douglas, M.A., LL.D., Glasg.], by Thomas Barclay. Shanghai: The Commercial Press, Ltd., 1923.
Box Box 13
A pocket dictionary of the Amoy vernacular. English-Chinese, by Ernest Tipson. Singapore: Lithographers Limited, 1934.
Box Box 17
A Practical English-Hokkien Dictionary, by Chiang Ker Chiu. Singapore: The Chin Fen Book Store, n.d.
Box Box 12
Tzon 'tzíkindyi jñò tzjó Noà yo jñò tzko. Diccionario amuzgo-español el amuzgo de San Pedro Amuzgos, Oaxaca, by L. Fermín Tapia García. Mexico: CIESAS, Plaza y Valdés Editores, 1999.
Series:
ANDAMANESE LANGUAGES: POLYGLOT
Box Box 28
Notes on the languages of the south Andaman group of tribes, by M. V. Portman. Calcutta: Office of the superintendent of government printing, India, 1898.
Box Box 67
A dictionary of the Aneityumese language. In two parts. I. Aneityumese and English. II. English and Aneityumese. Also outlines of Aneityumese grammar. And an introduction, containing notices of the missions to the native races, and illustrations of the principles and peculiarities of the Aneityumese language, by John Inglis. London & Edinburgh: Williams and Norgate, 1882.
Box Box 61
Angass Manual - Grammar and Vocabulary, by H.D. Foulkes. London: Kegan Paul, 1915.
Box Box 2
Romano lavo-lil: word-book of the Romany; or, English Gypsy language. With many pieces in gypsy, illustrative of the way of speaking and thinking of the English gypsies; with specimens of their poetry, and an account of certain gypsyries or places inhabited by them, and of various things relating to gypsy life in England, by George H[enry] Borrow. London: John Murray, Albemarle Street, (London: printed by William Clowes and Sons, Stamford Street and Charing Cross), 1874.
Box Box 32
An American-Romani vocabulary, by Albert Thomas Sinclair [1844-1911]. [New York]: The New York public library, 1915.
Box Box 32
Avesta and Romani, by Albert Thomas Sinclair [1844-1911]. [New York]: The New York public library, 1916.
Box Box 7
The dialect of the gypsies of Wales, being the older form of British Romani preserved in the speech of the clan of Abram Wood, by John Sampson (1862-1931). Oxford: The Clarendon Press, 1926.
Box Box 53
"An East Anglian Romani Vocabulary of 1798," ed. by John Sampson, in: Journal of the Gypsy Lore Society, Third Series, Volume IX, Part 3, 1930.
Box Box 53
Series:
ANJAM
Scope and Contents: see PAPUA NEW GUINEA LANGUAGES
Box Box 23
Western Apache dictionary, compiled by the staff of the White Mountain Apache Culture Center. Fort Apache, Ariz.: White Mountain Apache Tribe, 1972.
Box Box 43
Vocabulary of the Apache or 'Indé+Language of Arizona & New Mexico, Collected by John Gregory Bourke in the 1870s and 1880s, ed. by Carol J. Condie. Greeley, Colo.: Museum of Anthropology, University of Northern Colorado, 1980.
Box Box 23
Western Apache-English dictionary : a community-generated bilingual dictionary, edited by Dorothy Bray in collaboration with the White Mountain Apache Tribe. Tempe, AZ: Bilingual Press, 1998.
Box Box 23
Series:
A-PUCIKWAR
Scope and Contents: see ANDAMANESE LANGUAGES: POLYGLOT
Box Box 36
A grammar and a vocabulary of the Ipurina language, by J[acob] E[vert] R[esyek] Polak. London: Published for the Fund By Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner, 1894.
Box Box 12
Diccionario Arabela-Castellano, by Rolland G. Rich. Lima: Instituto Lingüistico de Verano, 1999.
Series:
ARABIC, CHADIAN SPOKEN
Box Box 54
Lexique des parlers arabes tchado-soudanais. An Arabic-English-French lexicon of the dialects spoken in the Chad-Sudan area, compiled by Arlette Roth-Laly. Four vols. Paris: Éditions du Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique, 1969.
Series:
ARABIC DIALECTS
Scope and Contents: see also ARABIC, HASANIYA; EGYPTIAN ARABIC, IRAQI ARABIC, NIGERIAN ARABIC, SUDANESE ARABIC, TUNISIAN ARABIC
Box Box 68
Vocabulaire Français-Arabe des dialects vulgaires africains; d'Alger, de Tuni, de Marok et d'Égypte, by J.J. Marcel. Paris: Charles Hingray, 1837.
Series:
ARABIC, HASSANIYA
Box Box 29
"Vocabulaire technique de Chameau en Mauritanie (Dialecte Hassanya)," by Capt. [Claude] Le Borgne. Extract from Bulletin de l'Institut Français d'Afrique Noire, Dakar, IFAN, vol. 15, 1953.
Series:
ARABIC, SUDANESE SPOKEN
Box Box 71
Sudan Arabic; English-Arabic vocabulary. Author(s): Hillelson, Sigmar. ; Amery, Harold Francois S. Publication: London, Sudan government, Year: 1925 Description: xxvii, [1], 341 p. p. Language: English Note(s): Based on English-Arabic vocabulary, by H. F. S. Amery. OCLC lists 4 copies in US (San Francisco Public, Princeton, Harvard, NYPL). With bookplate of E. H. Paxton, Herford College, Oxford. Hendrix 239 (listing second edition of 1930).
Box Box 64
Sudan Arabic Note-book, by G.S.M. Burton. With a Foreword by Earl Kitchener. London: McCorquodale and Co., 1934.
Box Box 39
Arapaho dialects, by A[lfred] L[ouis] Kroeber [1876-1960]. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1916.
Box Box 39
Series:
ARAUCANIAN
Scope and Contents: see MAPUDUNGUN
Box Box 10
Nachricht von Suriname und seinen Einwohnern, sonderlich den Arawacken, Warauen und Karaiben, von den nüzlichsten Gew¨a;chsen und Thieren des Landes, des Gesch¨a;ften der dortigen Missionarien der Bruderunit¨a;t und der Sprache der Arawacken. Nebst einer Charte und zwey Kupfern, [by Christlieb Quandt, b. 1740]. Görlitz: Gedruckt bey J. G. Burghart, zu finden bey dem Verfasser [etc.], 1807
Box Box 28
Bush master: into the jungles of Dutch Guiana, by Nicol Smith. Indianapolis, New York: The Bobbs-Merrill Company, 1941.
Box Box 28
Series:
ASANTE
Scope and Contents: see AKAN
Box Box 8
The Flamingo Bay Dialect of the Asmat Language, by C. L. Voorhoeve. 's-Gravenhage: H. L. Smits, 1965.
Box Box 6
Anglo Assamese Dictionary, by Dutta Baruah. Nalbari, Assam: Dutta Baruah, 1952. Second edition.
Series:
ATAKAPA
Scope and Contents: see also TUNICA
Box Box 65
A Dictionary of the Atakapa Language, accompanied by Text Material, by Albert S. Gatschet & John R. Swanton. Washington, D.C.: US Government Printing Office, 1932.
Box Box 65
Series:
ATESO
Scope and Contents: see TESO
Series:
ATHAPASKAN LANGUAGUES
Box Box 2
Der Athapaskische Sprachstamm, ed. by Joh[ann] Carl Buschmann. Berlin: F. Dummler, 1856.
Box Box 17
A Lexicon of Atsugewi, by D[avid] L[ockwood] Olmsted. S.l.: Survey of California and Other Indian Languages, 1984.
Box Box 17
Series:
ATTACAPA
Scope and Contents: see ATAKAPA
Series:
ATAYAL
Scope and Contents: see also AUSTRONESIAN LANGUAGES: POLYGLOT
Box Box 27
Atayal-English Dictionary, by Soren Egerod. 2 vols. London: Curzon Press, 1980.
Series:
AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL LANGUAGES
Box Box 23
"Description of the Natives of King George's Sound (Swan River Colony) and Adjoining Country," written by Mr. Scott Nind, and communicated by R. Brown, Esq., F.R.S. Read 14 February, 1831. From: Papers Read before the Royal Geographical Society, Paper III, pp. 21-51.
Box Box 71
Second printing (1856): Language of the aborigines of the Colony of Victoria and other Australian districts: with parallel translations and familiar specimens in dialogue, as a guide to aboriginal protectors and others engaged in ameliorating their condition, by Daniel Bunce. Melbourne: Slater, Williams and Hodgson, 1856.
Box Box 71
"Second edition" (1859): Language of the aborigines of the Colony of Victoria and other Australian districts: with parallel translations and familiar specimens in dialogue, as a guide to aboriginal protectors and others engaged in ameliorating their condition, by Daniel Bunce. Geelong: Thomas Brown, 1859.
Box Box 71
Vocabulary of dialects spoken by aboriginal natives of Australia, Melbourne: Mastermann, printer, 1867.
Box Box 22
The aborigines of Central Australia, with vocabularies of the dialects spoken by the natives of Lake Amadeus and of the western territory of Central Australia, by W[illiam] H[enry] Willshire. Adelaide, C. E. Bristow, Government Printer, 1891.
Box Box 23
"A Grammar and Vocabulary of the Language of the Aborigines of the MacDonnell Ranges," by Rev. H. Kempe of the Mission Station, River Finke, in: Transactions of the Royal Society of South Australia, Vol. XIV, Part I, pp. [1]-54, Adelaide: W.C. Rigby, July, 1891. 1/29/99.
Box Box 7
Australian Aboriginal Native Words and their Meanings, by Sydney J[ohn] Endacott. Melbourne: Sydney J. Endacott, 1923.
Box Box 2
The aboriginal word book, by Justine Kenyon. Melbourne: The Lothian Publishing Co. Pty. Ltd., 1930.
Box Box 4
Second edition (1951): The aboriginal word book, by Justine Kenyon. Melbourne: The Lothian Publishing Co. Pty. Ltd., 1951.
Box Box 24
Australian aboriginal place-names and their meanings, by James R[obert] Tyrrell [1875-1961]. Sydney: Simmons, limited, 1933.
Box Box 15
Australian Aboriginal Words. Aboriginal-English. English-Aboriginal, compiled by Rex Ingamells. Melbourne: Hallcraft Publishing Company, 1955.
Box Box 7
Aboriginal Words and Their Meanings, by Joah H. Sugden. Sydney: Dymock's Book Arcade. Ltd., n.d. [circa 1960's].
Box Box 15
Aboriginal Words of Australia, [by Alexander Wyclif Reed]. Sydney; Wellington, Auckland: A. H. & A. W. Reed, 1965.
Box Box 27
Aboriginal words and place names, compiled by A[lexander] W[yclif] Reed. Adelaide: Rigby, 1977.
Series:
AUSTRONESIAN LANGUAGES: POLYGLOT
Box Box 32
Dictionnaire de termes de droit coutumier indonesien: avec six cartes hors textes, by D[irk] van Hinloopen Labberton. The Hague: Martinus Nijhoff, 1934.
Box Box 31
Takasagozoku kanshuho goi = Dictionnaire de termes de droit coutumier des aborigenes de Formose, by Erin Asai. Tokyo: Herarudosha, L'Académie Impériale, 1941.
Box Box 31
Series:
AVATIME
Scope and Contents: see LAFANA
Box Box 71
An Australian Language, as spoken by the Awabakal, the People of Awaba or Lake Macquarie (near Newcastle, New South Wales), being an Account of their Language, Traditions, and Customs by L. E. Threlkeld: Rearranged, condenses, and edited, with an Appendix, by John Fraser. Sydney: Charles Potter, Government Printing, 1892.
Box Box 35
Awutu, Larteh, Nkonya and Krachi, with glosses in English and Twi, by J. M. Stewart. Legon: Institute of African Studies, University of Ghana, 1966.
Box Box 14
Materials for an Aymara Dictionary, by Thomas A. Sebeok. Journal de la Société des Américanistes (Paris), new series, XL, 1951 pp. 89-151.
Box Box 37
Materials for an Aymara Dictionary, by Thomas A. Sebeok. Offprint in original stapled wrappers from the Journal de la Société des Américanistes (Paris), new series, XL, 1951 pp. 89-151.
Box Box 39
Vocabulario castellano ingles aymara, Jean de Dio Yapita. Oruro, Bolivia: INDICEP Editorial, 1974.
Box Box 66
Diccionario básico del idioma aymara /Author: Gómez Bacarreza, Donato. La Paz : Instituto de Estudios Bolivianos, 1999. Original colored wrappers.
Box Box 66
Series:
AWYU, MIARIO
Scope and Contents: see MANDOBO
Series:
AZERBAIJANI
Scope and Contents: see also KURDISH
Box Box 13
[In Persian script] Tati va harzani, du lajih az zaban-i bastan-i Azarbayijan, by Abd al-Ali Karang. Tabriz: Bungah Bazargani va Matbuati vaizpur, 1954.
Box Box 47
English-Azerbaijan-Russian dictionary on oil field industry, Kuliev, S[aftar] M[ekhti] Kuliev [1908- ] & A[drienna] A[lekseevna] Mdivani. Baki: Azerbaijan State Publishing House of Oil and Scientific-Technical Literature, 1958.
Box Box 48
Azerbaidzhansko-russkii slovar, by Kh. A. Azizbaiov. Baku: Azerbaidzhanskoe gos. izd-vo, 1965. Added title page: Azarbaijanja-rusja lughat.
Box Box 47
Udinja-azabaijanja-rusja lughat, by Voroshil Gukasian. Baky: Elm, 1974. Additional title page in Russian: Udinsko-azerbaidzhansko-russkii slovar.
Box Box 2
Azerbaijani. English-Azerbaijani / Azerbaijani-English, by Seville Mamedov. Hippocrene Concise Dictionary. New York: Hippocrene Books, 1995.
Box Box 2
Series:
BAAMARANI
Scope and Contents: see TACHELHIT
Box Box 62
A Badaga-English Dictionary, by Paul Hockings & Christiane Pilot-Raichoor. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter, 1992.
Box Box 62
Series:
BADAKHSHANI
Scope and Contents: see PERSIAN DIALECTS
Box Box 67
Essai de grammaire de la langue Baguirmienne suivi de textes et de vocabulaires Bagiurmien-Français et Français-Garuirmien, by H[enri] Gaden. Paris: Ernest Leroux, 1909.
Series:
BAHAMAS CREOLE ENGLISH
Box Box 22
Dictionary of Bahamian English, by John A. Holm, with Alison W. Shilling. Cold Spring, NY: Lexix House Publishers, 1982.
Box Box 67
Lexique français-bahnar et bahnar-français, by [Paul] Guilleminet & [Jules] Alberty. Hanoi: Imprimèrie G. Taupin, 1940.
Box Box 30
Dictionnaire bahnar-français. Tome premier. Première partie A-K. Tome deuxième. Première partie. L-U'. , 2 vols., by Paul Guilleminet & Jules Alberty. Paris: Icole française d'Extreme-Orient, 1959, 1963.
Box Box 30
Series:
BAKA
Scope and Contents: see YULU
Box Box 12
Die Bakaïrí-Sprache. Wörterverzeichnis, S¨a;tze, Sagen, Grammatik. Mit Beitr¨a;gen zu einer Lautlehre der Karaïbischen Grundsprache, by Karl von den Steinen [1855- ]. Leipzig: K.F. Koehler's Antiquarium, 1892.
Box Box 12
Series:
BAKHTIARI
Scope and Contents: see PERSIAN DIALECTS
Box Box 38
A Balinese-English Dictionary, by C[harles] Clyde Barber. Aberdeen: University of Aberdeen, 1979. Two vols.
Box Box 21
English-Balochi Colloquial Dictionary, 2 vols. [Vol. I: Ab-Lo; Vol. II Lo-Zi], by George Waters Gilbertson, assisted by Gháno Khán Haddíání. Hertford: published by the author, printed by Stephen Austin & Sons, 1925.
Box Box 59
A Vocabulary of Marw Baluchi, by Josef Elfenbein. Naples: [Instituto Universitario Orientale di Napoli], 1963.
Box Box 21
Baluchi glossary. A Baluchi-English glossary: Elementary Level, by Mumtaz Ahmad. Keningston, Maryland: Dunwoody Press, 1985.
Box Box 21
Series:
BALUAN-PAM
Scope and Contents: see LOU
Box Box 10
Dictionnaire Bambara-Français et Français-Bambara, by [Paul Marie] Molin [1885- ]. Issy-Les Moulineaux (Seine): Les Presses Missionnaires, 1955. 3/20/00. $35. McBlain Books.
Box Box 65
Lexique Français-Bambara, [by Jannick Jaffre]. [Bamako]: Éditions Imprimeries du Mali, 1980.
Series:
BANDA
Scope and Contents: see also CONGO LANGUAGES, POLYGLOT
Box Box 38
Dictionnaire Banda-Français, by Charles Tisserant. Paris: Institut d'Ethnologie, 1931.
Box Box 64
Suggestions for a grammar of "Bangala" (the Lingua Franca of the Upper Congo), with 2000 words and many useful phrases, by Walter H[enry] Stapleton. Yakusu, Stanley Falls, Congo Independent State: Baptist Missionary Society, [1903].
Box Box 64
Suggestions pour Une Grammaire du "Bangala" (la "Lingua Franca" du Haut Congo) et un Vocabulaire Français-Bangala-Swahili. Avec beaucoup de Phrases dans ces trois langues. Nouvelle Édition, by Walter H. Stapleton, trans. and enlarged by W. Millman. Yakusu, Stanley Falls, Congo Independent State: Baptist Missionary Society, 1911.
Box Box 15
Second issue: Propositions pour Une Grammaire du "Bangala" (la "Lingua Franca" du Haut Congo) et un Vocabulaire Français-Bangala-Swahili. Avec beaucoup de Phrases dans ces trois langues. Nouvelle Édition, by Walter H. Stapleton, trans. and enlarged by W. Millman. Yakusu, Stanley Falls, Congo Independent State: Baptist Missionary Society, 1911.
Box Box 12
Dictionnaire bangala-francais-lingala. Bago na monoko na Bangala-Frase-Lingala, suivi d'un lexique lingala-bangala -français et d'un index français-bangala-lingala, by Atibakwa Baboya Edema. Paris; Saint-Maur (France): Sepia; ACCT, 1994.
Box Box 2
Grammar and Dictionary of the Bobangi Language as Spoken over a Part of the Upper Congo, West Central Africa, compiled and prepared for the Baptist Missionary Society's Mission in the Congo Independent State, by John Whitehead. London: Baptist Missionary Society and Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner & Co., 1899.
Box Box 57
Bobangi in twenty-one Lessons With Exercises & Key, by A[ndrew] G[ilbert] W[auchope] MacBeath. Bolobo: Baptist Missionary Society, 1940.
Box Box 61
Grammar and Dictionary of the Bobangi Language as Spoken over a Part of the Upper Congo, West Central Africa, compiled by John Whitehead. Ridgewood, NJ: Gregg Press, 1964.
Box Box 8
Gidabal Grammar and Dictionary, by Brian and Helen Geytenbeek. Canberra: Australian Institute of Aboriginal Studies, 1971.
Box Box 7
Dictionary of Western Bundjalung, including Gidhabal and Tabulam Bundjalung, edited by Margaret Sharpe. Armidale: Margaret Sharpe, Linguistics Department, University of New England, 1995.
Box Box 31
Dictionary of Yugambeh (including neighbouring dialects), by Margaret C. Sharpe. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics, 1998.
Series:
BANTU LANGUAGES: POLYGLOT
Scope and Contents: see also EKOID BANTU
Box Box 5
Polyglotta Africana orientalis or, a comparative collection of two hundred and fifty words and sentences in forty-eight languages and dialects spoken south of the Equator and additional words in nineteen languages, by J[ospeh] T[homas] Last. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1885.
Box Box 11
"Bantu Notes and Vocabularies," ed. by Heli Chatelain. Nos. II & III (of three). In Journal of the American Geographical Society of New York, vol. 26 (1894), pp. 208-240, 51-67.
Box Box 41
Comparative Bantu: An Introduction to the Comparative Linguistics and Prehistory of the Bantu Languages, 4 vols., by Malcolm Guthrie. Farnborough: Gregg Press, 1967-1971.
Series:
BARBADOS CREOLE ENGLISH
Box Box 3
Notes for a glossary of words and phrases of Barbadian dialect, by Frank A. Collymore. Bridgetown, Barbados: Advocate Co. Ltd., 1955.
Box Box 3
Series:
BAREE
Scope and Contents: see PAMONA
Box Box 39
A Baruya-Tok Pisin-English Dictionary, by J.A. Lloyd. Canberra: The Australian National University, 1992.
Box Box 39
Series:
BARTANG
Scope and Contents: see SHUGHNI
Series:
BASHKIR (BASQUORT)
Box Box 48
Russko-bashkirskii slovar, by G[aliia] R[akhmanovna] Karimova. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1954.
Box Box 66
Die Sprache der Basa in Kamerun: Grammatik und Wörterbuch, by Georg Schürle. Hamburg: L. Friederichsen & Col., 1911.
Box Box 8
Field Vocabulary of The Batak of Palawan (Philippines), by Charles P. Warren. Lisse, The Netherlands: The Peter de Ridder Press, 1975.
Box Box 78
Angkola- en Mandailing-Bataksch-Nederlandsch Woordenboek, by H. J. Eggink. Bandoeng: A.C. Nix, 1936.
Box Box 32
Besuch bei den kannibalen Sumatras. Erste Durchquerung der unabh¨a;ngigen Batak-Lande, by Joachim [Maria Heinrich] Freiherr von Brenner [von Felsach] [1859- ? ]. Würzburg: Leo Woerl, 1894.
Box Box 16
Karo-Bataksch woordenboek, by M. Joustra. Leiden: E. J. Brill, 1907.
Box Box 16
Series:
BATAK MANDAILING
Scope and Contents: see BATAK ANGKOLA
Series:
BATAK TOBA
Scope and Contents: see also BATAK KARO
Box Box 30
Bataksch-Nederduitsch woordenboek. In dienst en op kosten van het Nederlandsche bijbelgenootschap vervaardigd, by H[ermanus] N[eubronner] van der Tuuk [1825-1894]. Amsterdam: Frederik Muller, 1861.
Box Box 22
Toba-Bataks-Nederlands Woordenboek, [translated from the original German of] J[ohannes] [Gustav] Warneck. S.l.: "Pro Manuscripto", 1947.
Box Box 22
Series:
BAYA
Scope and Contents: see GBAYA
Box Box 22
Series:
BÊ
Scope and Contents: see LINGAO
Box Box 65
Tentative Grammar of the Beidawi Language Spoken by the Tribes of the North-Eastern Soudan with Short Vocabulary and Sentences, by Major-General F.T. Haig. London and Bungay: Richard Clay & Sons, 1895.
Box Box 36
Wörterbuch der Bedauye-Sprache, by Leo Reinisch [1832-1919]. Vienna: Alfred Hölder, 1895.
Box Box 65
Tu Bedawie: An Elementary Handbook for the Use of Sudan Government Officials, [by E.M. Roper]. Hertford, Herts. England: Stephen Austin & Sons, n.d. [c. 1928].
Series:
BELIZE CREOLE ENGLISH
Box Box 55
Manuscript of the Belizean Lingo, by George McKesey. Belize: National Printers, Ltd., n.d. [1974].
Box Box 24
Bileez Kriol glassary an spellin gide. Belize Kriol glossary and spelling guide, by The Belize Creole Project Committee. Belize City, Belize: The Project, 1997.
Box Box 24
Series:
BELLA COOLA LANGUAGE
Scope and Contents: see NUXALK
Series:
BEMBA
Scope and Contents: see also BANTU LANGUAGES
Box Box 61
Bemba Pocket Dictionary, compiled by E. Hoch. Abercorn: n.d. [c. 1950].
Box Box 74
A Vocabulary of Icibemba, compiled by Malcolm Guthrie, edited by Michael Mann. London: School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London, 1995.
Box Box 14
Beng-English dictionary, Alma Gottlieb & M. Lynne Murphy. Bloomington, IN: Distributed by Indiana University Linguistics Club Publications, 1995.
Box No Box
The Indian vocabulary. To which is prefixed the forms of impeachments, [by Weeden Butler (1742-1823)]. London: John Stockdale, 1788.
Box Box 1
A dictionary of the Bengalee language in which the words are traced to their origin and their various meanings given, Vol. I. Second edition., with corrections and additions; Vol. II-Part [I]-II, by William Carey [1761-1834]. Serampore: printed at the Mission-Press, 1818, 1825.
Box Box 27
[Bengali script] Or a Dictionary of the Bengali Language with Bengali Synonyms and an English Interpretation, compiled from native and other authorities, by William Morton. [Bombay?]: Bishop's College, printed by H. Townsend, 1828.
Box Box 32
A Companion to Johnson's Dictionary in English and Bengalee, to which is prefixed an introduction to the Bengalee language, adapted for the use of both Native and European students. Vol. II, by John Mendies.. Serampore: The Serampore Press, 1828.
Box Box 6
Abridgment of Johnson's Dictionary, English and Bengali. Peculiarly calculated for the use of European and native students. The Second, Improved edition. To Which are subjoined abbreviations commonly used in writing and printing; and a short list of French and Latin words and phrases in common use among English authors, by John Mendies. Calcutta: Printed for the compiler by J. Thomas, at The Baptist Mission Press, 1851.
Box Box 47
Bengalsko-russkii slovar. 38000 slov, by E[vgeniia] M[ikhailovna] Bykova et al. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1957.
Box Box 47
Karmannyi russko-bengalskii slovar. 7500 slov, by D[zhek] Litton. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1959.
Box Box 47
Karmannyi bengalsko-russkii slovar. 8000 slov, by D[zhek] Litton. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1960.
Box Box 8
A Short Bengali-English English-Bengali Dictionary, by Jack A. Dabbs. [College Station, Texas]: A. & M. College of Texas, 1962. Original blue wrappers, lettered in black. 174 pp. First edition.
Box Box 55
Samsad Bengali-English Dictionary, compiled by Sailendra Biswas, revised by Subodhchandra Sengupta. Calcutta: Sahitya Samsad, 1968. Original red cloth over boards, lettered in red on black stamped labels. 1278 pp. (numbered in Bengali). First edition thus. Preliminary material in Bengali. With bookplate and signature of Aditi Nath Sarkar.
Box Box 34
Wörterbuch Deutsch-Bengali, by Nabinananda Ghose. Calcutta: Jagadananda Ghose, 1994.
Series:
BENUE-CONGO LANGUAGES
Box Box 38
Benue-Congo Comparative Wordlist[Vol. 1], ed. by Kay Williamson & Kioyshi Shimizu. : Ibadan, Nigeria: University of Ibadan, West African linguistic society, 1968. Vol. 1 only.
Box Box 16
[cover title] Beothuk Vocabularies: a Comparative Study, by John Hewson. St. John's, Newfoundland: Newfoundland Museum, 1978.
Series:
BERBER LANGUAGES
Scope and Contents: see also RIF, TACHELHIT, TAMAHAQ, HOGGAR, and TAMAZIGHT, CENTRAL; ZENAGA
Box Box 7
Grammaire et dictionnaire abrégés de la langue berbère, [Jean-Michel] Venture de Paradis, edited by Amédée Jaubert. Paris: Société de Géographie, Imprimerie Royale, 1844.
Box Box 10
Noefoorsch-Hollandsch woordenboek, by J. L. van Hasselt [1839-1930]. Tweede, verbeterde en vermeerderde uitgaaf. Utrecht: Kamink & Zoon, 1893. Second, revised and enlarged edition.
Box Box 15
New Bicolano-Pilipino-English Dictionary, compiled by Julio Silverio. Manila: National Book Store, 1980.
Box Box 31
Bidyara and Gungabula: grammar and vocabulary, by J[ohn] G[avin] Breen. Melbourne: Monash University, 1973.
Box Box 24
Die Bilin-Sprache, by Leo Reinisch [1832-1919]. Vol. 1: Leipzig: Th. Grieben's Verlag, 1883; Vol. 2: Vienna: Alfred Hölder, 1887.
Box Box 27
A Dictionary of the Biloxi and Ofo Languages accompanied by Thirty-one Biloxi Texts and Numerous Biloxi Phrases, by James Owen Dorsey & John R. Wanton. Washington: Government Printing Office, 1912.
Box Box 71
Bimaneesch-Hollandsch Woordenboek, edited by J[ohann] C[hristoph] G[erhard] Jonker. Batavia; 'S Hage: Landsdrukkerij; M. Nijhoff, 1893.
Box Box 71
Series:
BINI
Scope and Contents: see BULU
Box Box 71
Series:
BISAYAN
Scope and Contents: see CEBUANO
Box Box 31
Beach-la-mar: the jargon or trade speech of the western Pacific, by William Churchill [1859-1920]. [Washington, D.C.]: Carnegie Institution of Washington, 1911.
Box Box 8
A Descriptive Dictionary Bislama to English, by Bill Camden. Vila, New Hebrides: Maropa Bookshop, 1977.
Box Box 67
La Langue Bisa: Grammaire et Dictionnaire, A[ndré] Prost. Ouagadougou, Upper Volta [Burkina Faso]: Centre IFAN [Institut Français d'Afrique Noire], [1950].
Box Box 4
An English-Blackfoot Vocabulary based on Material from the Southern Peigans. A Blackfoot-English Vocabulary based on Material from the Southern Peigans, by C.C. Uhlenbeck & R. H. Van Gulik. 2 vols. Amsterdam: Koninklijke Akademie van Wetenschappen & N.V. Noord-Hollandsche, 1930, 1934.
Box Box 52
A Blackfoot-English Vocabulary based on Material from the Southern Peigans, by C.C. Uhlenbeck & R. H. Van Gulik. New York: AMS Press, n.d.
Box Box 23
Blackfoot Dictionary of Stems, Roots, and Affixes, by Donald G. Frantz & Norma Jean Russell. Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 1989.1/31/00. $60. Tall Stories.
Box Box 20
Second, enlarged and revised, edition, 1995: Blackfoot Dictionary of Stems, Roots, and Affixes, by Donald G. Frantz & Norma Jean Russell. Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 1995.
Box Box 20
Series:
BLANCHE BAY
Scope and Contents: see KAUANA
Box Box 20
Series:
BOBANGI
Scope and Contents: see BANGI
Series:
BOBO MADARÉ, NORTHERN
Box Box 33
"Phrase Book {Bobo Fing). 9 pp. original typescript, Bobo-English, thematically arranged phrases. No indication of place, author or purpose, date c. 1960's?
Series:
BOBO MADARÉ, SOUTHERN
Box Box 11
Dictionnaire bobo-français: précédé d'une introduction grammaticale, et suivi d'un lexique français-bobo, by Pierre Le Bris. Paris: SELAF, 1981.
Box Box 21
Boro vocabulary, with a grammatical sketch, by D N. Shankara Bhat. Poona: Deccan College Post-graduate and Research Institute, 1968.
Box Box 59
Diccionario bora-castellano, castellano-bora /Author: Thiesen, Wesley.; Thiesen, Eva. Publication: Lima, Perú : Instituto Lingüístico de Verano, 1998
Box Box 24
The Parji language, a Dravidian language of Bastar, by T[homas] Burrow & S[udhibhushan] Bhattacharya. Hertford [Eng.]:Printed and Published on behalf of the administrators of the Max Müller Memorial Fund by Stephen Austin and Sons, 1953.
Box Box 24
Series:
BOLAANG MONGONDOW
Scope and Contents: see MONGONDOW
Box Box 27
Methode et vocabulaire de la langue bleue, Bolak, langue internationale pratique, Leon Bollack [1859- ]. Paris: Éditions de la Langue Bleue, 1900.
Box Box 27
Series:
BONDA
Scope and Contents: see BONDO
Box Box 11
A Bonda dictionary, Sudhibhushan Bhattacharya. Poona: [Deccan College Postgraduate and Research Institute], 1968. 1/25/00. NGL 100 (=$45). Smitskamp.
Box Box 11
Series:
BONGO
Scope and Contents: see YULU
Box No Box
Grammatik und vokabularium der Bongu-Sprache (Astrolabebai, Kaiser-Wilhelmsland), by A. Hanke. Berlin: Kommissionsverlag von Georg Reimer, 1909.
Box Box 42
The first grammar of the language spoken by the Bontoc Igorot, with a vocabulary and texts, mythology, folklore, historical episodes, songs, by Carl Wilhelm Seidenadel. Chicago: The Open Court Publishing Company; 1909.
Box Box 39
Bontok-English Dictionary, by L[awrence] A[ndrew] Reid. Canberra: Department of Linguistics, Research School of Pacific Studies, The Australian National University, 1976.
Box Box 23
Boran vocabulary, by G. H. Webb. Nairobi: Literacy Centre of Kenya, 1969.
Box Box 12
Missões salesianas em Matto Grosso, [by Helvecio Gomes de Oliveira (1894-1908)]. Saõ Paulo: Escolas Profiss. Salesianas, 1908.
Box Box 12
Series:
BOSAVI
Scope and Contents: see KALULI
Box Box 21
The Brahui language. Part I Introduction and Grammar. Part II. The Brahui problem. Part III. Etymological Vocabulary, 2 vols, by Denys de S. Bray. Calcutta: Superintendent Government Printing, 1909; Delhi: Manager of Publications, 1934.
Series:
BRAZILIAN PORTUGUESE DIALECTS: CAIPIRA
Box Box 24
O dialeto caipira; gramatica, vocabulario, by Amadeu Amaral [1875?-1929]. São Paulo: Editora Anhembi, 1955.
Box Box 25
Die Sprache der Bribri-Indianer in Costa Rica, by H. Pittier De Fabrega, edited and with a foreword by Friedrich Müller. Vienna: In Commission bei Carl Gerold's Sohn, 1898.
Box Box 25
Series:
BU
Scope and Contents: see KATUIC
Box Box 25
Series:
BUDIBUD
Scope and Contents: see MUYUW
Box Box 12
A Dictionary of the Language of Bugotu, Santa Isabel Island, Solomon Islands, compiled by W[illiam] G[eorge] Ivens. London: The Royal Asiatic Society, 1940.
Box Box 31
Supplement op het "Boegineesche-Hollandsch woordenboek", by B. F. Matthes. 's Gravenhage: M. Nijhoff, 1889.
Box Box 31
Series:
BUGOTU
Scope and Contents: see BUGHOTU
Box Box 74
Bukusu Generative Phonology and Aspects of Bantu Structure, by K[ornelis] F[rans] de Blois. Tervuren, Belgium: Musée Royal de l'Afrique Centrale, 1975.
Box Box 30
Manuel élémentaire de langue bulu (sud Cameroun), by P[ierre] Alexandre. Paris; Centre de Hautes Études d'Administration Musulmane, 1956.
Box Box 12
"Language of the Bungandity Tribe, South Australia," by R. H. Mathews, in: Journal and proceedings of the Royal Society of New South Wales for 1903, Volume XXXVII. Sydney: Published by the Society, F. W. White Printer, 1904, pp. 59-74.
Box Box 53
Alexander Castrén's Versuch einer burj¨a;tischen Sprachlehre, nebst kurzem Wörterverzeichniss, ed. by Anton Schiefner [1817-1879]. St. Petersburg: Buchdruckerei der Kaiserlichen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 1857
Box Box 31
Russko-buriat-mongolskii slovar: okolo 40 000 slov, by TS[ybikzhap] B[oboevich] Tsydendambaev. Moscow : Gosudarstvennoe izdatelstvo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1954.
Box Box 47
Buriatsko-russkii slovar. 44 000 slov, by K. M. Cheremisov. Moscow: "Sov. entsiklopediia", 1973.
Box Box 22
Judson's Burmese-English Dictionary. Revised and enlarged, by Robert C. Stevenson. Rangoon: Printed by the Superintendent, Government Printing, 1893.
Box Box 33
A Burmese-English Dictionary, compiled by J[ohn] A[lexander] Stewart & C[harles] W[illiam] Dunn. Parts I-III. [London]: [Parts I-II] Published under the auspices of the University of Rangoon [by Luzac], 1940, 1950, [Part III] School of Oriental and African Studies, 1955.
Box No Box
Part IV (1963): A Burmese-English Dictionary. Part IV, compiled by J[ohn] A[lexander] Stewart & C[harles] W[illiam] Dunn. Revised and edited by Hla Pe, H. F. Searle & A. J. Allott. London: School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London, 1963.
Box Box 46
Part VI (1981): A Burmese-English Dictionary. Part VI, compiled by J[ohn] A[lexander] Stewart & C[harles] W[illiam] Dunn. Revised and edited by Hla Pe, A. J. Allott & J.W.A. Okell. London: School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London, 1981.
Box No Box
Burmese Glossary, by William S. Cornyn & John K. Musgrave. New York: American Council of Learned Societies, 1958.
Box Box 49
Russko-birmanskii slovar. Okolo 23 000 slov, N[ikolai] N[ikolaevich] Novikov & V[iktor] P[etrovich] Kolobkov. Moscow: Sov. entsiklopediia, 1966.
Box Box 27
Het burusch van masarete, by H. Hendriks. S-Gravenhage:: Martinus Nijoff, 1897.
Box Box 39
The Burushaski language: Vol. I Introduction and Grammar; Vol. II Text and Translations; Vol. III. Vocabularies and Index, by D[avid] L[ockhart] R[obertson] Lorimer [1876-1962]. Oslo; Cambridge, Mass.: H. Aschehoug; Harvard University Press, 1935 1938. 3 vols.
Box Box 1
Werchikwar English vocabulary; (with a few Werchikwar texts), by D[avid] L[ockhart] R[obertson] Lorimer [1876-1962]. [Oslo] Norwegian Universities Press, 1962.
Box Box 9
Comparative vocabularies of Bushman languages, by D[orothea] F[rances] Bleek (d. 1948). Cambridge: The University Press, 1929.
Box No Box
A Bushman Dictionary[including Bushman-English and English-Bushman] by Dorothea F[rances] Bleek (d. 1948). New Haven: American Oriental Society, 1956.
Box Box 78
Esquisse de grammaire bushong, by J[an] Vansina. Tervuren, Belgium: Musée Royale du Congo Belge, 1959.
Box Box 78
Series:
BWANABWANA
Scope and Contents: see MUYUW
Box Box 78
Series:
CAJUN
Scope and Contents: see FRENCH, CAJUN
Box Box 78
[Thesaurus verboru[m]]: vocabulario de la lengua cakchiquel u[el] guatemalteca: nuevamente hecho y recopilado con summo estudio, travajo y erudición, by Thomás de Cota, ed. and introduced by René Acuña. Mexico: Universidad Nacional Autónoma de México, 1983.
Box Box 2
Palabras: diccionario ilustrado castellano-kaqchikel = b Jun ka'i' taq tzij : wachb'alun Choltzij kaxlan ch'ab'al-kaqchikel. Guatemala: Universidad Rafael Landivar, Instituto de Linguistica, 1992.
Series:
CAKCHIQUEL, CENTRAL
Box Box 11
Diccionario cakchiquel central y español, compiled by Jo Ann L. Munson. Guatemala, C.A.: Instituto Linguistico de Verano de Centroamerica, 1991.
Series:
CALÓ / PACHUCO
Scope and Contents: see also under ROMANI, VLACH
Box Box 7
Diccionario de Calo: el lenguaje del hampa en Mexico. Segunda Edicion, by Carlos G. Chabat. Mexico, D.F.: F. Mendez Oteo, Libreria de Medicina, 1964.
Box Box 8
The Tongue of the Tirilones: A Linguistic Study of a Criminal Argot, by Luline Coltharp. University, Alabama: University of Alabama Press, 1965.
Box Box 19
Barrio Language Dictionary. First Dictionary of Caló, by Dagoberto Fuentes & José A. López. Los Angeles: Southland Press, 1974.
Box Box 19
Series:
CAMBODIAN
Scope and Contents: see KHMER
Box Box 19
Series:
CANALA
Scope and Contents: see XÂRÂCÙÙ
Box Box 19
Series:
CANTONESE
Scope and Contents: see CHINESE, YUE
Box No Box
Histoire naturelle et morale des iles Antilles de l'Amerique enrichie de plusieurs belles figures des raretez les plus considerables qui y sont d'ecrites : avec un vocabulaire caraibe, Charles de Rochefort [1605-1683]. A Roterdam: Chez Arnould Leers, 1658.
Box No Box
Series:
CAR-NICOBARESE
Scope and Contents: see NICOBARESE
Box Box 52
Die Zentralkarolinische Sprache. Grammatik, Übungen u. Wörterbuch der Mundart der westlich von Truk liegenden Atolle, insbesondere der Saipan-Karoliner, Georg Fritz. Berlin: Georg Reimer, 1911.
Box Box 59
Carolinian-English Dictionary, compiled by Frederick H. Jackson & Jeffrey C. Marck. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press, 1991.
Box Box 28
Central Carrier bilingual dictionary, by Francesca Antoine, Catherine Bird, et al of the Carrier Dictionary Committee and Richard Walker & David B. Wilkinson of Summer Institute of Linguistics. [Fort Saint James, B.C.: Carrier Linguistic Committee], 1974.
Box Box 28
Series:
CAYMAN ISLANDS ENGLISH
Scope and Contents: see LESSER ANTILLEAN CREOLE ENGLISH
Box Box 20
The Subanu; studies of a sub-Visayan mountain folk of Mindanao. Ethnographical and geographical sketch of land and people, by John Park Finley & William Churchill. Washington, D.C.: Carnegie Institution of Washington, 1913. Also a second copy in poor condition.
Box Box 12
Pocket dictionary, English-Tagalog Visayan (Cebuano-Ilongo) vocabulary, by P[ablo] Jacobo Enriquez, Jose A. Bautisa & Francis J. Jamolangue. Manila: Philippine Book Co., 1949. 5/9/00. $14. Wonder Book and Video.
Box Box 38
Visayan-English Dictionary, by Rodolfo Cabonce. [Manila?]: n.p., [1958].
Box Box 40
A Dictionary of Cebuano Visayan, 2 vols., by John U. Wolff. Ithaca, N.Y.: Southeast Asia Program, Cornell University, 1972.
Box Box 40
Series:
CENTRAL CAGAYAN NEGRITO
Scope and Contents: see AGTA, CENTRAL CAGAYAN
Box Box 40
Series:
CENTRAL SAKAI
Scope and Contents: see SEMAI
Box Box 40
Series:
CENTRAL THAI
Scope and Contents: see THAI
Box Box 40
Series:
CHAD-SUDANESE ARABIC
Scope and Contents: see ARABIC, CHADIAN SPOKEN; SAR
Box Box 56
Wörterbuch der Djaga-Sprache (Madjame-Mundart) gesprochen am Kilimandjaro in Ostafrika, by Emil Müller. Hamburg: Verlag von Eckardt & Messtorff, 1947.
Box Box 73
Chamorro-Wörterbuch, enthaltend I. Deutsch-Chamorro II. Chamorro-Deutsch nebst einer Chamorro-Gramatik und einigen Sprachübungen, by Father Callistus. Hong Kong: Typis Societatus Missionem ad Exteros, 1910.
Box Box 20
Dictionary and Grammar of the Chamorro Language of the Island of Guam, [by Edward R. von Preissig]. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1918. [BOX 20]. A second copy,with a clear plastic protective cover and inscribed by the author.
Box Box 15
Chamorro-English; English-Chamorro dictionary, by F. "Val" C. Hong Kong: Green Pagoda Press, 1967. 10/98. Fred Goetz Books.
Box Box 33
Chamorro Word Book, by Marilyn C. Salas, ed. by Josefina Barcinas, illustrated by Roland Miranda. Honolulu: The Bess Press, 1998.
Box Box 12
Chantyal dictionary and texts, by Michael Noonan, with Ram Prasad Bhulanja, Jag Man Chhantyal & William Pagliuca. Berlin; New York: Mouton de Gruyter, 1999.
Box Box 12
Series:
CHANTYAL
Scope and Contents: see CHANTEL
Series:
CHATINO, TATALTEPEC
Box Box 25
Vocabulario chatino de Tataltepec: castellano-chatino, chatino-castellano, by Leslie & Kitty Pride. Mexico City: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1970.
Box Box 55
Chechensko-russkii slovar: Okolo 20000 slov, by A[khmat] G[ekhaevich] Matsiev. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1961.
Box Box 29
Upper Chehalis dictionary, by M[arving] Dale Kinkade [1933- ]. Missoula, MT: Linguistics Laboratory, University of Montana, 1991.
Box Box 39
Cheke Holo (Maringe/Hograno) Dictionary, by Geoffrey M[iles] White, in collaboration with Francis Kokhonigita & Hugo Pulomana. Canberra: Department of Linguistics, Research School of Pacific Studies, The Australian National University, 1988.
Box Box 39
Series:
CHEMEHUEVI
Scope and Contents: see UTE-SOUTHERN PAIUTE
Box Box 13
A dictionary of the Cherokee Indian language, by J. T. Alexander. [Sperry, Okla.?], 1971.
Box Box 20
Cherokee Words with Pictures, by Mary Ulmer Chiltoskey. Sylvan, N.C.: The Herald Publishing Company, 1972.
Box Box 6
Cherokee-English Dictionary, by Durbin Feeling, ed. by William Pulte, in collaboration with The Dictionary Committee, Agnes Cowen Coordinator. Tahlequah, Oklahoma: Cherokee Nation of Oklahoma, 1975.
Box Box 10
English Cherokee book. Unega tsaligi go-we-li, by E.L. Gilmore. Tahlequah, Okla.: E.L. Gilmore, 1986. 3/23/00. $20 including postage. hpcollectibles: e-bay.
Box Box 30
English to Cherokee. Cherokee to English Dictionary, by William Newton. [Lyerly, Georgia: Published by the author], 1999.
Box Box 30
Series:
CHEWA
Scope and Contents: see NYANJA
Box Box 31
English-Cheyenne student dictionary. Lame Deer, Montana: Northern Cheyenne Language and Culture Center Title VII ESEA Bilingual Education Program. Language Research Department, 1976.
Box Box 23
Diccionario de la lengua chiapaneca, by Mario Aguilar Penagos. Mexico, D.F : Gobierno del Estado de Chiapas, 1992.
Box Box 23
Series:
CHICHEWA
Scope and Contents: see NYANJA
Box Box 23
Series:
CHICHIMECA-JONAZ
Scope and Contents: see CHICHIMECA PAME, NORTHERN
Series:
CHICHIMECA PAME, NORTHERN, CHICHIMECA-JONAZ and PAME, CENTRAL
Box Box 14
"Documents sur les langages pame et jonaz du Mexique central (Hidalgo, Querétaro, San Luis Potosi)," by Jacques Soustelle, in: Journal de la Société des Américanistes, Paris, Nouvelle Série, vol. XI (1951), pp. [1]-20.
Scope and Contents: This issue also contains: "Une nouvelle langue tapuya de la région de Bahis (Brésil)," by A. Métraux, pp. [51]-58, with French-Katembri vocabulary, pp. 56-58.
Scope and Contents: This issue also contains: "Materials for an Aymara Dictionary," by Thomas Sebeok, pp. [89]-151. See listing of offprint under AYMARA.
Scope and Contents: This issue also contains: "Un nouveau dialecte arawak: le resigaro," by Paul Rivet and Robert de Wavrin, pp. [201]-[239], with map.
Box Box 20
Chickasaw. An Analytical Dictionary, by Pamela Munro & Catherine Willmond. Norman, Oklahoma: The University of Oklahoma Press, 1994.
Box Box 22
Essay on the language of the southern Chins and its affinities, by Bernard Houghton. Rangoon: Superintendent, Government Printing, Burma, 1892.
Box Box 65
An Etymological Dictionary of the Chinantec Languages. Studies in Chinantec Languages 1, by Calvin R. Rensch. Arlington, Texas: The Summer Institute of Linguistics and the University of Texas at Arlington, 1989.
Series:
CHINANTECO, LEALAO
Box Box 25
Diccionario Chinanteco de San Juan Lealao Oaxaca, by Jaime Rupp & Nadine de Rupp. Tucson, AZ: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1996.
Series:
CHINANTECO, PALANTLA
Box Box 25
Diccionario Chinanteco de la diáspora del pueblo antiguo de San Pedro Tlatepuzco Oaxaca, by William R. Merrifield & Alfred E. Anderson et al. Tucson, AZ: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1999.
Series:
CHINESE, MIN DONG
Box Box 61
Dictionary of the Foochow Dialect, by R. S. Maclay & C. C. Baldwin. Revised and enlarged by Samuel H. Ledger. Shanghai: Presbyterian Mission Press, 1929 ["U.S. Government Printing Office: 1945" at bottom of final page]
Series:
CHINESE PIDGIN ENGLISH
Box Box 61
Pidgin-English Sing-Song or Songs and Stories in the China-English Dialect with a Vocabulary, by Charles G. Leland. London: Trübner & Co., 1876.
Box Box 31
A Vocabulary of Pidgin English and Words used on the China Coast, compiled by Joseph W. Graeme. Shanghai: U. S. S. Monterey, June, 1902. Nov. 2000. $250. Edward J. Lefkowicz.
Box Box 32
An English-Cantonese pocket vocabulary: containing common words and phrases, printed without the Chinese characters or tonic marks, the sounds of the Chinese words being represented by an English spelling as far as practicable. Second edition, Revised and Enlarged, by J[ames] Dyer Ball [1847-1919]. Hongkong: Kelly & Walsh, 1894.
Box Box 15
The Cantonese Made Easy. Vocabulary. A small dictionary in English and Cantonese, containing words and phrases used in the spoken language, with the classifiers indicated for each noun, and definitions of the different shades of meaning, as well as notes on the different uses of some of the words where ambiguity might otherwise arise. Third edition, revised and enlarged, by J. Dyer Ball. Hong Kong: Kelly & Walsh, 1908.
Box Box 17
A pocket dictionary of Cantonese. Cantonese-English with English-Cantonese index, by Roy T. Cowles. Hong Kong: Kelly and Walsh, Ltd., 1914.
Box Box 15
Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon, or, Trade Language of Oregon, by George Gibbs. New York: Cramoisy Press, 1863, bound together with Alphabetical Vocabulary of the Chinook Language, by George Gibbs. New York: Cramoisy Press, 1863.
Box Box 15
Series:
CHINOOK JARGON
Scope and Contents: see CHINOOK WAWA; see also THOMPSON
Series:
CHINOOK WAWA
Scope and Contents: see CHINOOK WAWA; see also NEZ PERCE
Box Box 57
Dictionary of Indian tongues, containing most of the words and terms used in the Tshimpsean, Hydah, & Chinook, with their meaning or equivalent in the English language. Victoria [B.C.]: Hibben & Carswell, 1862.
Box Box 43, Box 49
A Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon, or, Trade Language of Oregon, prepared for the Smithsonian Institutionby George Gibbs. Washington: Smithsonian Institution, March, 1863.
Box Box 45
First edition, second issue: A Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon, or, Trade Language of Oregon, by George Gibbs. New York: Cramoisy Press, 1863. Two copies.
Box Box 75
The canoe and the saddle: adventures among the north-western rivers and forests, and Isthmiana, by Theodore Winthrop [1821-1861]. Boston: Ticknor and Fields, 1863.
Box No Box
Dictionary of the Chinook jargon or, Indian trade language of the North Pacific coast. Victoria, B.C. : T.N. Hibben & Co., [1877].
Box Box 4
"New edition," 1883: Dictionary of the Chinook jargon or, Indian trade language of the North Pacific coast. Victoria, B.C. : T.N. Hibben & Co., 1883.
Box Box 71
Dictionary of the Chinook jargon as spoken on Puget Sound and the Northwest: with original Indian names for prominent places and localities with their meanings, historical sketch, etc., [attributed to Samuel Fuller Coombs]. Seattle, Wash.: Lowman & Hanford, [1891].
Box Box 43
Chinook as spoken by the Indians of Washington Territory, British Columbia and Alaska. For the use of traders, tourists and others who have business intercourse with the Indians. Chinook-English. English-Chinook, by C[harles] M[ontgomery] Tate. Victoria, B.C.: M. W. Waitt & Co., [1889].
Box Box 71
Second, revised edition, 1914: Chinook jargon as spoken by the Indians of the Pacific Coast. For the use of missionaries, traders, tourists and others who have business intercourse with the Indians, by C[harles] M[ontgomery] Tate. Victoria, B.C.: Printed by Thos.R. Cusack, 1914.
Box Box 37
The Wonders of Alaska, by Alexander Badlam. San Francisco: The Bancroft Company, 1890. 9/17/98.
Box Box 71
Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon, compiled by Frederick J. Long. Seattle: Lowman & Hanford Co., 1909.
Box Box 79
The Chinook Jargon and How to Use It. A Complete and Exhaustive Lexicon of the Oldest Trade Language of the American Continent, by Geo[rge] C[oombs] Shaw. Seattle: Rainer Printing Company, 1909.
Box Box 62
Issue in wrappers (1909): identical to the hardbound issue, but in original red wrappers, lettered and decorated in black, with the same mounted photo of a Chinook Indian on the front cover.
Box Box 71
Gill's dictionary of the Chinook jargon, with examples of use in conversation and notes upon tribes and tongues. Fifteenth Edition, compiled by John [Kaye] Gill. Portland, Or.: Published by J.K. Gill company, 1909.
Box Box 71
Seventeenth edition, 1933: Gill's dictionary of the Chinook jargon, with examples of use in conversation and notes upon tribes and tongues. Seventeenth Edition, compiled by John [Kaye] Gill. Portland, Or.: Published by J.K. Gill company, 1933.
Box Box 71
The Chinook book: a descriptive analysis of the Chinook jargon in plain words, giving instructions for pronunciation, construction, expression and proper speaking of Chinook with all the various shaded meanings of the words, by "El Comancho" W[alter] S[helley] Phillips [1867-1940]. Seattle: [R. L. Davis printing co.], 1913.
Box Box 71
Later issue by Binfords and Morts(n.d. ca. 1970): photographic reprint of text on different paper, bound in original orange-tan cloth over boards, lettered and decorated in blue; d.j. turquoise, white, tan, and black, lettered in white and black. D.j. gives "Binfords & Mort" of Portland as publishers; "Binfords & Mort" at base of spine.
Box Box 71
[cover title] A Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon, by B. J. Spalding. Pender Island, B.C.: [published by the author], 1947.
Box Box 18
Tiddim Chin. A Descriptive Analysis of Two Texts, by Eugénie J. A. Henderson. London: Oxford University Press, 1965.
Box Box 18
Series:
CHINYANJA
Scope and Contents: see NYANJA
Box Box 18
Series:
CHIPPEWA
Scope and Contents: see OBJIWA
Box Box 25
El idioma chiriguano: gramatica, textos, vocabulario, By Wolf Dietrich. [Madrid]: Ediciones Cultura Hispanica, 1986. %/28/98. $45. Libros Latinos.
Box Box 25
Series:
CHISWINA
Scope and Contents: see SHONA
Box Box 25
Series:
CHITIMACHA
Scope and Contents: see TUNICA
Box Box 57
Chahta leksikon. A Choctaw in English definition. For the Choctaw academies and schools, by AllenWright [1873-1880]. St. Louis: Printed by the Presbyterian Publishing Companry, [1880].
Box Box 73
A Dictionary of the Choctaw Language[including Choctaw-English and English-Choctaw] by Cyrus Byington. Washington, D.C.: Washington Government Printing Office, 1915.
Box Box 73
English-Choctaw Dictionary, ed. Will T. Nelson. Oklahoma City: Oklahoma city Council of Choctaws, 1972.
Box Box 35
A Dictionary of the Chokosi Language, compiled by Rev. A. C. Krass. University of Ghana, 1970.
Box Box 25
Diccionario ch'ol de Tumbalá, Chiapas, con variaciones dialectales de Tila y Sanbanilla, compiled by H. Wilbur Aulie & Evelyn W. de Aulie, 1978, reedited by Emily F. Scharfe de Stairs, 1996. Second edition [revised and enlarged].
Series:
CHONTAL OF OAXACA, HIGHLAND
Box Box 27
Dictionary: Chontal to Spanish-English, Spanish to Chontal, by Paul [R.] Turner [1929- ] & Shirley Turner. Tucson: University of Arizona Press, 1971.
Series:
CHONTAL OF TABASCO
Box Box 25
Diccionario chontal de Tabasco, by Kathryn C. Keller & Plácido Luciano G. Tucson, AZ:: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1997.
Box Box 64
Dicionário Português-Chope e Chope-Português, by Luis Feliciano dos Santos. Lourenço Marques: Imprensa Nacional de Moçambique, 1950.
Box Box 12
Diccionario del idioma ch'orti', by Vitalino Perez Martinez et al. Antigua Guatemala: Proyecto Lingüistico Francisco Marroquin, 1996.
Series:
CHOROTE, IYO'WUJWA
Box Box 67
Lengua chorote. Variedad no. 2. Estudio descriptivo-comparativo y vocabulario, by Ana Gerzenstein. [Buenos Aires]: Instituto de Linguistica, 1983.
Series:
CHUJ, SAN SEBASTIÁN COATÁN and SAN MATEO IXTATÁN
Box Box 25
Diccionario del idioma chuj. Chuj-español, by Mateo Felipe Diego & Juan Gaspar Juan. Antigua Guatemala: Proyecto Linguistico Francisco Marroquin, 1998.
Box Box 25
Series:
CHUMASH
Scope and Contents: see COSTANOAN
Box Box 25
Series:
CHUTIYA
Scope and Contents: see DEORI
Box Box 21
Trukese-English and English-Trukese Dictionary, With Notes on Pronunciation, Grammar, Vocabularies, Phrases, compiled by S[amuel] H. Elbert. [Pearl Harbor]: United States Naval Military Government, 1947.
Box Box 59
Trukese-English Dictionary. Pwpwuken Tettenin Fóós: Chuuk-Ingenes, compiledby Ward H. Goodenough & Hiroshi Sugita. Philadelphia: American Philosophical Society, 1980.
Box Box 63
Trukese-English Dictionary. Pwpwuken Tettenin Fóós: Chuuk-Ingenes. Supplementary Volume: English-Trukese and an Index of Trukese Word Roots, compiled by Ward H. Goodenough & Hiroshi Sugita. Philadelphia: American Philosophical Society, 1990.
Box Box 10
Thesaurus linguae Tschuvaschorum, by N[ikolai] I[vanovich] Ashmarin (1870-1933). Kazan: Izd. Narodnogo Komissariata po prosveshcheniiu Chuvashskoi A.S.S.R., 1928-1938, 12 vols.
Box Box 13
Deutsch-tschuwaschisches Wörterverzeichnis nebst kurzem tschuwaschen Sprachführer, ed. by Johannes Benzing. Berlin: Verlagsanstalt Otto Stollberg, 1943.
Series:
CIRCASSIAN
Scope and Contents: see also KABARDIAN
Box Box 22
A dictionary of the Circassian language. In two parts: English-Circassian-Turkish, and Circassian-English-Turkish. Containing all the most necessary words for the traveller, the soldier, and the sailor; with the exact pronunciation of each word in the English character, by L[ouis] Loewe. London: George Bell, 1854.
Box Box 28
Alphabetical Vocabularies of the Clallam and Lummi, by George Gibbs. New York: Cramoisy Press, 1863.
Box Box 59
Linguistic Material from the Tribes of Southern Texas and Northeastern Mexico, by John R[eed] Swanton. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1940.
Box Box 36
Cocopa Dictionary, by James M. Crawford. Berkeley: University of California, 1989.
Box Box 14
"Stem-List of the Coeur d'Alene Language," by Gladys A. Richard, in: International Journal of American Linguistics, New York, Vol. 10, Nos. 2-3 (November 1939), pp. 92-108.
Box Box 14
Series:
COLAC
Scope and Contents: see WATHAWURRUNG
Series:
COLOMBIAN INDIGENOUS LANGUAGES
Box Box 37
Diccionario Indio del Gran Tolima, by Pedro José Ramirez Sendoya. Bogota: Editorial Minerva, 1952.
Box Box 26
Comanche Vocabulary. Trilingual Edition, compiled by Manuel Garcia Rejón, trans. and edited by Daniel J. Gelo. Austin, Texas: University of Texas Press, 1995.
Box Box 26
Series:
COMECRUDO
Scope and Contents: see COAHUILTECO
Box Box 11
Lexique comorien (shindzuani) français, by Mohamed. Ahmed Chamanga. Paris: Editions L'Harmattan, 1992.
Box Box 11
Dictionnaire français-comorien: dialecte shindzuani, by Mohamed Ahmed Chamanga. Paris: CEROI-INALCO; L'Harmattan, 1997.
Box Box 11
Series:
CONCANIM
Scope and Contents: see KONKANI
Series:
CONGO LANGUAGES: POLYGLOT
Box Box 59
Comparative Handbook of Congo Languages; being a comparative grammar of the eight principal languages spoken along the banks of the Congo river from the west coast of Africa to Stanley Falls, a distance of 1300 miles, and of Swahili, the "lingua franca" of the country stretching thence to the east coast, with a comparative vocabulary giving 800 selected words from these languages, with their English equivalents, followed by appendices on six other dialects, compiled and prepared for the Baptist Missionary Society, London, by Walter Henry Stapleton. Yakusu, Stanley Falls, Congo Independent State: [Baptist Missionary Society], 1903.
Box Box 5
Vocabulaire français-kituba-tshiluba-tshisonge-tshikuba-tshitetela, [by Henri Gabriel Vermeersch]. Lusambo: Imprimerie, Ecole professionelle, n.d. [ca. 1900].
Box Box 5
Langues Sango, Banda, Baya, Mandjia. Notes grammaticales-Mots groupés d'après le sens. Phrases usuelles,--Vocabulaire, by A. P. Éboué. Paris: Emile Larose, 1918.
Box Box 5
Series:
COOK ISLANDS MAORI
Scope and Contents: see RATOTONGAN
Box Box 5
Series:
COOLY TAMIL
Scope and Contents: see TAMIL
Box Box 8
Die Nayarit-expedition, Textaufnahmen und Beobachtungen unter mexikanischen Indianern. Erster Band: Die Religion der Cora-Indianer in Texten nebst Wörterbuch, by Konrad Theodor Preuss [1869-1938]. Leipzig: B.G. Teubner, 1912.
Box Box 14
"Wörterbuch Deutsch-Cora," by K[onrad] Th[eodor] Preuss [1869-1938], in: International Journal of American Linguistics, New York, Columbia University Press, Vol. 8, No. 2 (December 1934), pp. [81]-102.
Box Box 39
The Mission Indian vocabularies of Alphonse Pinart, edited by R. F. Heizer. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press, 1952.
Box Box 37
The Mission Indian vocabularies of H[enry] W[etherbee] Henshaw[1850-1930], edited, with ethnographic notes by R. F. Heizer. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1955.
Box Box 37
Series:
COTONAME
Scope and Contents: see COAHUILTECO
Box Box 71
A dictionary of the Cree language, as spoken by the Indians of the Hudson's Bay Company's territories, by E[dwin] A[rthur] Watkins. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1865.
Box Box 55
Dictionnaire de la langue des Cris, by Albert Lacombe [1827-1916]. Montreal: C.O. Beauchemin & Valois, 1874.
Box Box 64
A Dictionary of the Cree Language as spoken by the Indianas in the Provinces of Quebec, Ontario, Manitoba, Saskatchewan and Alberta, based upon the foundation laid by E[dwin] A[rthur] Watkins, revised, enriched and brought up to date by J[ohn] A[lexander] Mackay, R[ichard] Faries, Edward Ahenakew, R. B. Horsefield, & J. G. Anderson. Toronto: Published under the direction of The General Synod of the Church of England in Candada, 1938.
Box Box 77
Plains Cree Dictionary in the "y" Dialect, edited by Anne Anderson. Edmonton: [Published by the author], 1975.
Box Box 13
Alberta elders' Cree dictionary. Alperta ohci kehteyak nehiyaw otwestamakewin masinahikan, by Nancy LeClaire [1911-1986]. Edmonton: University of Alberta Press; Duval House Publishing, 1998.
Box Box 13
Series:
CREOLES
Scope and Contents: see BAHAMIAN ENGLISH; BELIZEAN CREOLE; CAJUN; CARIBBEAN CREOLE; GUINEA-BISSAU CREOLE; HAITIAN CREOLE; JAMAICAN ENGLISH; KRIO; LINGALA; MARTINIQUE CREOLE; PAPIAMENTO; SANGO; ST. LUCIAN CREOLE; TRINIDAD & TOBAGO CREOLE
Box Box 13
Series:
CRIMINAL ARGOT
Scope and Contents: see CALÓ
Box Box 25
Diccionario cuicateco: español-cuicateco, cuicateco-español, by E. Richard Anderson. Mexico, D.F.: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1983.
Box Box 25
Series:
DAHOMEY FRENCH
Scope and Contents: see TOGO FRENCH
Box Box 42
Grammar and dictionary of the Dakota language, collected by the Members of the Dakota Mission, ed. by S[tephen] R[eturn] Riggs [1812-1883]. "Under the Patronage of the Historical Society of Minnesota." Washington City; New York : Smithsonian Institution; G. P. Putnam, 1852.
Box Box 57
An English and Dakota Vocabulary, by a Member of the Dakota Mission [Mary Ann Clark Riggs]. New York: A. B. C. F. M., 1852.
Box Box 76
Second edition of Dakota-English portion,1890: A Dakota-English Dictionary, by Stephen Return Riggs. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1890.
Box Box 65
Second edition, revised and enlarged, of English-Dakota portion, 1902: An English-Dakota Dictionary. Wasicun ka Dakota Ieska Wowapi, compiled by John P. Williamson. New York: American Tract Society, 1902.
Box Box 10
Reissued by the Working Indians Civil Association (1969): An English-Dakota dictionary. Wasicun ka Dakota ieska wowapi. Ft. Pierre, S.D.: Working Indians Civil Association, 1969.
Box Box 72
An English-Dakota school dictionary. Waśicun qa dakota ieska wowapi, by John P[oage] Williamson [1835-1917]. Yankton Agency, D. T., Iapi Oaye Press, 1886.
Box Box 65
Dictionary of the Sioux Language, compiled with the aid of Charles Guerreu, Indian Interpreter, by Lieuts. J.K. Hyer & W.S. Starring. [New Haven]: Yale University Press, 1968.
Box Box 15
Sioux Indian Dictionary, over 4,000 words, pronunciation-at-a-glance, by Paul Warcloud. Sisseton, South Dakota: Paul Warcloud, 1971.
Box Box 23
Christison of Lammermoor, by. M. M. Bennett. London: Alston Rivers: 1927.
Box Box 35
Adangme Vocabularies including a Klama Vocabulary, by T. N. Accam. Legon: Institute of African Studies, University of Ghana, 1966.
Box Box 35
The Writing of Dangme. The New Orthography, Spelling Rules and a Word List, by E. O. Apronti. Legon: University of Ghana, n.d. [c. 1970].
Box Box 49
Urus mezla-dargan mezla slovar. Russko-darginskii slovar. Slovar soderzhit 35 tysiach slov, by S. N. Abdullaev. Makhachkala: Izd-vo Dagestanskogo filiala Akademii nauk SSSR, 1950.
Box Box 49
Series:
DARI
Scope and Contents: see PERSIAN
Box Box 49
Series:
DAYAK, SEA
Scope and Contents: see IBAN
Box Box 26
Ten'a texts and tales from Anvik, Alaska, with vocabulary by Pliny Earle Goddard, by John W[ight] Chapman. Leyden: E. J. Brill, 1914.
Box Box 26
Series:
DEHONG
Scope and Contents: see TAI HÜA
Box Box 26
Series:
DEHU
Scope and Contents: see MINY
Box Box 26
Series:
DELAWARE
Scope and Contents: see MUNSEE, UNAMI
Box Box 4
An Outline Grammar of the Deori Chutiya Language spoken in Upper Assam, with an introduction, illustrative sentences, and a short vocabulary, by W[illiam] B[arclay] Brown. Shillong: printed at the Assam Secretariat Printing Office, 1895.
Box Box 4
Series:
DIEYERIE
Scope and Contents: see SOUTH AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL LANGUAGES
Box Box 4
Series:
DJAGA
Scope and Contents: see CHAGA
Box Box 30
La langue secrète des Dogons de Sanga (Soudan français), by Michel Leiris [1901- ]. Paris: Institut d'Ethnologie, 1948.
Box Box 9
Dictionnaire Dogon (Dialecte T[reverse "c"]r[reverse "c"]) langue et civilisation, by Genviève Calame-Griaule. Paris: Librarie C. Klincksieck, 1968.
Box Box 51
The Dumaki language: outlines of the speech of the Doma, or Bericho, of Hunza, by D[avid] L[ockhart] R[obertson] Lorimer [1876-1962]. Nijmegen: Dekker & van de Vegt, 1939.
Box Box 51
Series:
DRASI DIALECT
Scope and Contents: see SHINA
Series:
DRAVIDIAN LANGUAGES
Box Box 30
Dravidian borrowings from Indo-Aryan, by M[urray] B[amson] Emeneau & T[homas] Burrow [1904- ].Berkeley: University of California Press, 1962.
Box Box 11
Die Duala-Sprache in Kamerun: systematisches Wörterverzeichnis und Einführung in die Grammatik, by A[ugust] Seidel [1863-1916]. Heidelberg: Julius Groos, 1904.
Box Box 54
Wörterbuch der Duala-Sprache, by E[rnst] Dinkelacker. Hamburg: L. Friederichsen & Col, 1914.
Box Box 54
Series:
DUAU
Scope and Contents: see MUYUW
Box Box 31
Het huidige Negerhollandsch (teksten en woordenlijst), J[an] P[etrus] B[enjamin] de Josselin de Jong [1886- ]. Amsterdam: Koninklijke Akademie van Wetenschappen te Amsterdam, 1926.
Box Box 15
Igarra (Etuno) names: origin and meanings, by Patrick Ametu Amune. Wukari [Nigeria]: Amune Printing Press, 1991.
Box No Box
The language of Eddystone Island (western Solomon Islands), by Peter A. Lanyon-Orgill. Stanley (Scotland): The Crichton Press, 1969.
Box Box 72
Anthropoligical Report on the Edo-speaking Peoples of Nigeria. Part I. Law and Custom. Part II. Linguistics, by Northcote W[hitridge] Thomas. London: Harrison and Sons, 1910.
Box Box 71
A Concise Dictionary of the Bini Language of Southern Nigeria, by Hans Melzian. London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner and Co., 1937.
Box Box 61
"Comparative Edo Word Lists," by R.E. Bradbury, in: Research Notes from the Department of Linguistics and Nigerian Languages, University of Ibadan, pp. 1-31, June, 1968.
Box Box 65
An Edo-English Dictionary, by Rebecca N. Agheyisi. Benin City: Ethiope Publishing Corporation, 1986.
Box Box 15
Comparative Edoid: phonology and lexicon, by Ben Ohiomamhe Elugbe. [Nigeria]: University of Port Harcourt Press, 1989.
Box Box 71
The Asiatic origin of the oceanic languages: etymological dictionary of the language of Efate (New Hebrides) with an introduction, by the Rev. D[onald] MacDonald. Melbourne; London: Melville, Mullen and Slade, 262 and 264 Collins Street. London: 12 Ludgate Square, E.C., (Walker, May and Co., Printers, Mackillop Street, Melbourne), 1894.
Box Box 64
The Oceanic Languages: Their Grammatical Structure, Vocabulary, and Origin, by D. MacDonald. London: Henry Frowde, 1907.
Box Box 61
Dictionary of the Efik Language. Abridged edition. Calabar: Book Depot, Training Institution, 1906.
Box Box 61
English-Efik Dictionary. Efik-English Dictionary, by R.F.G. Adams. 2 vols. Liverpool: Philip, Son & Nephew, 1943. [2nd edition, revised.]
Box Box 3
A Learner's Dictionary of the Efik Language: Volume 1 (Efik-English), by [Efiong Ukpong Aye]. Ibadan, Nigeria: Evans Brothers, 1991.
Box Box 54
An Arabic-English Vocabulary for the use of English students of modern Egyptian Arabic, by D[onald] A[ndreas] Cameron. London: Bernard Quartich, 1892.
Box Box 63
An Arabic-English Vocabulary of the Colloquial Arabic of Egypt, containing the venacular idioms and expressions, slang phrases, etc., etc., used by the native Egyptians, compiled by Socrates Spiro. Cairo; London: Al-Mokattam Printing Office; Bernard Quaritch, 1895.
Box No Box
An English-Arabic Vocabulary of the Modern and Colloquial Arabic of Egypt, compiled by Socrates Spiro, of the Ministry of Finance. Cairo: Al-Miokattam Printing Office; London: Bernard Quartich, 1897.
Box Box 57
An Arabic Vocabulary for Egypt, by F. E. Robertson. London: Samson Low, Marston & Co., 1898.
Box Box 21
Kapauku-Malayan-Dutch-English dictionary, by Marion Doble. The Hague: Martin Nijhoff, 1960.
Box Box 67
Vocabulary of Ekele. The language spoken by the Lokele tribe living between Yanjali and Stanleyville. Congo Belge, compiled by W. Millman. Yakusu: B[aptist] M[issionary] S[ociety], 1926.
Box Box 23
Ekoid Bantu Languages of Ogoja. Part I, by David W. Crabb. London: Cambridge University Press in association with the West African Languages Survey and the Institute of African Studies, Ibadan, 1965.
Box Box 3
Dictionary of Ekpeye proper names, by Maxwell S. Ikpe. [Ibadan]: Institute of African Studies, University of Ibadan, 1972.
Box Box 13
The Polynesian Language of Mae (Emwae), New Hebrides, by A[rthur] Capell. Auckland: Linguistic Society of New Zealand, 1962.
Box Box 2
Hans Kahler: Enggano-Deutsches Wörterbuch aus dem Nachlaß herausgegeben und mit einem Deutsch-Enggano-Wörterverzeichnis versehen, by Hans Schmidt. Berlin. Hamburg Dietrich Reimer Verlag, 1987.
Box Box 22
Mordwinische Chrestomathie mit Glossar und Grammatikalischen Abriss, by H[eikki] Paasonen. Helsingfors: Finnisch-Ugrinische Gesellschaft, 1909.
Box Box 22
Series:
E-SAAN
Scope and Contents: see THAI
Box Box 22
Series:
ESKIMO
Scope and Contents: see INUKTITUT, GREENLANDIC; INUKTITUT, WESTERN CANADIAN; YUPIK, CENTRAL
Box Box 17
Franckhs Esperanto-Sprachführer. Enthaltend: Vollstndiges Taschenwörterbuch. Esperanto-Deutsch und Deutsch-Esperanto, einen Abriss der Grammatik und zahlreiche Übungen und Beispiele zur Konversation in der internationalen Hilfssprache. Stuttgart: Fransckh'sche Verlagsbundlung, 1908.
Box Box 19
The English-Esperanto Dictionary based upon the "Fundamento", the Esperanto Literature, and the National-Esperanto Dictionaries bearing Dr. Zamenhof's "Aprobo", by Joseph Rhodes. London, New York, Chicago: Fleming H. Revell Company, 1908.
Box Box 57
The Esperanto-English Dictionary, by Edward A. Millidge. Washington, D.C.: American Esperantist Society, 1912.
Box Box 49
[Cover title] Taschenwörterbuch Deutsch-Esperanto. Die zweite Sprache für Jeden, by Delkuro. [Munich: published by the author, ca. 1948].
Box Box 57
Esperanto for Americans: a Comprehensive, Concise Textbook of the International Language, Second and revised edition with conversations for world travelers, by Stanley A. Klukowski. Milwaukee, Wisconsin: Esperanto Institute of America, [1956].
Box Box 57
Series:
ESSELIN
Scope and Contents: see COSTANOAN
Box Box 57
Series:
ETHIOPIC
Scope and Contents: see GEEZ
Box Box 47
Slovar Russko-Lamutskii i Russko-Koriakskii. Petropavlovsk-on-Kamchatka: K.I.K., 1926. 3/99. Victor Kholodkov.
Box Box 59
Lamutische Grammatik mit Bibliographie, Sprachproben und Glossar, by Johannes Benzing. Wiesbaden: Franz Steiner Verlag, 1955.
Series:
EVENKI
Scope and Contents: see also ALTAIC LANGUAGES: POLYGLOT
Box Box 47
Evenkiisko-russkii slovar, by G[lafira] M[akarevna] Vasilevich. Moscow: Gos idz-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1958.
Series:
EWE
Scope and Contents: see also GA
Box Box 9
Lehrbuch der Ewhe-Sprache in Togo, Anglo-dialekt: mit Übungstücken, einem systematischen Vokabular und einem Lesebuch, by A[ugust] Seidel [1863-1916]. Heidelberg: Julius Groos, 1906. 9/26/99. 570 FF (inc. postage) (=$87.50). Wildman Press.
Box Box 67
Evefiala or Ewe-English Dictionary, by D[iedrich] Westermann. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer, 1928.
Box Box 49
Dictionary of Ewe Homonyms: Translated into French, English and German, by J.K. Adzomada. Accra, Ghana: Waterville Publishing House, 1969.
Box Box 74
Vocabulaire de la langue Ewe. I. Partie, Ewe-Français, by E. Riebstein. S.l.: n.p., n.d. Stenciled reprint of the edition of 1923.
Box Box 39
Jaunde-Wörterbuch, by M[artin] Heepe [1887- ] in collaboration with H[ermann] Nekes [1875-1948]. Hamburg: L. Friederichsen & Co., 1926.
Box Box 13
Miner's companion in Zulu, for the use of miners on the Witzatersrand gold mines. Johanesburg: Issued by the Prevention of Accidents Committee of the Rand Mutual Assurance Co., Ltd, 1920.
Box Box 5
Second edition, enlarged and revised, 1938: Miners' Companion in English, Afrikaans, Sesuto and Mine Kaffir for the use of miners on the gold mines of the Witwatersrand and extensions, issued by the Prevention of Accidents Committee of the Rand Mutual Assurance Co., Ltd, 1938. 1/19/99. $10. Africana Books.
Box Box 17
Kitchen-Kafir grammar & vocabulary, by B.G.Lloyd. [Johannesburg]: Central News Agency, Ltd., n.d. [ca. 1950].
Box Box 17
Dictionary and phrase-book of Fanagalo (kitchen Kafir): the lingua franca of southern Africa as spoken in the Union of South Africa, the Rhodesias, Portuguese East Africa, Nyasaland, Belgian Congo, etc., by J[ohn] D[aniel] Bold. [Cape Town], South Africa: Central News Agency Ltd, 1955. Third edition, revised and enlarged.
Box Box 17
Vocabulary of the Fan language in western Africa, south of the equator: with Spanish interpretation prepared on the spot, by Amado Osorio Zabala. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1887.
Box Box 17
Series:
FANTE
Scope and Contents: see AKAN
Box Box 17
Series:
FANTI
Scope and Contents: see AKAN
Box Box 17
Series:
FARSI
Scope and Contents: see PERSIAN
Box Box 17
Fasu (Námo Me)-English Dictionary, by Jean May & Eunice Loeweke. Ukrumpa, Papua New Guinea: Summer Institute of Linguistics, [1981].
Box Box 15
A Compendious Grammar of the Feejeean Language [bound with] A Feejeean an English Dictionary: with examples of common and peculiar modes of expression, and uses of words. Also containing brief hints on native customs, proverbs, the native names of the natural productions of the islands, notices of the islands of feejee, and a list of the foreign words introduced, by D[avid] Hazlewood [d. 1855]. Vewa, Fiji: Printed at the Wesleyan Mission Press, 1850 [-1852].
Box Box 16
Second edition, 1872: A Fijian and English and an English and Fijian Dictionary: with examples of common and peculiar modes of expression and uses of words, also containing brief hints of native customs, proverbs, the native names of natural productions, and notices of the Islands of Fiji, and a Grammar of the Language with examples of Native Idioms, by the late David Hazlewood, Wesleyan Missionary. Second Edition, with map, ed. by James Calvert. London: Sampson Low, Marston, and Co., 1872.
Box Box 15
A Practical Course to Facilitate the Study of the Fijian Language, by a Marist Brother. Westmead, N.S.W.: Printed at The Boys' Home, 1906.
Box Box 2
Handbook of Fijian language: a simple introduction to the grammar and construction of Fijian, with lists of useful sentences and phrases, sets of exercises, and a comprehensive vocabulary, by Harold Chambers. [Davuilevu]: [Methodist Book Depot?], 1936.
Box Box 57
A New Fijian Dictionary, compiled by A[rthur] Capell. Sydney: Australasian Medical Publishing Company, 1941.
Box Box 63
Fijian Plant Names, by B. E. V. Parham. Suva: F. W. Smith, Government Printer, 1942.
Box Box 63
Series:
FIOTE
Scope and Contents: see VILI
Box Box 17
The Culture and Language of the Foe. The People of Lake Kutubu, Southern Highlands Province, Papua New Guinea, by Murray Rule. Merewether, NSW.: Murray Rule, 1993.
Box Box 27
Manuel dahomeen: grammaire, chrestomathie, dictionnaire français-dahomeen et dahomeen-françaism, by Maurice Delafosse [1870-1926]. Paris: Ernest Leroux, 1894.
Box Box 38
Dictionnaire Fõ-Français, by B. Segurola. Cotonou, [Benin]: Procure de l'Archidiocèse, 1963. Two vols.
Box Box 38
Series:
FOOCHOW DIALECT
Scope and Contents: see CHINESE, MIN DONG
Box Box 38
Series:
FRAFRA
Scope and Contents: see GURMA
Box Box 73
Louisiana-French, by William A. Read. Baton Rouge: Louisiana State University Press, 1931.
Box Box 63
A Dictionary of the Cajun Language, by Jules O. Daigle. Ann Arbor, Michigan: Edwards Brothers, [1984].
Box Box 63
Series:
FULA / FULANI
Scope and Contents: see FULFULDE
Series:
FULFULDE, ADAMAWA
Box Box 15
A Fulani-Hausa Vocabulary, by F[rank] W[illiam] Taylor [1887- ]. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1927.
Box Box 16
A Fulani-English Dictionary, by F[rank] W[illiam] Taylor [1887- ]. London: Oxford University Press, 1932. Second copy: 5/27/99. $8.16. Powell's Book Store.
Box Box 34
An English-Fulfulde dictionary, by Paul Kazihisa Eguchi. Tokyo: Institute for the Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa (ILCAA), 1986.
Series:
FULFULDE, GOURMANTCHE
Box Box 8
Dictionnaire Français-Peul (dialects de la Haute-Volta), by Jean Cremer. Paris: Paul Gueuthner, 1923.
Series:
FULFULDE, NIGERIAN
Box Box 61
A Fulfulde English Dictionary, ed. by I. A. Mukosky. Lagos: Nigeria Educational Research and Development Council, 1991.
Box Box 21
Fulas do Gabú, by José Mendes Moreira. Bissau: Centro de Estudos da Guiné Portuguesa, 1948.
Box Box 78
Petit lexique peul-français de la faune et de la flore du Fouta Toro, by Oumar Ba. [Dakar]: Centre de Linguistique Appliquée de Dakar, 1968.
Box Box 15
Hippocrene Standard Dictionary Pulaar-English English-Pulaar, by Mamadou Niang. New York: Hippocrene Books, 1997.
Box Box 62
Dictionnaire Futunien-Français avec notes grammaticales, by [Isidore] Grézel. Paris: Maisonneuve et Cie, 1878.
Box Box 62
Tikisionalio Fakafutuna-Fakafalani. Dictionnaire Futunien-Français, by Karl H. Rensch. Canberra: Australian National University, 1986.
Box Box 62
Series:
FUTUNIEN
Scope and Contents: see FUTUNA, EAST
Box Box 54
Preliminary Gaam-English-Gaam dictionary, by Malik Agarr Ayre & M[arvin] Lionel Bender. N.p.: n.p., 1980.
Box Box 13
Gade-English dictionary: including English-Gade reference dictionary and summary of Gade grammar, Jan P. Sterk. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer, 1994.
Box Box 5
Gafat Documents. Record of a South-Ethiopic Language. Grammar, Text and Comparative Vocabulary, by Wolf Leslau. New Haven: American Oriental Society, 1945.
Box Box 74
Woordenlijst, Galelareesch-Hollandsch, met ethnologische aanteekeningen, op de woorden, die daartoe aanleiding gaven, compiled by M.J. Van Baarda. 'S-Gravenhage: Martinus Nijhoff, 1895.
Box Box 74
Series:
GALLA
Scope and Contents: see OROMO, BORANA-ARSI-GUJI
Box Box 74
Series:
GAMILARAAY
Scope and Contents: see KAMILAROI
Series:
GANDA
Scope and Contents: see also BANTU LANGUAGES
Box Box 24
Luganda-English and English-Luganda vocabulary, by G[eorge] R[obert] Blackledge. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1904.
Box Box 67
A Manual of Lu-Ganda, by W[illiam] A[rthur] Crabtree. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1921.
Box Box 62
A Luganda-English and English-Luganda Dictionary, compiled by A[rthur] L[eonard] Kitching & G[eorge] R[obert] Blackledge. Kampala; London: The Uganda Bookshop; Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1925.
Box Box 12
Revised edition (1952): A Luganda-English and English-Luganda dictionary, being a revision by E. M. Mulira & E. G. M. Ndawula of the dictionary compiled by A[rthur] L[eonard] Kitching & G. R. Blackledge. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1952.
Box Box 64
Luganda-English Dictionary, by R.A. Snoxall. Oxford: The Clarendon Press, 1965.
Box Box 68
Luganda-English Dictionary, by John D. Murphy. Washington, D.C.: The Catholic University of America Press, 1972.
Box Box 68
Series:
GANGUELA
Scope and Contents: see NYEMBA
Box Box 6
Notes on Gawar-Bati, by Georg Morgenstierne. Oslo: I Kommisjon Hos Jacob Dybwad, 1950.
Box Box 18
Gajosch-Nederlandsch woordenboek, met Nederlandsch-Gajosch register, by G[odard] A[rend] J[ohannes] Hazeu. Batavia: Landsdrukkerij, 1907; rubberstamped 's-Gravenhage | Martinus Nijhoff.
Box Box 62
Dictionnaire Ngbandi (Ubangi-Congo belge) Français-Ngbandi Ngbandi-Français, by Benjamin Lekens. Antwerp: Éditions de Sikkel, 1952
Box Box 62
Series:
GBANZIRI
Scope and Contents: see NGBAKA MA'BO
Series:
GBAYA, NORTHWEST
Scope and Contents: see also CONGO LANGUAGES, POLYGLOT
Box Box 65
Vocabulaire de la langue Baya (Haute Sanga), by Léopold Landréau. Paris: Augustin Challamel, 1900.
Box Box 1
Vocabulaire Français-Gbéa, précédé d'éléments de grammaire, by J. Calloc'h. Paris: Librairie Paul Geuthner, 1911.
Box Box 3
The Gbeya Language: Grammar, Texts, and Vocabularies, by William J. Samarin. Original wrappers. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1966.
Box Box 12
Za'ijob Ludalf mazegaba galate za-lesana gedeze zewe'etu lesana mashafa za'itjoseja =sive, Jobi Ludolfi I.C. Lexicon aethiopico-latinum : ex omnibus libris impressis, nonnullisque manuscriptis collectum : et cum docto quodam Aethiope relectum : accessit authoris Grammatica, cum aliis nonnullis quorum catalogum sequens pagina exhibebit, by Hiob Ludolf [1624-1704]. Londini: Apud Thomam Roycroft, LL. Orientalium Typographum Regium. A.S., 1661.
Box Box 14
The Book of Jonah in Four Semitic Versions: viz. Chaldee, Syriuac, Aethiopic and Arabic with corresponding Glossaries, by W[illiam] Wright [1830-1889]. London: Williams and Norgate, 1857.
Box Box 16
Lexicon linguae aethiopicae cum indice latino. Adiectum est vocabularium tigre dialecti septentrionalis comilatum a Wernern Munzinger, by Chr. Fr. August Dillmann [1823-1894]. Leipzig: T.O. Weigel, 1865.
Box Box 12
Ethiopic Grammar with Chrestomathy and Glossary, by Samuel A[lfred] B[rowne] Mercer [b. 1880]. Oxford: The Clarendon Press, 1920.
Box Box 20
Supplément au Lexicon linguae aethiopicae de August Dillmann (1865) et édition du lexique de Juste d'Urbin (1850-1855), by Sylvain Grébaut. Paris: Imprimerie Nationale, 1952.
Box Box 9
A Dictionary of the Nggela Language (Florida, British Solomon Islands), by C[harles] E[lliot] Fox. Auckland, N.Z.: The Unity Press, 1955.
Box Box 43
Vocabularie et grammaire de la langue Géorginne. Première partie, contenant le vocabulaire Géorgien-Français et Fr.-Géorgien, by J[ulius von] Klaproth. Paris: Dondey-Dupré Père et Fils, 1827.
Box Box 9
Karthul-Germanuli sitqvari = Georgisch-Deutsches Worterbuch., by Richard. Meckelein. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter, 1928.
Box Box 59
Georgian-English Dictionary, compiled by E. Cherkesi. Oxford: Printed for the Trustees of the Marjory Wardrop Fund, University of Oxford, 1950.
Box Box 47
Kartul-rusuli leksikoni, 3 vols., by Ketevan Datikasvili. [Tbilisi]: Saxelgami, 1953, 1959, 1967.
Box Box 47
English-Georgian Dictionary. Second edition, 8,000 words, by Thamar and Isidore Gvarjaladze. Additional title page in Russian. Tbilisi: State Publishing House, 1955.
Box Box 10
Georgisch-Deutsches Wörterbuch, 3 vols., by Kita Tschenkéli, continued after his death by Yolanda Marchev. Zurich: Amirani-Verlag, 1965, 1970, 1974.
Box Box 48
Kratkii russko-gruzinskii slovar, by A[leksandr] G[avrilovich] Torotadze. Tbilisi: "Sabchota Sakartvelo", 1969.
Box Box 5
English and Georgian Thematic Vocabulary (5,500 words approx), by Zinaida Garsevanidze. Tbilisi: Publishing House 'Ganatleba', 1973.
Box Box 5
Series:
GIDABAL
Scope and Contents: see BANDJALANG
Box Box 5
Series:
GIDHABAL
Scope and Contents: see BANDJALANG
Series:
GIKUYU
Scope and Contents: see also KAMBA; LUO; UGANDAN LANGUAGES
Box Box 26
Tentative studies in Kikuyu grammar and idiom, by A. Ruffell Barlow. Edinburgh: Printed for the Foreign Mission Committee of the Church of Scotland and the Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, London, by W. Blackwood, 1914.
Box Box 32
English-Kikuyu, Kikuyu-English vocabulary, by B[ethuel] M[areka] Gecaga & W. H. Kirkaldy-Willis. Dar es Salaam, Nairobi, Kampala: Eagle Press, n.d. [1953?]. Fall 2000. $15.
Box Box 64
Kikuyu-English Dictionary, edited by T.G. Benson. London: Oxford University Press, 1964.
Box Box 64
Series:
GILBERTESE
Scope and Contents: see KIRIBATI
Box Box 64
Series:
GILGITI DIALECT
Scope and Contents: see SHINA
Box Box 48
Nivkhsko-russkii slovar. Svyshe 13 000 slov, by V[alentina] N[ikolaevna] Saveleva & C[huner] M[ikhailovich] Taksami. Moscow: "Sov. Entsiklopediia", 1970.
Box Box 3
Giryama vocabulary and collections, by W[illiam] E[rnest] Taylor [1855 or 6- ]. London: Society for Promoting Christian knowledge, 1891.
Box Box 54
Die Gola-Sprache in Liberia. Grammatik, Texte und Wörterbuch, by Diedrich Westermann. Hamburg: L. Friederichsen & Co., 1921.
Box Box 54
Series:
GOLD
Scope and Contents: see NANAI
Box Box 57
Gondi Grammar and Vocabulary, by H[enry] D[rummond] Williamson. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, n.d. [c. 1890].
Box Box 30
A comparative vocabulary of the Gondi dialects, by T[homas] Burrow & S[udhibhushan] Bhattacharya. Calcutta: The Asiatic Society,[1960].
Box Box 24
First Gondi Manual, by S. B. Patwardhan. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, [1935].
Box Box 22
Zur Holontalo-Sprache. Inaugural-Dissertation zur Erlangung der philosopischen Doktowürde an der Universit¨a;t Leipzig, by Whilhelm Joest [1852-1898]. Berlin: Druck von Gebr. Unger (Th. Grimm), 1883.
Box Box 43
Gorontalosche Woordenlijst, by E[ngelbertus] E[liza] W[illem] G[erards] Schröder. s'Gravenhage: Martinus Nijhoff, 1908.
Series:
GRAND COULI (NEW CALEDONIA)
Box Box 35
Grand Couli Dictionary (New Caledonia), by G. W. Grace. Canberra: The Australian National University, 1976.
Box Box 17
A Grebo-English Dictionary, by Gordon Innes. London: Cambridge University Press, 1967.
Box Box 65
A Grebo-English Dictionary, by Gordon Innes. London: Cambridge University Press, 1967. Second copy, reprinted 1969.
Box Box 65
Series:
GREEN HMONG
Scope and Contents: see HMONG NJUA
Box Box 65
Series:
GREEN MIAO
Scope and Contents: see HMONG NJUA
Box Box 29
Dicionário de tupi moderno (Dialeto tembé-ténêtéhar do alto rio Gurupi), by Max H. Boudin. São Paulo: Governo do Estado, 1966.
Series:
GUARANÍ, PARAGUAYAN and GUARANÍ, MBYÁ
Box Box 10
Diccionario guarani-espanol y espanol-guarani, by Anselmo Jover Peralta & Tomas Osuna. Buenos Aires: Editorial Tupa, 1950.
Box Box 8
Diccionario Ñe'eryru Guaraní / Castellano = Castellano / Guarní, [by Lino Trinidad Sanabria]. Asunción, Paraguay: Editorial Omega, 1998.
Box Box 42
Gran diccionario katygara: guarani-castellano, castellano-guarani, by Felix de Guarania. Asuncion: Centro Editorial Paraguayo, 1998. 1/17/00.
Box Box 62
Guaymí Grammar and Dictionary with some Ethnological Notes, by Ephraim S. Alphonse. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1956.
Box Box 14
Diccionario Guaymi Español-Ingles, by Ephraim S. J. Alphonse. Panama: Asamblea Espiritual Nacional de los Bahais de Panama, 1987
Box Box 14
Series:
GUERZÉ
Scope and Contents: see KPELLE
Series:
GUINEA-BISSAU CREOLE
Box Box 65
Petit Dictionnaire Etymologique du Kriol de Guinée-Bissau et Casamance, by Jean-Louis Rougé. Bissau, Guinea-Bissau: Instituto Nacional de Estudos e Perquisa, 1988.
Box Box 22
An etymological Gujarati-English dictionary. Second edition, revised and enlarged, by Malhar Bhikaji Belsare. Ahmedabad: H.K. Pathak, 1904.
Box Box 22
Series:
GULLAH
Scope and Contents: see SEA ISLANDS CREOLE ENGLISH
Box Box 22
Series:
GUMAWANA
Scope and Contents: see MUYUW
Box Box 22
Series:
GUNGABULA
Scope and Contents: see BIDYARA
Box Box 22
Series:
GURESI DIALECT
Scope and Contents: see SHINA
Box Box 59
Die Gurenne-Sprache in Nordghana. Teil I. Einführung in das Gurenne. Sprichwörter der Gurense. Teil II. Wörterbuch Gurenne-Deutsch, by Eugen Ludwig Rapp. Leipzig: VEB Verlag Enzyklop¨a;die, 1966.
Box Box 59
Essaie pour une phonologie du Gurma parlé à Kpana (Nord-Togo), by Nicole Tersis[-Surugue]. Paris: SELAF [Societé d'études linguistiques et anthropologiques de France], 1967. Cover reads: 1972.
Box Box 53
A manuscript vocabulary list of approximately thirty English words and numbers 1-11, 100, 1000, with equivalents in Wuri, Pωñgω-Sωñgω, and Aba ("not Abo"), cir. 1920.
Box Box 37
An Outline of Gwandara Phonemics and Gwandara-English Vocabulary, by Sjuji Matsushita. [Tokyo]: [Institute for the Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa, 1972].
Box Box 34
A comparative vocabulary of Gwandara dialects, by Shuji Masushita [1942- ]. [Tokyo]: Institute for the Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa, 1974.
Box Box 34
Series:
GWICH'IN
Scope and Contents: see POLYGLOT: WORLD LANGUAGES. See Opuscula, by Robert Latham, for first published vocabulary of Gwhich'in.
Box Box 34
Series:
GYPSY
Scope and Contents: see ANGLO ROMANI, ROMANI
Series:
HAIDA
Scope and Contents: see also CHINOOK WAWA
Box Box 28
Haida dictionary, compiled by Erma Lawrence. Fairbanks: Society for the Preservation of Haida Language and Literature, and the Alaska Native Language Center, University of Alaska, 1977.
Box Box 33
Phonology, dictionary, and listing of roots and lexical derivates of the Haisla language of Kitlope and Kitimaat, B.C., 2 vols. by Neville J. Lincoln & John C. Rath. [Ottawa]: National Museums of Canada, 1986.
Series:
HAITIAN CREOLE FRENCH
Box Box 18
Haitian Creole. Grammar. Texts. Vocabulary, by Robert A. Hall, Jr. S.l.: American Anthropological Association, 1953.
Box Box 9
Diksyonè Kréyòl Dictionary. Creole-English. Anglé-Kréyòl, by Edner A. Jeanty. Port-au-Prince: La Presse Evangélique, 1985.
Box Box 65
"Second edition", 1989: Diksyonè Kréyòl Dictionary. Creole-English. Anglé-Kréyòl, by Edner A. Jeanty. Port-au-Prince: La Presse Evangélique, 1985.
Box Box 16
Diksyone Kreyol Angle, by Féquière Vilsaint. Temple Terrace, FL: Educa Vision, 1991.
Box Box 21
Dictionary of Haitian Creole verbs: with phrases and idioms, by Emmanuel W. Vedrine. Cambridge, MA: Soup To Nuts Publishers, 1992.
Box Box 54
Haitian Creole-English Dictionary, by Jean Targète & Raphael G. Urciolo. Kensington, Maryland: Dunwoody Press, 1993.
Box Box 68
A Learner's Dictionary of Haitian Creole, by Albert Valdman, Charles Pooser, & Rozevel Jean-Baptiste. Bloomington, Indiana: Creole Institute, Indiana University, 1996.
Box Box 20
Haitian-English Dictionary, by Bryant C. Freeman & Jowel Laguerre. Lawrence, Kansas; Port-au-Prince: Institute of Haitian Studies, University of Kansas; La Presse Evangélique, 1996.
Box Box 20
Series:
HALAKKI KANNADA
Scope and Contents: see KANNADA
Box Box 29
[cover title] A vocabulary of native words in the Halkomelem language, as used by the native people of the Lower Fraser Valley, B.C.by Oliver N. Wells [1907-1970]. [British Columbia]: Oliver N. Wells, 1965.
Box Box 65
Second edition, 1969: A Vocabulary of Native Words in the Halkomelem Language as used by the Native People of the Lower Fraser Valley, B.C. [English-Halkomelem], by Oliver N. Wells. N.p [Sardis, B.C.]: n.pub. [Oliver Wells], n.d. [1969].
Box Box 34
Hani-English English-Hani Dictionary: Haqniqdoq-Yilyidoq, Doqlo-Soqdaoq, compiled by Paul W[hite] Lewis & Bai Bibo. London; New York; Leiden: Kegan Paul International; International Institute for Asian Studies, 1996.
Box Box 61
Hanunóo-English Vocabulary, by Harold C. Conklin. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press, 1953.
Box Box 4
Etymological Dictionary of Harari, by Wolf Leslau. Berkeley: University of California, 1963.
Box Box 16
Harsusi Lexicon and English-Harsusi Word-list, by T[homas] M. Johnstone. London: Oxford University Press, 1977.
Box Box 39
Essai de dictionnaire français-haoussa et haoussa-français, précedé d'un Essai de grammaire de la langue haoussa, Magana n haoussa [arabic script] renfermant les éléments du langage parlé par les négres du Soudan, accompagné d'une carte de l'Afrique septentrionale, by Jean Marie Le Roux [1846- ]. Alger: Adolphe Jourdan, 1886. Second copy with map, but spine rebound with unprinted brown cloth, utilizing original wrappers.
Box Box 36
Dictionary of the Hausa Language. Vol. I. Hausa-English. Vol. II. English-Hausa, 2 vols., by Charles Henry Robinson, assisted by W. H. Brooks. Cambridge: at the University Press, 1899-1900.
Box Box 9
Third edition, 1914, of volume II: Dictionary of the Hausa Language. Vol. II English-Hausa, by Charles Henry Robinson. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1914.
Box Box 17
Die sprache der Hausa. Grammatik, Übungen und Chrestomathie, sowie hausanisch-deutsches und deutsch-hausanisches Wörterverzeichniss, by Ernst C[arl Nikolaus] Marré [1874- ]. Vienna: A. Hartleben, [1901].
Box Box 10
Wörterbuch der Hausasprache. 1. Teil: Hausa-Deutsch, by Adam Mischlich [1864- ]. Berlin: Georg Reimer, 1906.
Box Box 11
Die Haussasprache. La langue haoussa, The Hausa language: grammatik (deutsch) und systematisch Wörterbuch: haussa-deutsch-französisch-english. Grammaire (en francais) et vocabulaire systematique: Haoussa-allemand-français-anglais. Grammar (in English) and systematic vocabulary: Hausa-German-French-English, by A[ugust] Seidel [1863-1916]. Heidelberg: Julius Groos, 1906.
Box Box 11
Hausa Stories and Riddles, with Notes on theLanguage etc. and a concise Hausa Dictionary, by Hermann G. Harris. Weston-Super-Mare: The Mendip Press, [1908].
Box Box 29
Dictionnaire haoussa, by M[oise Augustin] Landeroin & J[ean] Tilho [1875-1956]. Paris: Imprimerie nationale, 1909.
Box Box 67
A Practical Hausa Grammar, With Exercises, Vocabularies and Specimen Examination Papers, by F[rank] W[illiam] Taylor. Oxford: The Clarendon Press, 1923.
Box Box 73
A Hausa-English Dictionary and English-Hausa Vocabulary, compiled for the Government of Nigeria, by G.P. Bargery. London: Oxford University Press, 1934.
Box Box 56
Dictionary of the Hausa Language, by R[oy] C[live] Abraham & Malam Mai Kano. [London]: Published on behalf of the Government of Nigeria by the Crown Agents for the Colonies, 1949.
Box Box 33
Wörterbuch der Ewe-Sprache, Diedrich Westermann [1875-1956]. Berlin: Akademie-Verlag, 1954.
Box Box 64
Hanyar Tadi da Turanci: A Dictionary of English Conversation for Hausa Students. Zaria, Nigeria; London: Norla; Longmans, Green and Co., 1957.
Box Box 52
Khausa-russkii slovar: okolo 18000 slov, by D[mitrii] A[lekseevich] Olderogge. Moscow: Gos idz-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1963.
Box Box 65
Kamus Na Turanci Da Hausa[Hausa-English Dictionary] compiled by Neil Skinner. Zaria, Nigeria: Gaskiya Corporation, 1965.
Box Box 15
The Learner's Russian-Hausa-Yoruba Dictionary: 2100 entries. Added title page in Russian: Uchebnyi russko-khausa-ioruba slovar. Foreword and introduction in Russian and English. Moscow: Yazyk Publishers, 1987.
Box Box 10
Wörterbuch Hausa-Deutsch, by Irmtraud Herms. Leipzig: VEB Verlag Enzyklop¨a;die, 1987.
Box Box 23
An English-Hausa Dictionary, by Roxana Ma Newman. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1990.
Box Box 33
Hausa in the media a lexical guide : Hausa-English-German, English-Hausa, German-Hausa, by Joseph McIntyre. Hamburg Helmut Buske Verlag, 1991.
Box Box 12
Sabon kamus na Hausa zuwa Turanci. Modern Hausa-English dictionary, compiled by Paul Newman and Roxana Ma Newman, assisted by Ibrahim Yaro Yahaya and Linda Dresel and Centre for the Study of Nigerian Languages, Bayero University College. Reprinted with corrections. Ibadan: University Press PLC, 1992.
Series:
HAVASUPAI- WALAPAI-YAVAPAI
Box Box 27
Comparative Vocabularies and Parallel Texts in Two Yuman Languages of Arizona, by Leslie Spier. Albuquerque: The University of New Mexico Press, 1946.
Box Box 62
A Voyage Round the World, from 1806 to 1812; in which Japan, Kamschatka, the Aleutian Islands and the Sandwich Islands were Visited…With an Account of the Present State of the Sandwich Islands, and a Vocabulary of their Language, by Archibald Campbell. Edinburgh: A. Constable & Co., 1816.
Box Box 33
A dictionary of the Hawaiian language, to which is appended an English-Hawaiian vocabulary and a chronological table of remarkable events, by Lorrin Andrews [1795-1868]. Honolulu, H. I.: Printed by H. M. Whitney, 1865.
Box Box 70
Third edition (1922): A Dictionary of the Hawaiian Language, by Lorrin Andrews, revised by Henry H. Parker. Honolulu: The Board of Commissioners of Public Archives of the Territory of Hawaii, 1922.
Box Box 64
An Hawaiian-English Dictionary; with various useful tables; prepared for the use of Hawaiian-English schools, by H[arvey] R[exford] Hitchcock. San Francisco: Bancroft Company, 1887.
Box Boxes 17 and 18
English-Hawaiian words. Translations which will enable you to speak and more thoroughly understand the Hawaiian language, by O. Shaw. Honolulu: J. W. Driscoll & Co., distributors, 1938. 11/05/99.
Box Box 17
The Hawaiian Language and Hawaiian-English Dictionary: a complete Grammarby Henry P. Judd. Honolulu: Hawaiian Service, 1939.
Box Box 61
Introduction to the Hawaiian Language. An English-Hawaiian Vocabulary...Hawaiian-English Vocabulary, by Henry P. Judd, Mary Kawena Pukui, & John F.G. Stokes. Honolulu: Tongg Publishing Company, 1943.
Box Box 73
Hawaiian-English Dictionary, by Mary Kawena Pukui & Samuel H. Elbert. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press, 1957.
Box Box 11
English-Hawaiian Dictionary, by Mary Kawena Pukui & Samuel H. Elbert. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press, 1964.
Box Box 43
Place Names of Hawaii and Supplement to the Third Edition of the Hawaiian-English Dictionary, by Mary Kawena Pukui & Samuel H. Elbert. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press, 1966.
Box Box 54
Hawaiian Dictionary. Hawaiian-English. English-Hawaiian, by Mary Kawena Pukui & Samuel H. Elbert. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press, 1971.
Box Box 29
"An Early Hawaiian Vocabulary,' in: The Hawaiian Journal of History, Vol. 25, 1991, pp. 21-30. Honolulu: Hawaiian Historical Society,1991.
Series:
HAWAI'I CREOLE ENGLISH
Box Box 7
Pidgin to da max, by Douglans Simonson (Peppo), Ken Sakata & Pat Saski. Honolulu: Peppovision, 1981.
Box Box 31
Pidgin to da max Hana Hou, by Douglans Simonson (Peppo), Ken Sakata, Pat Sasaki & Todd Kurosawa. Honolulu: Peppovision, 1982. Enlarged edition.
Box Box 31
Reissued in 1992: Honolulu: The Bess Press, 1992.
Box Box 78
A Practical Heiltsuk-English Dictionary, John C. Rath. Two vols. Ottawa: National Museums of Canada, 1981.
Box Box 43
Wörterbuch und kurzgefasste Grammtik des Otji-Hérero mit Beifügung verwandter Ausdrücke und Formen des Oshi-Ndonga-Otj-Ambo, by [Peter] H[einrich] Brincker. ed. by C. G. Büttner. Leipzig: T. O. Weigel, 1886.
Box Box 6
Deutsch-Herero-Wörterbuch, by J[akob] Irle. Hamburg: L. Friederichsen & Co., 1917.
Box Box 55
Otjiherero. Woordeboek. Dictionary. Embo Romanbo, by J[ohannes] J[urgens] Viljoen & T.K. Kampupingene. Windhoek: Gamsberg, 1983.
Series:
HIMLAYAN DIALECTS
Box Box 49
Linguistic Studies from the Himalayas, being Studies in the Grammar of Fifteen Himalayan Dialects, by T. Grahame Bailey. London: Royal Asiatic Society, 1915. [NOTE: 1920 is incorrectly printed on the cover]
Series:
HINDI / HINDUSTANI
Box Box 46
A Dictionary English and Hindoostanee to which is affixed a Grammar of the Hindoostanee Language, by John Gilchrist. Calcutta: printed by Stuart and Cooper, 1786, 1790.
Box Box 7
A dictionary, Hindustani and English, by John Shakespear. London: printed for the author, by Cox and Baylis, 1820.
Box Box 70
A Dictionary, Hindoostanee and English, abridged from the Quarto Edition of Major Joseph Taylor, as edited by the late W. Hunter, M.D., by William Carmichael Smyth. London: printed for the editor, 1820.
Box Box 63
A Dictionary, English and Hinduwee, by M.T. Adam. Calcutta: Printed at the School-Book Society's Press, 1833.
Box Box 3
An introduction to the Hindustani language comprising a grammar, and a vocabulary, English and Hindustani; also short stories and dialogues, short stories in Persian and Nagari characters with some grammatical analysis; Hindustani composition or facilities for translating English into Hindustanti and military words of command, Nagari and English, by John Shakespear. London: W. H. Allen & Co., 1845.
Box Box 70
A Dictionary, Hindustani & English: to which is added a reversed part, English and Hindustani, by Duncan Forbes. London: Wm. H. Allen and Co., 1848.
Box Box 9
Second edition, enlarged, 1866: A dictionary, Hindustani & English: accompanied by a reversed dictionary, English and Hindustani. The second edition, greatly enlarged., and much improved, by Duncan Forbes. London: W.H. Allen & Co., 1866. Second edition, enlarged and revised.
Box Box 56
A New Hindustani-English Dictionary, with illustrations from Hindustani Literature and Folk-Lore, by S. W. Fallon. Banaras; London: E. J. Lazarus and Co.; Trübner and Co., 1879.
Box Box 57
The English & Hindi Dictionary. An Etymological, Idiomatic and Illustrated Dictionary, by Thomas Craven. Lucknow: American Methodist Mission Press, 1882.
Box Box 32
A new English-Hindustani dictionary with illustrations from English literature and colloquial English, translated into Hindustani, by S.W. Fallon [1817-1880] and John Drew Bate. Banaras: Printed at the Banaras Medical Hall Press, sold by E.J. Lazarus, Barnaras and Trübner and Co., London, 1883.
Box Box 15
Hindustani Idioms with vocabulary and explanatory notes for the use of candidates for the higher standard, by A. N. Phillips. London: Kegan, Paul, Trench, Trübner and Co., 1892.
Box Box 22
An English-Hindustani Dictionary, by George S[peirs] A[alexander] Ranking. Calcutta: Thacker, Spink & Co., 1905.
Box Box 28
The Eng.-Hind. vocabulary of 3000 words for higher standard and proficiency candidates; or, "The right word in the right place," by D[ouglas] C[raven] Phillott [1860-1930]. Calcutta: Printed at the Baptist Mission Press, 1911.
Box Box 24
The Imperial Hindee and English Dictionary (with Pronunciations), by M. B. Trailokya. Bombay: Printed the Native Opinion Press, Girgaon, and published by Mokund Shantaram Naik, Girgaum, 1919.
Box Box 34
Abriss der Hindustani-Sprachlehre und deutsch-indisches Wörterverzeichnis, by the staff of the (Ind). I.R. 950. N.p. n.d. [circa 1910?]
Box Box 18
Guide to Hindustani. Lessons in Grammar. Key to Exercises. Vocabulary. Specially prepared for use in Fiji, by A. W. McMillan. Suva, Fiji: Government Press, 1947.
Box Box 72
Khindi-russkii slovar. okolo 35000 slov, by V[asilii] M[atveevich] Beskrovnyi. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsional'nykh slovarei, 1953.
Box Box 47
Karmannyi russko-khindi slovar. 8000 slov, by Z[alman] M[ovshevich] Dymshits. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1958.
Box Box 48
Karmannyi Khindi-russkii slovar. 9500 slov, by Z[alman] M[ovshevich] Dymshits. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1958.
Box Box 52
The authentic senior dictionary, Anglo-Hindi, with over 1000 illustrations and about 1,70,000 references, comprising a modern English dictionary with correct pronunciations and accents in Devanagari script, definitions and explanations in English and Hindi, together with several useful appendices, B. C. Pathak, C. S. Pathak, and R[am] C[handra] Pathak. Varanasi: Hindi Pracharak Pustakalaya, 1958.
Box Box 55
The Oxford Progressive English-Hindi Dictionary. [transliteration] Oksafarda progresiva Angrezi-Hindi kosa, by S[hivendra] K[ishore] Verma & R.N. Sahai. Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1977.
Box Box 2
Build your Hindi vocabulary through English, by James R. Sookhoo. St. Augustine, Trinidad, W.I.: Industrial Laboratories Research, 1985.
Box Box 74
The Oxford Hindi-English Dictionary, ed. by R. S. McGregor. Oxford, Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1993.
Box Box 75
English Hindi Dictionary, by D. P. Pandey & V. P. Shamra. New Delhi: Indus, [1993].
Box Box 38
White Meo-English Dictionary, compiled by Ernest E. Heimbach. Ithaca, NY: Southeast Asia Program, Cornell University, 1969.
Box Box 61
Revised edition, 1979: White Hmong-English Dictionary, compiled by Ernest E. Heimbach. Ithaca, NY: Southeast Asia Program, Cornell University, 1979.
Box Box 35
A Dictionary of Mong Njua: a Miao (Meo) Language of Southeast Asia, by Thomas Amis Lyman. The Hague / Paris: Mouton, 1974.
Box Box 19
English-Mong-English Dictionary. Phoo Txhais lug Aakiv-Moob-Aakiv, by Lang xiong, Joua Xiong & Nao Leng Xiong. [Milwaukee, Wisconsin: published by the authors, printed by Hetrick Printing, Inc., 1983].
Box Box 63
Ho Grammar (with vocabulary), by Lionel Burrows. Calcutta: Catholic Orphan Press, 1915.
Box Box 63
Series:
HOKKIEN
Scope and Contents: see AMOY
Box Box 56
Esquisse de la langue Holoholo, by A. Coupez. Antwerp: Commission de Linguistique Africaine, 1955.
Box Box 2
Hom-idyomo: outline of an auxiliary international language without declinations and absolutely phonetic. Book first: practical grammar.--Book second: Hom-idyomo dictionary.--Book third: English and Hom-idyomo dictionary, by C[ipriano] Cardenas (1858- ). Leipzig: C. Cardenas, 1923.
Box Box 43
[Cover title] Ornithological vocabulary of the Moki Indians, by Edgar A[lexander] Mearns [1856-1916]. Washington, D.C.: Judd & Detweiler, Printers, 1896.
Box Box 31
Hopi domains: a lexical approach to the problem of selection, by Charles F[rederick] Voegelin [1906- ] & Flrorence M[arie Robinett] Voegelin [1927- ]. Baltimore: Waverly Press, 1957.
Box Box 16
"Hodge Hopi Lists (computed by P.D.S.) [Hopi-English & English-Hopi (draft]. [Cover title] "Hopi Lists, computed by P. D[avid] S[eaman] (HOPI-ENGLISH and ENG.-HOPI draft). 29 June 1982." Flagstaff, AZ: P. David Seaman, [1982].
Box Box 16
Hopi Dictionary. Hopi-English English-Hopi. Grammatical Appendix, by P. David Seaman. Flagstaff, Arizona: Northern Arizona University, 1996. Revised edition.
Box Box 41
Hopi dictionary = Hopiikwa lavaytutuveni : a Hopi-English dictionary of the Third Mesa dialect with an English-Hopi finder list and a sketch of Hopi grammar, compiled by The Hopi Dictionary Project, Bureau of Applied Research in Anthropology, University of Arizona. Tucson: University of Arizona Press, 1998.
Series:
HOUAÏLOU: see AJIE
Box Box 38
Vocabulaire et grammaire de la langue Houaïlou, by Maurice Leenhardt. Paris: Institut d'Ethnologie, 1935.
Series:
HUAVE, SAN MATEO DEL MAR
Box Box 25
Diccionario huave de San Mateo del Mar, by Glenn Albert Stairs Kreger & Emily Florence Scharfe de Stairs. Mexico, D.F.: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1981.
Series:
HUITOTO, MI+NI+CA; HUITOTO, MURUI
Box Box 32
Religion und Mythologie der Uitoto. Textaufnahmen und Beobachtungen bei einem Indianerstamm in Kolumbien, Südamerika, 2 vols., by Konrad Theodor Preuss [1869-1938]. Göttingen; Leipzig: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht; J. C. Hinrichs, 1921 1923.
Box Box 25
Vocabulario Huitoto Muinane, compiled by Eugene E. Minor & Dorothy Hendrich de Minor. [Yarinachocha, Peru]: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1971.
Box Box 45
The phonetics and grammar of the Hula language, with vocabulary and translation and notes of other dialects of the Hood Bay District, by Lillian Mary Theakston Short. Adelaide: Libraries Board of South Australia, 1965.
Series:
HUNDE
Scope and Contents: see also KIVU PGYMY
Box Box 74
Vocabulaire Hunde / [Japanese characters: Fundego goisho], by Shigeki Kaji. Tokyo: Institute for the Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa (ILCAA), Tokyo University of Foreign Studies, 1992.
Box Box 17
Le grand voyage du pays des Hurons: situé en l'Amérique vers la Mer douce, ès derniers confins de la Nouvelle France dite Canada avec un dictionnaire de la langue huronne par F. Gabriel Sagard Theodat... Nouv. ed.(two vols), published by Emile Chevalier. Paris: Librarie Tross, 1865. [Volume I]
Box Box 49
Le grand voyage du pays des Hurons: situé en l'Amérique vers la Mer douce, ès derniers confins de la Nouvelle France dite Canada avec un dictionnaire de la langue huronne par F. Gabriel Sagard Theodat... Nouv. ed.(two vols), published by Emile Chevalier. Paris: Librarie Tross, 1865. [Volume II]
Box Box 62
Dictionnaire Iaai-Français (Ouvéa, Nouvelle-Calédonie), suivi du'n lexique français-iaai, by Françoise Ozanne-Rivierre. Paris: Société d'Études Linguistiques et Anthropologiques de France (SELAF), 1984.
Series:
IBAN
Scope and Contents: see also under DAYAK, LAND
Box Box 56
A Dictionary of Sea Dayak, by N.C. Scott. London: School of Oriental and African Languages, University of London, 1956.
Box Box 77
Ibani bibi dawo diri. Studies in the Ibani Dialect of Ijo, by Adadonye Fombo. [Port Harcourt, Nigeria; Rivers State, Nigeria: University of Port Harcourt, Rivers Readers Project; Rivers State Council for Arts and Culture], 1975.
Box Box 77
Series:
IBO
Scope and Contents: see IGBO
Box Box 15
The Idoma language, Idoma wordlists, Idoma chrestomathy, Idoma proverbs, by R[oy] C[live] Abraham. Nigeria: Published by the author on behalf of the Idoma Native Administration, Government of Nigeria, 1951.
Box Box 61
"Two Dialects of Igala, and Yoruba: Some Comparisons," by E. M. Fresco, in: Research Notes from the Department of Linguistics and Nigerian Languages, University of Ibadan, pp. 32-46, June, 1968.
Box Box 57
English, Ibo and French Dictionary, by The Fathers of the Holy Ghost. Roman Catholic Mission, Onitsha, Southern-Nigeria. Salzburg: Missionary printing-office. of the Sodality of St. Peter Claver, 1904.
Box Box 5
Dictionary of Ibo Language: English-Ibo, [by Thomas John Dennis]. Lagos: Church Missionary Society Bookshop, 1923.
Box Box 21
Igbo Language Course(3 vols). Rev. G. E. Igwe & M. M. Green. Ibadan: Oxford University Press, 1967.
Box Box 38
Igbo: A Learner's Dictionary, by Beatrice F. Welmers & William E. Welmers. Los Angeles: [African Studies Center, University of California], 1968.
Box Box 21
Igbo-English Dictionary: A Comprehensive Dictionary of the Igbo Language, with an English-Igbo Index, by Michael J. C. Echeruo. New Haven and London: Yale University Press, 1998.
Box Box 38
A Vocabulary of the Sagada Igorot Dialect, by William Henry Scott. [Chicago]: Philippine Studies Program, Department of Anthropology, University of Chicago, [1957].
Box Box 14
A Nembe-English dictionary, 2 vols., by M. H. I. Kaliai. [Ibadan]: Institute of African Studies, University of Ibadan, 1964, 1966.
Box Box 65
Nembe Language Made Easy. Mie Lokomote Nembebibi, by L. Awotua Efebo. Ibadan: University of Ibadan, 1967.
Box Box 64
A Handbook of the Ila Language (commonly called the Seshukulumbwe) spoken in North-western Rhodesia South-Central Africa comprising grammar, exercises, specimens of Ila tales, and vocabularies, by Edwin W. Smith. London, New York and Toronto: Henry Frowde, Oxford University Press, 1907.
Box Box 22
Ilocano. Ilocano-English / English/ Ilocano Dictionary and Phrasebook, by Carl. R. Galvez Rubino. New York: Hippocrene Books, 1998.
Box Box 22
Series:
ILOKO
Scope and Contents: see ILOCANO
Series:
INDIA, LANGUAGES OF: POLYGLOT
Box Boxes 44-45
Linguistic Survey of India, 11 volumes in 19, ed. by Sir G[eorge] A[braham] Grierson [1851-1941]. Calcutta: Office of the Superintendent of Government Printing, India, 1903-1927.
Box Box 44
Volume I, Part I: Linguistic Survey of India. Vol. I. Part I. Introductory, by Sir George Abraham Grierson [1851-1941]. Calcutta: Government of India Central Publication Branch, 1927.
Box Box 44
Volume I, Supplement II: (issued separately): Linguistic Survey of India. Volume I. Supplement II. Addenda et Corrigenda Minora. Calcutta: Government of India Central Publication Branch, 1927.
Box Box 44
Volume I, Part II: Linguistic Survey of India. Vol. I. Part II. Comparative Vocabulary, by Sir George Abraham Grierson [1851-1941]. Calcutta: Government of India Central Publication Branch, 1928.
Box Box 44
Volume II: Linguistic Survey of India. Vol. II. MÇn-Khm'r and Siamese-Chinese Families (including Khassi and Tai), ed. by Sir G[eorge] A[braham] Grierson [1851-1941]. Calcutta: Office of the Superintendent of Government Printing, India, 1904.
Box Box 44
Volume III, Part II: Linguistic Survey of India. Vol. III. Tibeto-Burman Family. Part II. Specimens of the Bodo, Naga, and Kachin Groups, ed. by Sir G[eorge] A[braham] Grierson [1851-1941]. Calcutta: Office of the Superintendent, Government Printing, India, 1903.
Box Box 44
Volume IV: Linguistic Survey of India. Vol. IV. Munda and Dravidian Languages, ed. by Sir G[eorge] A[braham] Grierson [1851-1941], this volume prepared by Sten Konow. Calcutta: Office of the Superintendent of Government Printing, 1906.
Box Box 44
Volume V, Part I: Linguistic Survey of India. Vol. V. Indo-Aryan Family. Part I. Specimens of the Bangali and Assamese Languages, ed. by Sir G[eorge] A[brahma] Grierson [1851-1941]. Calcutta: Office of the Superintendent, Government Printing, India, 1903.
Box Box 44
Volume VI: Linguistic Survey of India. Vol. VI. Indo-Aryan Family. Mediate Group. Specimens of the Eastern Hindi Language, ed. by Sir G[eorge] A[braham] Grierson [1851-1941]. Calcutta: Office of the Superintendent of Government Printing, India, 1904.
Box Box 45
Volume VII: Linguistic Survey of India. Vol. VII. Indo-Aryan Family. Southern Group. Specimens of the Mar∼th§ Language, ed. by Sir G[eorge] A[braham] Grierson [1851-1941]. Calcutta: Office of the Superintendent of Government Printing, India, 1905.
Box Box 45
Volume IX, Part I: Linguistic Survey of India. Vol. IX. Indo-Ayran Family. Central Group. Part 1. Western Hindi and Panjabi, by Sir G[eorge] A[brahma] Grierson [1851-1941]. Calcutta: Superintendent Government Printing, 1916.
Box Box 45
Volume IX, Part II: Linguistic Survey of India. Vol. IX. Indo-Aryan Family. Central Group. Part II. Specimens of the Rajast∼n§ and Gujar∼t§, ed. by Sir G[eorge] A[braham] Grierson [1851-1941]. Calcutta: Superintendent Government Printing, India, 1908.
Box Box 45
Volume IX, Part III: Linguistic Survey of India. Vol. IX. Indo-Aryan Family. Central Group. Part III. The Bh§l Languages, including Kh∼nd's§, Banj∼r§ or Labh∼n§, Bahrãpi∼, &c., ed. by Sir G[eorge] A[braham] Grierson [1851-1941]. Calcutta: Office of the Superintendent of Government Printing, India, 1907.
Box Box 45
Volume XI: Linguistic Survey of India. Vol. XI. Gipsy Languages, ed. by Sir G[eorge] A[brahma] Grierson [1851-1941]. Calcutta: Superintendent Government Printing, India, 1922.
Series:
INDO-AYRAN LANGUAGES
Box Box 43
A comparative dictionary of the Indo-Aryan languages, by R. Lister Turner. London: Oxford University Press, 1962-1969.
Box Box 29
Avahattha and comparative vocabulary of new Indo-Aryan languages, Tsuyoshi Nara. Tokyo: Institute for the Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa, 1979.
Series:
INDO-IRANIAN FRONTIER LANGUAGES
Box Box 54
Ishkashmi, Zebaki, and Yazghulami: an Account of Three Eranian Dialects, by George A. Grierson. London: Royal Asiatic Society, 1920.
Box Box 46
Indo-Iranian Frontier Languages. Vol. II Iranian-Pamir Languages (Yidgha-Munji, Sanglechi-Ishkashmi, and Wakhi), by George Morgenstierne. Oslo: H. Aschehoug & Co. (W. Nygaard), 1938.
Box Box 56
Ishkashimskii Jazyk, by T.N. Paxalina. Moscow: Akadmii Nauk, 1959.
Box Box 1
Woordenboek bahasa Indonesia-Nederlands, by H. D. van Pernis. Groningen; Jakarta: J.B. Wolters, 1950.
Box Box 1
Indonesisch-Nederlands woordenboek, by W. J. B. Poerwadarminta & A. Teeus. Groningen; Jakarta: J.B. Wolters, 1950.
Box Box 57
Van Goor's Pandu Bahasa. Indonesia-Inggeris dan Inggeris-Indonesia, compiled by Ach. Sulaiman. 's-Gravenhage: G.B. Van Goor Zonen, 1951.
Box Box 64
Van Goor's Concise Indonesian Dictionary. English-Indonesian. Indonesian-English = Van Goor's Kamus Inggeris Ketjil, by A.L.N. Kramer. The Hague / Jakarta: G.B. Van Goor Zonen, n.d. [1952].
Box Box 67
Kamus Bahasa Indonesia-Inggeris dan Inggeris-Indonesia, by A[bdul] K[arim] Lathief. Cover Title: The New Method Dictionary. Indonesian-English and English-Indonesian. [Takamatsu, Japan]: Merapi Trading Company, 1953.
Box Box 67
Kamus Inggeris. Part I: English-Indonesian. Bagian I: Inggeris-Indonesia. Part II. Indonesian-English. Bagian II: Indonesia-Inggeris, 2 vols., by E. Pino & T. Wittermans. Jakarta / Gronigen: J. B. Wolters, 1955. Second edition.
Box Box 17
Moderne indonesische Ausdrücke. Nachtrag zum malaischen Wörterbuch, by Gerhard Kahlo [1893- ]. Berlin: Akademie-Verlag, 1956. 10/5/99. $25.00. Hackenberg Bookselles.
Box Box 22
An Indonesian-English Dictionary, by John M. Echols & Hassan Shadily. Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press, 1961.
Box Box 21
An English-Indonesian Dictionary, by John M. Echols & Hassan Shadily. Ithaca and London: Cornell University Press, [1975].
Box Box 3
Contemporary Indonesian-English Dictionary: a Supplement to the Standard Indonesian Dictionaries with Particular Concentration on New words, Expressions, and Meanings, by A. Ed. Schmidgall-Tellings & Alan M. Stevens. Athens, Ohio: Ohio University Press, 1981.
Box Box 3
Series:
INGALIK
Scope and Contents: see DEGEXITAN
Box Box 78
Russko-ingushskii slovar: 40000 slov, by I.. A. Ozdoev. Moscow: Russkii iazyk 1980.
Box Box 3
Interlingua-English: a dictionary of the international language, prepared by the research staff of the International Auxiliary Language Association under the direction of Alexander Gode. New York: Storm Publishers, 1951.
Box Box 14
Vocabularie Mathematic in Interlingue con traduction in angles (English_, frances (français) e german (Deutsch), by C. E. Sjöstedt. Uppsala: Interlingue-Fundation, 1970.
Box Box 22
Demographic Dictionary in Interlingua, English and French, ed. by Hannes Hyrenius, translations to Interlingua by John Nordin. Gothenburg: Demographic Institute, University of Gothenburg, Sweden, 1971.
Series:
INUKTITUT, GREENLANDIC
Box Box 72
Den grønlandske ordbog, by Otto Fabricius [1744-1822]. Copenhagen: Carl Frid. Schubart, 1804. 10/8/98. DM900 (=$532) Theodor Ackerman, Munich.
Box Box 29
The Eskimo tribes. Their distribution and characteristics, especially as regards language. With a comparative vocabulary, and a map, by H[inrich] Rink [1819-1893]. London; Copenhagen: Williams and Norgate; C.A. Reitzel, 1887. 12/14/99.
Box Box 30
Dictionary of the West Greenland Eskimo Language, by [Christian Wilhelm] Schultz-Lorentzen [1873- ]. Copenhagen: C. A. Reitzel, 1927.
Box Box 35
Five Hundred Eskimo Words. A Comparative Vocabulary from Greenland and Central Eskimo Dialects, by Kaj Birket-Smith. Copenhagen: Gyldendalske Boghandel, Nordisk Forlag, 1928.
Series:
INUKTITUT, WESTERN CANADIAN
Box Box 29
Across the sub-Arctics of Canada, a journey of 3,200 miles by canoe and snow-shoe through the barren lands. Including a list of plants collected on the expedition, a vocabulary of Eskimo words, a route map and full classified index. With illustrations from photographs taken on the journey, and from drawings by Arthur Heming, by J[ames] W[illiams] Tyrrell. Toronto: Williams Briggs, 1897.
Box Box 27
American issue, 1898: Across the sub-Arctics of Canada, a journey of 3,200 miles by canoe and snow-shoe through the barren lands. Including a list of plants collected on the expedition, a vocabulary of Eskimo words, a route map and full classified index. With illustrations from photographs taken on the journey, and from drawings by Arthur Heming, by J[ames] W[illiams] Tyrrell. New York: Dodd, Mead and Co., 1898.
Box Box 10
Report of the Canadian Arctic Expedition 1913-18. Volume XV: Eskimo Language and Technology. Part A: Comparative Vocabulary of the Western Eskimo Dialects. Southern Party- 1913-16, by D[iamond] Jenness. Ottawa: F. A. Acland, 1928.
Box Box 33
English-Eskimo, Eskimo-English dictionary, by Arthur Thibert. Ottawa: Research Center of Amerindian Anthropology, University of Ottawa, 1954.
Box Box 15
French translation, 1955: Français-Esquimau Dictionnaire Esquimau-Français, by Arthur Thibert. Ottawa: Centre de Recherches d'Anthropologie Amérindienne, Université d'Ottawa, 1955.
Box Box 33
Revised English edition, 1958: English-Eskimo, Eskimo-English dictionary. Revised Edition, by Arthur Thibert. Ottawa: Research Center of Amerindian Anthropology, University of Ottawa, 1958.
Box Box 13
Dictionnaire alphabético-syllabique du langage esquimau de l'Ungava, et contrées limitrophes, by Lucien Schneider. Quebec: Presses de l'Université Laval, 1966.
Box Box 28
Second, augmented edition (1970): Dictionnaire esquimau-français du parler de l'Ungava et contrées limitrophes. Nouvelle édition augmentée, by Lucien Schneider. Quebec: Presses de l'Université Laval, 1970.
Box Box 4
English language edition (1985): Ulirnaisigutiit. An Inuktitut-English Dictionary of Northern Quebec, Labrador and Eastern Arctic Dialects (with an English-Inuktitut Index), by Lucien Schneider, trans. from the French and transliterated by Dermot Ronan F. Collis. Quebec: Les Presses de l'Université Laval, 1985.
Box Box 13
Dictionnaire français-esquimau du parler de l'Ungava et contrées limitrophes, by Lucien Schneider. Quebec: Presses de l'Université Laval, 1970.
Box Box 36
Kangiryuarmiut uqauhingita numiktittitdjutingit. Basic Kangiryuarmiut Eskimo dictionary, by Roanld Lowe. Inuvik, Northwest Territories: Committee for Original Peoples Entitlement, 1983.
Series:
INUKTITUT, NORTH ALASKAN
Box Box 11
English-Eskimo and Eskimo-English vocabularies, preceded by Ethnographical Memoranda concerning the Arctic Eskimos in Alaska and Siberia, by Roger Wells & John W. Kelly. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1890.
Box Box 4
Inupiat Eskimo dictionary, by Donald H[umphry] Webster [1930- ] & Wilfried Zibell. Fairbanks, Alaska: Summer Institute of Linguistics, 1970. Also, a second copy.
Box Box 17
Colloquial Arabic of Iraq. Grammar, Exercises and Vocabulary, by Peter Hayes. [Beirut: The Catholic Press], 1956.
Box Box 20
A Dictionary of Iraqi Arabic: Arabic-English, ed. by D. R. Woodhead & Wayne Beene. Washington, D.C.: Georgetown University Press, [1967].
Series:
IROQUOIAN
Scope and Contents: see also DELAWARE; HURON
Box Box 79
Lexique de la langue iroquoise, by J[ean] A[ndré] Cuoq [1821-1898]. Montreal: J. Chapleau & fils, 1882.
Box Box 26
Second edition, 1883: Lexique de la langue iroquoise, avec notes et appendices, by J[ean] A[ndre] Cuoq [1821-1898], Prétre de St.-Suplice. Montreal: J. Chapleau & fils, [1883].
Box Box 33
Phonology of Irula with vocabulary, R. Perialwar. Annamalainagar: Annamalai University, 1979.
Box Box 33
Series:
ISHKASHMI
Scope and Contents: see INDO-IRANIAN FRONTIER LANGUAGES
Box Box 20
Isneg-English Vocabulary, by Morice Vanoverbergh. [Honolulu]: University of Hawaii Press, 1972. [BOX 66]. A second copy, signed by the author.
Box Box 77
Itawis-English Wordlist with English-Itawis Finderlist, by James A. Tharp & Mateo C. Natividad. New Haven, Conn. : Human Relations Area Files, 1976.
Box Box 6
Itzaj Maya-Spanish-English Dictionary. Diccionario Maya Itzaj-Español-Ingles, by Charles Andrew Hofling & Félix Fernando Tesucún. Salt Lake City, Utah: The University of Utah Press, 1997.
Box Box 67
Diccionario ixcateco, by Teresa Fernádez de Miranda. Mexico City: Instituto Nacional de Antropologia e Historia, 1961.
Box Box 13
A' u u' uva'a uva' molel ca ink'a kuyolb'al atz tuch' yolb'al castiiya. Diccionario ixil de Chajul-espanol, espanol-ixil de Chajul, by Dwight David Jewett & Marcos Willis. [Guatemala]: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1996.
Box Box 25
Diccionario ixil de San Gaspar Chajul. Ixil-espanol, by Lucas Asicona Ramirez. Guatemala: Proyecto Linguistico Francisco Marroquin, 1998.
Box Box 12
Diccionario del idioma ixil. Ixil Español. [Cover title] Diccionario del idioma ixil de Santa María Nebaj, by Antonio Cedillo Chel & Juan Ramirez. Antigua, Guatemala: Proyecto Linguistico Francisco Marroquin, 1998.
Series:
IXIL, SAN JUAN COTZAL
Box Box 6
Aq'b'al elu'l yol vatzsaj = Diccionario ixil. San Juan Cotzal [Guatemala]: El Programa, 1995.
Box Box 11
Il berbero Nefusi di Fassato: grammatica, testi raccolti dalla viva voce, vocabolarietti. 2. edizione, riveduta e migliorata, by Francsco Beguinot [1979-1953]. Rome: Istituto per l'Oriente, 1942.
Box Box 23
Diccionario del idioma jakalteko, by José Ramírez Pérez, Andrés Montejo, and Baltasar Díaz Hurtado. La Antigua Guatemala: Proyecto Linguistico Francisco Marroquin, 1996.
Box Box 9
Diccionario Hak'xub'al-Kastiya. Español-Jacalteko. Un diccionario de hablantes, by Eleanore frankle Hecht. Mexico City: Potrerillos Editores, 1998.
Box Box 19
Dictionary of Jamaican English, ed. by F.G. Cassidy & R.B. Le Page. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1967.
Box Box 16 and Box 27
Een klein woordenboek der Hollandsche, Engelsche en Javaansche talen: A vocabulary of the Dutch, English and Javanese languages, by G[ottlob] Bruckner. Batavia: Parapattan, 1842.
Box Box 33
Javaansch-Nederduitsch Woordenboek, compiled by J[ohann] F[riedrich] C[arl] Gericke, enlarged and improved by T[aco] Roorda. Amsterdam: Johannes Müller, 1847.
Box Box 19
Javaansch-Nederduitsch Handwoordenboek, by J[ohann] F[riedrich] C[arl] Gericke, continued by T[aco] Roorda and A[lbert] C[ornelius] Vreede. Amsterdam: Johannes Müller, 1875.
Box Box 66
Javaansch-Nederduitsch Handwoordenboek, by J[ohann] F[riedrich] C[arl] Gericke, continued by T[aco] Roorda and A[lbert] C[ornelius] Vreede. Amsterdam: Johannes Müller, 1875. A second copy, binding variant.
Box Box 33
Supplement op het Javaansch-Nederduitsch handwoordenboek van Gericke-Roorda, by P[ieter] Jansz (1820-1904). Samarang; Amsterdam: G.C.T. van Dorp; Scheltema & Holkema's Boekhandel, 1883.
Box Box 57
Praktische Grammatik der Javanischen Sprache mit Lesestücken, einem javanisch-deutschen und deutsch-javanischen Wörterbuch, by H[anns] Bohatta. Vienna; Pest; Leipzig: A. Hartleben's Verlag, [1892].
Box Box 36
Javaansche woordenlijst bevattende woorden in Midden-Java in gebruik vergeleken met het Javaansch in de residentie Soerakarta, by H. A. de Nooy with the assistance of Mas Padmasoesastra. 's Gravenhage: Nijhoff, 1893.
Box Box 9
Nederlandsch-javaansch woordenboek. Vijfde weder vermeerderde druk, by P[ieter] Jansz (1820-1904). Semarang: G. C. T. van Dorp & Co., [1899].
Box Box 1
Javaans-nederlands handwoordenboek, compiled by Th[eodore] [Gauthier] Pigeaud.[1899- ].Groningen; Batavia: Bij J. B. Wolters uitgevers-maatschappij n. v.,: 1938.
Box Box 17
Nederlands-Javaans en Javaans-Nederlands Zakwoordenboekje, voorafgegaan door een kort begrip van de Javaanse spraakkunst, compiled by Th[eodore] [Gauthier] Pigeaud. Groningen: J.B. Wolters, 1948.
Box Box 17
Series:
JAWSHAQAN
Scope and Contents: see PERSIAN DIALECTS
Box Box 8
Jibbali Lexicon, by T.M. Johnstone. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1981.
Box Box 13
A dictionary of the Kachin language, by O[la] Hanson [1864-1929]. Rangoon: American Baptist Mission Press, 1906.
Box Box 15
Gramatica teorico-practica y vocabulario de la lengua jibara, by Juan Ghinassi. Quito, Ecuador: Talleres graficos de educacion, 1938.
Box Box 67
Jukun of Wukari and Jukun of Takum, by William E[verett] Welmers. Ibadan: Institut of African Studies, University of Ibadan, 1968.
Box Box 64
Dizionario Giur-Italiano-Inglese, by Gaetano Briani. Verona: Editrice Nigrizia, 1953.
Box Box 48
Kabardinsko-russkii slovar, by B[uba] M[atsikovich] Kardanov. Moscow: Gos idz-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1957.
Box Box 19
Vocabularies of the Four Representative Tribes of South Eastern Queensland [Kabi, Yugumbir, Yugarabul, Wakka] with Grammatical Notes thereof and some Notes on Manners and Customs. Also A List of Aboriginal Place Names and their Derivations, by F. J. Watson. Supplement to Journal of the Royal Geographical Society of Australasia (Queensland), No. 34, Vol. XLVIII, n.d. [1958]. Also a second copy, with some discoloration around the edges of the first few pages.
Box Box 23
Lexique Kabyle-français: glossaire extrait de la deuxième année de langue Kabyle, by A. S. Boulifa. Alger: Adolphe Jourdan, 1913.
Box Box 23
Series:
KACHIN
Scope and Contents: see JINGPHO
Box Box 37
Kadugli Language and Language Usage, by Abdalla Ibrahim Abdalla. University of Khartoum, 1969.
Box Box 37
Series:
KAFIR
Scope and Contents: see ZULU
Box Box 33
Handleiding voor de eoefening der Ledo-taal inleiding, teksten met vertaling en aanteekeningen en woordenlijst, S[amuel] J[onathan] Esser [1900-1944]. Bandoeng: A.C. Nix & Co., 1934. 1/25/99. Fl65 (=$33). Gert Jan Bestebreurtje.
Box Box 23
Kalenjin-English Dictionary, by C[harles] C. Ng'elechei. Nairobi: Thomson Press, [1972].
Box Box 3
Dictionnaire galibi. Dictionarium gallice, latine et galibi. Digestum e libro: Dictionnaire galibi, presente sous deux formes, 1 commencant par le mot françois, 2 par le mot galibi, precédé d'un essai de grammaire, [by M. de (Simon Philibert) La Salle de l'Etang [ca. 1700-1765]], ed. by Fr. Ph. de Martius [Karl Friedrich Philipp von Martius, 1794-1868]. n.p., n.d. [ca. 1860].
Box Box 49
Bosavi-English-Tok Pisin dictionary (Papua New Guinea). Bosabi towo:liya: Ingilis towo:liya: Pisin towo:liya: bugo: Tok ples Bosavi, Tok Inglis, na Tok Pisin diksineli, by Bambi B. Schieffeln & Steven Feld.. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics, 1998.
Box Box 3
Kai Donners Kamassisches Wörterbuch, nebst Sprachproben und Hauptzügen der Grammatik, edited by A[ulis] J[ohannes] Joki. Helsinki: Suomalais-Ugrilainen Seura, 1944.
Series:
KAMBA
Scope and Contents: see also BANTU LANGUAGES
Box Box 7
Vocabularies of the Kamba and Kikuyu languages of East Africa, by Hildegarde [Beatrice Ginsburg] Hinde (Mrs. Sidney L. Hinde). Cambridge [Eng.]: University Press, 1904. 8/14/2000. $130. Harvest Book Company.
Box Box 61
English-Kamba Vocabulary, compiled by John S. Mbiti. Nairobi: Eagle Press, 1959.
Box Box 61
Series:
KAMBERA (EAST SUMBA)
Scope and Contents: see SUMBA
Box Box 31
Kámilarói, and other Australian languages. Second edition, revised and enlarged by the author; with comparative tables of words from twenty Australian languages, and songs, traditions, laws and customs of the Australian race, by William Ridley. Sydney: T. Richards, government printer, 1875.
Box Box 37
A Reference Dictionary of Gamilaraay, Northern New South Wales, by Peter Austin. Bundoora, Australia: La Trobe University, Department of Linguistics, 1993.
Box Box 39
Yuwaalaraay / Gamilaraay Wordlist, ed. by John Giacon. Walgett, N.S.W., Australia: Walgett High School, Yuwaalaraay-Gamilaraay Language Program, 1999.
Box Box 39
Series:
KANARESE
Scope and Contents: see KANNADA
Series:
KANJOBAL, EASTERN
Box Box 23
Diccionario del idioma q'anjob'al, by Diego de Diego Antonio, et al. La Antigua Guatemala: Proyecto Linguistico Francisco Marroquin, 1996.
Series:
KANJOBAL, WESTERN
Box Box 23
Diccionario akateko-espanol, by Domingo Andrés, Karen Dakin, José Juan, Leandro López, & Fernando Peñalosa. Rancho Palos Verdes, Calif. : Ediciones Yax Te, 1996. 4/15/99. $20.00. Libros Latinos.
Box Box 59
A Dictionary, Canarese and English, by W[illiam] Reeve, revised, corrected and enlargedby Daniel Sanderson. Bangalore: Printed at the Weselyn Mission Press, 1858.
Box Box 69
A Kannada-English Dictionary, by F[erdinand] Kittel. Mangalore: Basel Mission book and tract depository, 1894.
Box Box 21
Halakki Kannada, by A. S. Acharya. Poona: Deccan College, 1967.
Box Box 29
African native literature, or Proverbs, tales, fables, & historical fragments in the Kanuri or Bornu language. To which are added a translation of the above and a Kanuri-English vocabulary, by S[igismund] W[ilhelm] Koelle. London: Church Missionary House, 1854.
Box Box 64
A Study of the Kanuri Language: Grammar and Vocabulary, by Johannes Lukas. London, New York, Tornoto: Published for the International Institute of African Languages & Cultures by Oxford University Press, 1937.
Box Box 20
Dictionary of the Kanuri Language, ed. by Norbert Cyffer & John Hutchison. Dordrecht, Holland ; Providence, RI, U.S.A : Nigeria : Foris Publications ; University of Maiduguri, 1990.
Box Box 27
Kapampangan Dictionary, by Michael L. Forman. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press, 1971.
Box Box 27
Series:
KAPAUKU
Scope and Contents: see EKARI
Box Box 20
Kapingamarangi Lexicon, by Michael D. Lieber & Kalio H. Dikepa. Honolulu: University Press of Hawaii, 1974.
Box Box 20
Series:
KARA
Scope and Contents: see YULU
Box Box 49
Russko-Karachaevo-balkarskii slovar: okolo 35 000 slov, by I[bragim] K[hadzhi-Muratovich] Suiunchev & Kh. O. Urusbiev. Moscow: Izdatelstvo Sovetskaia Entsiklopediia, 1965.
Box Box 5
Karakalpaksko-russkii slovar: olkolo 30000 slovar, by N[ikolai] A[leksandrovich] Baskakov. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1958.
Box Box 5
Series:
KARANG
Scope and Contents: see MALIMBA
Series:
KARANKAWA
Scope and Contents: see also COAHUILTECO
Box Box 36
The Karankawa Indians, the coast people of Texas, by Albert S[amuel] Gatschet (1832-1907]. Cambridge, Mass.: Peabody Museum of American Archæology and Ethnology, 1891.
Box Box 37
Matériaux pour servir a l'établissement d'une grammaire comparée des dialectes de la famille Kariri, by Lucien Adam. Paris: J. Maisonneuve, 1897.
Box Box 55
English-Kashmiri. A Vocabulary of the Kashmiri Language, by Ernest F[rederic] Neve. Mysore City: The Wesley Press and Publishing House, n.d. [c. 1935].
Box Box 63
Wörterbuch der Kâte-Sprache gesprochen in Neuguinea. Dictionary of the Kâte-Language as spoken by New-Guinea, Christian Keysser. Berlin; Hamburg: Verlag von Dietrich Reimer (Ernst Vohsen); C. Boysen, 1925.
Box Box 63
Series:
KATEMBRI
Scope and Contents: see CHICHIMECA PAME, NORTHERN
Box Box 63
Series:
KATTANG
Scope and Contents: see WORIMI
Box Box 63
Series:
KATU
Scope and Contents: see KATUIC
Series:
KATUIC-BRU, KUI, PAKOH, KATU
Box Box 62
Katuic Comparative Dictionary, by Ilia Peiros. Canberra: The Australian National University, 1996.
Box Box 65
Outlines of a Grammar, Vocabulary, and Phraseology of the Aboriginal Language of South Australia spoken by the Natives in and for Some Distance around Adelaide, by Christian Gottlieb Teichelmann & Clamor Wilhelm Schürmann. Adelaide: Published by the authors at the Native Location, 1840.
Box Box 22
"Expeditie naar het Nassau-Gebergte in Centraal Noord Nieuw Guinee," by Ch. Le Roux. 1926.
Box Box 22
Series:
KAW
Scope and Contents: see AKHA
Box Box 36
Kawaiisu: A Grammar and Dictionary with Texts, by Maurice L. Zigmond, Curtis G. Booth, & Pamela Munro. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1991.
Box Box 26
Analytical and Critical Bibliography of the Tribes of Tierra del Fuego and adjacent Territory, by John M[ontgomery] Cooper. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1917.
Box Box 51
Oudjavaansch-Nederlandsche Wordenlijst, by H[endrik] H[erman] Juynboll. Leiden: E. J. Brill, 1923.
Box Box 31
Russko-kazakhskii slovar. 50000 slov, by N. T. Sauranbaev. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1954.
Box Box 49
Oryssha-qazaqsha sozdik: 65.000 soz. I Tom (A-O). II Tom (O-a), by G[ainetdin] G[alievich] Musabaev. Two. vols. Additional title page: Russko-kazakhskii slovar. Almaty: Qazaq Sovet Entsiklopediiasynyng bas redaktsiiasy, 1978 1981.
Box Box 7
A Fragment of an Early K'ekchi' Vocabulary with Comments on the Cultural Content, ed. By Ray A. Freeze. Columbia, Missouri: University of Missouri-Columbia, 1975.
Box Box 23
Diccionario q'eqchi', by Miguel Sam Juarez, Ernesto Chen Cao, Crisanto Xal Tec, Domingo Cuc Chen, & Pedro Tiul Pop. La Antigua Guatemala: Proyecto Linguistico Francisco Marroquin : K'ulb'il Yol Twitz Paxil, 1997.
Box Box 23
Series:
KEREWO
Scope and Contents: see PAPUA NEW GUINEA LANGUAGES
Box Box 10
M. Alexander Castrén's Versuch einer Jenissei-ostjakischen und kottischen Sprachlehre nebst Wörterverzeichnissen aus den genannten Sprachen, edited by Anton Schiefner. St. Petersburg: Buchdruckerei der Kaiserlichen Akademie der Wissenschaften,1858.
Box Box 10
Series:
KHALKHA
Scope and Contents: see MONGOLIAN
Box Box 10
Über die Sprache, Nord-Ostjaken: Sprachtexte, Wörtersammlung und Grammatik, by August [Engelbrekt] Ahlqvist. Helsingfors: G.W. Edlund, 1880.
Box Box 48
Ocherki dialektov khantyiskogo iazyka. [Description of the Dialects of the Language Khanty], by N[ikolai] I[vanovich]Tereshkin. Leningrad: Izd-vo Akademii nauk SSSR, 1961.
Box Box 63
Introduction to the Kharia Language, by Gagan Chandra Banerjee. Calcutta: Printed at the Bengal Secretariat Press, 1894.
Box Box 56
Kharia. Phonology, Grammar and Vocabulary, by Hemmige Shriniwasarangachar Biligiri. Poona: [Deccan College Postgraduate and Research Institute], 1965.
Box Box 45
Dictionnaire khmer-français, E[tienne François] Aymonier [1844- ]. Saigon: 1878.
Box Box 5
Contemporary Cambodian Glossary, by Kem Soss, Lim Hak Kheang & Madeline E. Ehrman. Washington, D.C.:Foreign Service Institute, US Department of State, 1975.
Box Box 48
Kratkii Russko-Kkhmerskii slovar. 2 700 slov, by Long Seam & R.S. Plam. Moscow: "Russkii iazyk", 1987.
Box Box 63
Cambodian-English English-Cambodian Dictionary, [by Kim Sos, Lim Hak Kheang, & Madeline E. Ehram]. New York: Hippocrene Books, [1990].
Box Box 5
Tuttle Practical Cambodian Dictionary. English-Cambodian. Cambodian-English, by David Smyth & Tran Kien. Rutland, Vermont: Charles E. Tuttle, 1995.
Box Box 3
An English-Spoken Khmer Dictionary with Romanized Writing System, Usage and Idioms, and Notes on Khmer Grammar and Speech, by Allen P.K. Keesee. London and New York: Kegan Paul International, 1996.
Box Box 3
Grammar and Vocabulary of the Khowar Dialect (Chitrali). Third edition, by D[onatus] J[ames] T[homond] O'Brien. Delhi: Manager of Publications, 1937. Third edition.
Box Box 3
Series:
KHUF
Scope and Contents: see SHUGHNI
Box Box 23
a Fragment of a Khwarezmian Dictionary, by the late W[alter] B[runo] Henning, edited by D. N. MacKenzie. London: Lund Humphries, 1971. 9/14/98. $33.00. G. J. Askins.
Box Box 67
Les Khyang des collines de Chittagong (Pakistan oriental), Matériaux pour l'étude linguistique des Chin, by Densie and Lucien Bernot. Paris: Plon, 1958.
Box Box 14
Kickapoo vocabulary, by Paul H. Voorhis. Winnipeg: Algonquian and Iroquoian Linguistics, 1988.
Box Box 14
Series:
KIKUYU
Scope and Contents: see GIKUYU
Box Box 70
Kilivila: The Language of the Trobriand Islanders, Gunter Senft. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter, 1986.
Box Box 69
Kiliwa Dictionary, By Mauricio J. Mixco. Salt Lake City: University of Utah Press, 1985.
Box Box 69
Series:
KILOLO
Scope and Contents: see MONGO
Box Box 69
Series:
KIMBUNDU
Scope and Contents: see MBUNDU
Box Box 31
The Mun language of Hainan Island: its classified lexicon = Hai-nan tao Men yu fen lei tzu hui chi, Tadahiko Shintani [1946- ] & Shao Yang. Tokyo: Institute for the Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa (ILCAA), 1990. 10/15/98. $38.00. Elm City Books.
Box Box 3
Leopold Radloff's Wörterbuch der Kinai-Sprache, ed. by A[nton] Schiefner [1817-1879]. St. Petersburg: Académie Impériale des Sciences, 1874.
Box Box 3
Series:
KINIASSA
Scope and Contents: see MAMBA
Box Box 73
Vocabulary of the Kiowa Language, by John P. Harrington. Washington, DC: Government Printing Office, 1928.
Box Box 11
A Gilbertese-English dictionary, by Hiram Bingham [1831-1908]. Boston: American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions, 1908.
Box Box 55
A Gilbertese Grammar and Vocabulary, edited by a member of The Sacred-Heart-Mission. [printed in Tilburg, Holland]: Catholic-Mission Gilbert Islands (Central Pacific), n.d. [c. 1927].
Box Box 18
The Structure of Gilbertese, by Reid Cowell. Beru, Gilbert Islands: Rongorongo Press, 1951.
Box Box 18
Gilbertese-English Dictionary, originally compiled in French by E. Sabatier, and translated [into English] by Sister Oliva. Tarawa: Sacred Heart Mission, 1971.
Box Box 18
Series:
KIRMANJKI
Scope and Contents: see POLYGLOT: WORLD LANGUAGES
Box Box 18
Series:
KISWAHILI
Scope and Contents: see SWAHILI
Box Box 18
Series:
KITUBA
Scope and Contents: see CONGO LANGUAGES, POLYGLOT
Box Box 38
I. Expedition zu den Zentralafrikanischen Kivu-Pygm¨a;en. I. Die physische und soziale Umwelt der Kivu-Pygm¨a;men (Twiden), by Peter Schumacher. Brussels: Librarie Falk, succ. Georges van Campenhout, 1949.
Box Box 38
Series:
KLAMA
Scope and Contents: see DANGME
Box Box 79
The Klamath Indians of Southwestern Oregon, by Albert Samuel Gatschet. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1890.
Box Box 18
Klamath Dictionary, by M[uhammad] A[bd-al-]R[ahman] Barker. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1963.
Box Box 70
Koasati Dictionary, by Geoffrey D. Kimball. Lincoln: The University of Nebraska Press, 1994.
Box Box 27
Phonology of Kodagu with vocabulary, by Ramaswami Balakrishnan [1943- ]. Annamalainagar: Annamalai University, 1976.
Box Box 10
Vocabularies and Specimens of some S.E. Dardic Dialects, by F. Barth and G[eorge] Morgenstierne. Offprint from Norsk Tidsskrift for Sprogenvidenskap, Olso, Vol. 18 (1958), pp. [118]-136.
Box Box 2
Kanyawali: Proben eines Maiya-Dialektes aus Tangir (Hindukusch), by Georg Buddruss. Munich: In Kommission bei J. Kitzinger, 1959.].
Box Box 2
Series:
KOHISTANI, SHINA
Scope and Contents: see SHINA
Box Box 62
A First Dictionary of Koiari, by Tom Dutton. Canberra: The Australian National University, 1991.
Box Box 24
Grammar of the Kol Language, by A[lfred] Nottrott [1837-1924], trans. by Paul Wagner, with an appendix of phrases by A. G. F. Fitzgerald. Ranchi: G. E. L. Mission Press, 1905.
Box Box 29
Koelawische taalstuden. Deel 1. Overzicht der spraakkunst, gesprekken en verhalen met verhalen met vertaling.- deel 2. Aanteekeningen bij de teksten in deel l met etymologisch aanhangsel.- deel 3. Nederlandsch-koelawisch-lindoesche woordenlijst. 3 vols., by N[icholaus] Adriani [1865-1926]& S[amuel] J[onathan] Esser [1900- ]. Bandoeng: Nix, 1939.
Box Box 20
Diccionario Español-Kômbè, by L[eoncio] Fernádez. Madrid: Instituto de Estudios Africanos, 1951.
Box Box 20
Series:
KOMI-PERMYAK
Scope and Contents: see KOMI-ZYRIAN
Box Box 28
Syrj¨a;nisch-deutsches Wörterbuch nebst einem wotjakishch-deutschen im Anhange und einem deutschen Register, by F[erdiand J[ohann] Wiedemann [1805-1887]. St. Petersbur: Commissionare der Kaiserlichen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 1880.
Box Box 18
Collecção de observações grammaticaes sobre a lingua bunda, ou angolense, by Bernardo Maria de Cannecattim. Lisbon: na Impressào Regia, 1859: Collecção de observações grammaticaes sobre a lingua bunda, ou angolense e Diccionario abreviado da lingua congueza. Segunda edição, by Bernardo Maria de Cannecattim. Lisbon: Imprensa Nacional, 1859.
Box Box 72
Dictionary and grammar of the Kongo language, as spoken at San Salvador, the ancient capital of the old Kongo empire, West Afrika [and Appendix] Compiled and prepared for the Baptist mission on the Kongo River, West Africa, 2 vols., by W. Holman Bentley. London: The Baptist Missionary Society and Trübner & Co., 1887, 1895.
Box Box 65
Petit Vocabulaire Français-Congolais Congolais-Français. Extrait d'une grammaire Française en congolais, by Madame Bentley. Wathen, Lutete: Baptist Missionary Society, 1904.
Box Box 29
La langue congolaise: grammaire, vocabulaire systematique, phrases graduees et lectures, by A[ugust] Seidel [1863-1916] & I[von] Struyf. Paris: Jules Groos, 1910.
Box Box 57
A Dictionary of Concanim into English, by Aeixo Caetano Jose Francisco. Bombay: R. Anthony Lobo, [1916]. Lacking last four pages.
Box Box 57
Konknni-Inglish Shabd-Sangraha (Konkani-English Vocabulary), by Sylvester Menezes. Manglaore: [Printed by the Codiyalbail Press, Manglore, and Published by Rev. C. C. A. Pai, S. J.], 1967.
Box Box 6
Vocabulario de lingoa Canarina com versam portugueza. Lisbon: Junta de Invertigações do Ultramar, 1973.
Box Box 78
I. - R. P. J. Casthelain. La Langue Guerzé. Grammaire (p. 7) - Dictionnaire (p. 105). II. - R. P. P. Lassort. Grammaire Guerzé (p. 303). Dakar: IFAN, 1952.
Box Box 61
The Kpelle Language in Liberia. Grammatical Outline. Colloquial Sentences and Vocabulary, by D[iedrich] Westermann & H[ans] J[oachim] Melzian. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer / Ernst Vohsen, 1930.
Box Box 61
Series:
KRACHI
Scope and Contents: see AWUTU
Box Box 77
A Krio-English Dictionary, compiled by Clifford N. Fyle & Eldred D. Jones. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1980.
Box Box 26
["'Le Langaige de Guynee': A Sixteenth Century Vocabulary from the Pepper Coast," by David Dalby and P.E.H. Hair, in: African Language Studies V, Collected Papers in Oriental and African Studies. London: School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London, 1964, pp. [115]-191.
Box Box 15
A New Guinea Language Book (Blanche Bay Dialect), compiled by J. H. L[awry] Waterhouse. Sydney: Australian National Research Council / Australasian Medical Publishing Company, 1939.
Box Box 12
A dictionary of the Raluana language (New Britain, S.W. Pacific). Raluana-English, with an Introduction and English-Raluana Index, by Peter A. Lanyon-Orgill. Victoria, B.C.: Published by the author, 1960.
Box Box 12
Series:
KUI (Mon Khmer family)
Scope and Contents: see KATUIC
Series:
KUI (Dravidian family)
Box Box 3
Kuvinga Bassa. The Khond language as spoken by the Parjas (and kindred tribes) of the Madras Presidency, by A. G. Fitzgerald. Calcutta: [Printed and Published for for Proprietor by M. Apel, at The Catholic Orphan Press], 1913.
Box Box 31
La langue des Nenemas et des Nigoumak (Dialectes de Poum et de Koumac, Nouvelle Caledonie), by André-G[eorges] Haudricourt. Auckland: Linguistic Society of New Zealand, 1963.
Box Box 41
Dictionary of Mesa Grande Diegueño. 'Lipay Aa-English / English - 'Lipay Aa, by Ted Couro and Christina Hutcheson, with introduction and notes by Margaret Langdon. Illustration by Leanne Hinton. Morongo Indian Reservation, Banning, California: Malki Museum Press, 1973.
Box Box 11
The Kumzari dialect of the Shihuh tribe, Arabia and a vocabulary, Bertram Thomas [1892- ]. London: The Royal Asiatic society, 1930.
Box Box 34
Ethno-linguistic Cuna dictionary, with indices and references to A critical and comparative Cuna grammar (Etnologiska studier 14) and The grammatical sketch in Cuna chrestomathy (Etnologiska studier 18), by Nils M[agnus] Holmer [1904- ]. Goteborg: Etnografiska Museet, 1952.
Box Box 10
Grammar and Glossary of the Tule Language of Panama, by J. Dyneley Prince. Lancaster, Penn.: The New Era Printing Company, 1913. 1/00. $51 including postage. Argosy Books.
Box Box 1
ALSO: Diccionario de la Lengua Kuna, Jesus Erice. [S.l.: s.n.], Impresora de la Nacion, 1985.
Box Box 14
Kurdish-English dictionary, dialect of Sulaimania, Iraq, by Ernest N[asseph] McCarus [1922- ]. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press, 1967.
Box Box 14
Series:
KURDISH
Scope and Contents: see KURDI; KURMANJI
Box Box 57
Grammatica e Vocabolario della lingua Kurda, compiled by Maurizio Garzoni. Rome: Stamperia della Sacra Congregazione di Propaganda Fide, 1787.
Box Box 56
Kurdische Sammlungen: Erz¨a;hlungen und Lieder im Dialekte des Tur 'Abin, ed. and trans. by Eugen Prym [Heinrich Eugen] & Albert Socin. St. Petersburg: Commissionnaires de l'Akdémie Impériale de sciences, etc., 1887-1890.
Box Box 64
Grammar of the Kurmanji or Kurdish Language, by E[ly] B[anister] Soane. London: Luzac & Co., 1913.
Box Box 55
Kurdsko-russkii slovar: okolo 14000 slov, by Ch[erkes] Kh[udoevich] Badaev. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1957.
Box Box 54
IAzyk azerbaidzhanskikh kurdov, by Ch[herkes] Kh[udoevich Badaev. Moscow: Izd-vo "Nauka," 1965.
Box Box 27
Kurdish-English. English-Kurdish (Kurmancî) Dictionary. Ferhang Kurdî-Îngîlîzî. Îngîlîzî-Kurdî, by Baran Rizgar [M.F. Onen]. London: [published by the author], 1993.
Box Box 11
Alu-Kurumbaru Nayan: die Sprache der Alu-Kurumbas: Grammatik, Texte, Wörterbuch, by Dieter B. Kapp. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz, 1982.
Box Box 24
Kurukh (Or∼t)-English dictionary. Part I., by Ferd[inand] Hahn. Calcutta: Bengal Secretariat Press, 1903.
Box Box 20
An Oraon-English Dictionary in the Roman character with numerous phrases illustrative of sense and idiom and notes on tribal customs, beliefs, etc., by A. Grignard. St. Gabriel-Mödling near Vienna, Austria: Administration of "Anthropos." 1924; For India: Calcutta: sold at the Catholic Orphan Press, 1924.
Box Box 59
An English-Uraon Dictionary, compiled by several missionaries in collaboration, ed. by C. Bleses. Ranchi: Dharmik Sahitya Samiti, 1956.
Box Box 59
Vocabulary of Kuvi-Kond Language with short sentences on general subjects for conversational purposes, by F. V. P. Schulze. Madras: Printed by Graves, Cookson & Co., 1913.
Box Box 43
Ethnology of the Kwakiutl, by Franz Boas, in: Thirty-Fifth Annual Report of the Bureau Of American Ethnology to the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, 1913-1914. Two volumes. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1921.
Box Box 55
Bukenkango. Rukwangali-English English-Rukwangali Dictionary, compiled by J. K. Kloppers, expanded by D. Nakare & L. M. Isala. Windhoek, Namibia: Gamsberg Macmillan, 1994.
Box Box 13
Wörterbuch der Ovambo-Sprache. Osikuanjama-Deutsch, by Hermann Tönjes. Berlin: Georg Reimer, 1910.
Box Box 65
ALSO: English-Kwanyama Dictionary, compiled by G. W. R. Tobias & B. H. C. Turvey. Johannesburg: Witwatersrand University Press, 1965.
Box Box 19
ALSO: Kwanyama-English Dictionary, compiled by B. H. C. Turvey. Johannesburg: Witwatersrand University Press, 1977.
Box Box 49
A dictionary of Kwoma: a Papuan language of north-east New Guinea, by Ross Bowden. Canberra, A.C.T., Australia: Pacific Linguistics, Research School of Pacific and Asian Studies, Australian National University, 1997.
Box Box 49
Series:
LABI
Scope and Contents: see TO
Box Box 74
The Dictionary of Lahu, by James A. Matisoff. Berkeley: Unversity of California Press, 1988.
Box Box 62
Grammar and Dictionary of the Lakher or Mara Language, by Reginald Arthur Lorrain. Gauhati, Assam: Government of Assam, Department of Historical and Antiquarian Studies, 1951.
Box Box 10
A dictionary of the Teton Dakota Sioux language; Lakota-English, English-Lakota, with considerations given to Yankton and Santee. Oie wowapi wan Lakota-Ieska, Ieska-Lakota, by Eugene Buechel, ed. by Paul Manhart. Pine Ridge, S.D.: Red Cloud Indian School, Holy Rosary Mission, 1970.
Box Box 7
Lakota Primer Sioux Indian Translation, by Bonnie C. Manley. Chadron, Nebraska: Dawes Co. Circulating Library, 1971.
Box Box 54
Everyday Lakota. An English-Sioux Dictionary for Beginners, ed. by Joseph S. Karol & Stephen L. Rozman. St. Francis, S.D.: Rosebud Educational Society, 1974.
Box Box 37
Elementary Bilingual Dictionary: English-Lakhóta / Lakhóta-English. Boulder, CO: University of Colorado Lakhóta Project, 1976.
Box Box 39
Dictionary of Modern Lakota (Lakota Eyapi Ognayan Wašicun Wicoiye Kin Yuieskapi), by Edward Starr. Kendall Park, N.J.: Lakota Books, 1994.
Box Box 2
Wisa handbook: a short introduction to the Wisa dialect of North-East Rhodesia, by A[rthur] C[ornwallis] Madad [b. 1846]. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1906.
Box Box 2
Lala-Lamba handbook, a short introduction to the south-western division of the Wisa- Lala dialect of northern Rhodesia, with stories and vocabulary, by A[rthur] C[ornwallis] Madan. Oxford: The Clarendon Press, 1908.
Box Box 61
English-Lamba Vocabulary, compiled by Clement M. Doke. Johannesburg: Witwatersrand University Press, 1933.
Box Box 61
Series:
LAMUT
Scope and Contents: see EVEN
Box Box 71
The Lango. A Nilotic Tribe of Uganda, by J[ack] H[erbert] Driberg. London: T. Fisher Unwin Ltd., 1923.
Box Box 39
Mission Pavie. Exploration de l'Indo-Chine: mémoires et documents…Tome II: Litterature et linguistique. Deuxième fascicule: Dictionnaire laotien, by M. Massie. Paris: Ernest Leroux, 1894.
Box Box 17
Lexique français-laocien, by Marie Joseph Cuaz [1862- ]. Hongkong: Société des mission étrangères, 1904.
Box Box 75
English-Lao: Lao-English Dictionary, by Russell Marcus. Bangkok: Russell Marcus, 1968.
Box Box 57
English-Lao Phrasebook with Useful Wordlist (for Laotians). Arlington, Virginia: Center for Applied Linguistics, [1980].
Box Box 10
"Remarks on the Native Tongues in the Neighborhood of Part Darwin," by T. A. Parkhouse, in: Transactions of the Royal Society of South Australia, Vol. 19, Part 1 (with three plates), (July 1895), pp. [1]-18.
Box Box 10
Series:
LARTE
Scope and Contents: see AWUTU
Box Box 3
Grammar and vocabulary of the Lau language, Solomon Islands, by Walter G[eorge] Ivens [1871- ]. Washington: Carnegie Institution of Washington, 1921.
Box Box 35
Lefana, Akpafu and Avatime with English gloss, by M. E. Kropp. Legon: Institute of African Studies, University of Ghana, 1967.
Box Box 5
Lenakel Dictionary, by John Lynch. Canberra: Australian National University, 1977.
Series:
LESSER ANTILLEAN CREOLE ENGLISH
Box Box 22
Duppies Is: some accounting of the capricious activities of the Cayman Islands' friendly ghosts...and...a dictionary of words and phrases of the Islanders, by Robert S[evier] Fuller. Grand Cayman: Cayman ARTventures, c. 1981. Later edition.
Series:
LESSER ANTILLEAN CREOLE FRENCH
Box Box 59
Le Vocabulaire de parler Créole de la Martinique, by Élodie Jourdain. Paris: C. Klincksieck, 1956.
Box Box 13
ALSO: Creole-English/English-Creole (Caribbean), by Stephanie Ovide. New York: Hippocrene Books, 1996.
Box Box 13
Series:
LEUANGIUA
Scope and Contents: see ONTONG JAVA
Box Box 32
Limba-English Dictionary, by Mary Lane Clarke. Freetown: Government Printer, 1929.
Box Box 32
Series:
LINDU
Scope and Contents: see KOLA
Series:
LINGALA
Scope and Contents: see also BANGALA
Box Box 65
Maloba ma lokóta. Dictionnaire Lingála Lingála-Français Français-Lingála, by René van Everbroeck. Kinshasha, Zaire: Éditions l'Epiphanie, 1985.
Box Box 16
Lingala-English. English-Lingala, by Thomas A. Akowuah. New York: Hippocrene Books, 1996.
Box Box 41
Le vocabulaire Bê de F. M. Savina [1876-1941], ed. by A. G. Haudricourt. Paris: École Française d'Extrême-Orient, 1965.
Box Box 62
A Dictionary of the Northern Dialect of Lisu (China and Southeast Asia), by David Bradley. Canberra: The Australian National University, 1994.
Box Box 57
A Study of the Logbara (Ma'di) Language. Grammar and Vocabulary, by J[oseph] P[asquale] Crazzolara. London, New York, Toronto: Published for the International African Institute by Oxford University Press, 1960.
Box Box 20
Die Logone-Sprache im zentralen Sudan, mit Beitr¨a;gen aus dem Nachlass von Gustav Nachtigal, by Johannes Lukas. Leipzig: Deutsche Morgenlandische Gesellschaft, im Kommission bei F. A. Brockhaus, 1936.
Box Box 20
Series:
LOMONGO
Scope and Contents: see MONGO
Box Box 66
A Vocabulary of Kilolo as spoken in the Bankundum a section of the Balolo tribe, at Ikengo (Equator), Upper Congo, by Jas.[James] B. Eddie. [London]: East London Institute for Home and Foreign Missions, [1887].
Box Box 6
The Londo Word: Its Phonological and Morphological Structure, by Juliana Kuperus. Tervuren, Belgium: Musee Royal, 1985.
Box Box 74
A Grammar and Lexicon of Loniu, Papua New Guinea, by Patricia J. Hamel. Canberra: Australian National University, 1994.
Box Box 74
Series:
LONTOMBA
Scope and Contents: see NTOMBA
Box Box 39
Ambrym (Lonwolwol) Dictionary, by W. F. Paton. Canberra: Department of Linguistics, Research School of Pacific Studies, The Australian National University, 1973.
Box Box 12
"A Lou Vocabulary. With Phonological Notes," by Robert Blust, in Papers in Austronesian LinguisticsNo. 5, (1998), ed. by Darrell Tryon, pp. 35-99.
Series:
LOUISIANA CREOLE FRENCH
Box Box 30
Dictionary of Louisiana Creole, by Albert Valdman, Thomas A. Klinger, Margaret M. Marshall & Kevin J. Rottet. Bloomington, Ind.: Indiana University Press, 1998.
Box Box 30
Series:
LOUISIANA FRENCH
Scope and Contents: see CAJUN
Box Box 17
An English-Lozi vocabulary, by J. P. Burger. Mongu, Barotseland Protectorate: Book Depot of P[aris] M[issionary]S[ociety], Sefula, 1960.
Box Box 55
English-Silozi Dictionary, by Owen O'Sullivan. Lusaka: Zambia Educational Publishing House, 1993.
Series:
LUBA-KASAI
Scope and Contents: see also CONGO LANGUAGES, POLYGLOT
Box Box 33
Grammar and dictionary of the Buluba-Lulua language as spoken in the upper Kasai and Congo basin, by W[illiam] M[cCutchan] Morrison [1867-1918]. New York: American Tract Society, 1906.
Box Box 33
Series:
LUCHUAN
Scope and Contents: see OKINAWAN, CENTRAL
Box Box 33
Series:
LUGANDA
Scope and Contents: see GANDA
Box Box 33
Series:
LUMMI
Scope and Contents: see CLALLAM
Box Box 59
Elementary Lessons in Dho-Luo, by [G]eorge [W]ynn [B]rereton Huntingford. London: School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London, 1959.
Box Box 24
A glossary in English, Kiswahili, Kikuyu and Dholuo. Kamusi ya lugha ya Kiingereza, Kiswahili, Kikuyu na Kijaluo. Mutaratara wa ciugo cia Githungu, Githweri, Gikuyu na Kijaluu. Cheno mar weche ma olok e Dhowasungu, Swahili, Kikuyu gi Dholuo, by T[homas] P[atrick] Gorman. London: Cassell, 1972.
Box Box 33
Dictionary of Puget Salish, by Thom Hess. Seattle and London: University of Washington Press, 1976.
Box Box 35
Lushootseed Dictionary, by Dawn Bates, Thom Hess, & Vi Herbert. Seattle: University of Washington Press, 1994.
Box Box 35
Series:
LWOO
Scope and Contents: see ACOÓLI
Box Box 72
The Masai: their language and folklore, by [Sir] A[lfred] C[laud] Hollis [1874- ]. Oxford: The Clarendon Press, 1905.
Box Box 19
A Masai Grammar with vocabulary, by A[rchibald] N[orman] Tucker & J[ohn] Tomp Old Mpaayei. London; New York; Toronto: Longmans, Green and Co., 1955.
Box Box 19
Series:
MACUA
Scope and Contents: see MAKUWA
Box Box 19
Series:
MADAGLASHTI
Scope and Contents: see PERSIAN DIALECTS
Box Box 19
Series:
MADI
Scope and Contents: see LOGBARA
Box Box 22
A primer and vocabulary of the Moro dialect (Magindanau), by R[alph] S[tribling] Porter. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1903.
Box Box 15
A Grammar of the Maguindanao Tongue according to the manner of speaking it in the interior and on the south coast of the island of Mindanao, by J[acinto] Juanmarti, trans. by C[ornelius] C[ole] Smith. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1906.
Series:
MAHICAN
Scope and Contents: see MOHEGAN-MONTAUK-NARRAGANSETT
Box Box 69
Schmick's Mahican Dictionary, ed. By Carl Masthay. [Philadelphia]: American Philosophical Society, 1991.
Box Box 56
Maidu Texts and Dictionary, by William F. Shipley. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1963.
Box Box 14
A Dictionary of the Mailu Language, edited and enlarged from the researches of the Rev. W. J. V. Saville and the Comte D'Argigny, by Peter A. Lanyon-Orgill. London: Luzac & Co., 1944.
Box Box 28
Basic colloquial Maithili:a Maithili-Nepali-English vocabulary with some structure notes, by Alice Irene Davis. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1984.
Box Box 28
Series:
MAIYA
Scope and Contents: see KOHISTANI, INDUS
Box Box 31
Makassaarsch-Hollandsch Woordenboek, met Hollandsch-Makassaarsche Wordenlijst, opgave van Makassaarsche Plantennamen, en verklaring van een tot opheldering bijgevoegden ethnographischen Atlas, by B[enjamin] F[rederik] Matthes. Amsterdam: Het Nederlandsch Bijbelgenootschap, bij Ferderik Muller, 1859.
Box Box 34
Makassaars-Nederlands woordenboek, by A. A. Cense & Abdoerrahim. 's-Gravenhage: Martinus Nijhoff, 1979.
Box Box 73
Dicionário Português-Macua, by Alexandre Valente de Matos. Lisbon: Junta de Investigações Científicas do Ultramar, 1974.
Box Box 73
Series:
MALA
Scope and Contents: see PAPUA NEW GUINEA LANGUAGES
Box Box 77
A dictionary of the Malagasy language in two parts: Part I, English and Malagasy, by J[oseph] J[ohn] Freeman [1794-1851]. An-Tananarivo: Press of the London Missionary Society, by R. Kitching, 1835. 7/7/99. NLG 550 (=$270). Smitskamp.
Box Box 2
A grammar of the Malagasy language, in the Ankova dialect, by David Griffiths. Woodbridge: Printed by Edward Pite, 1854.
Box Box 16
A New Malagasy-English Dictionary, compiled by Rev. J[ames] Richardson. Antananarivo: The London Missionary Society, 1885. Also a second copy.
Box Box 57
Cours pratique de langue malgache. Deuxième Partie. Dialogues usuels et vocabulaire français-malgaches, by Basilide Rahidy. Paris: Librairie africaine et coloniale, Joseph André et Cie., 1895.
Box No Box
Dictionnaire français-malgache. Nouvelle édition, by V. Malzac. Paris: Augustin Challamel, 1899. 9/14/99. FF1200 (=$190). Chapitre.com.
Box Box 48
Malgashko-russkii slovar: 21000 slov, by Lev A[leksandrovich] Korneev. Moscow: Sovetskaia entsiklopediia, 1966.
Box Box 27
Nederduitsch en maleisch woordenboek: onder goedkeuring en begunstiging der hooge regering en Nederlandische indie, by P[hilippus] P[ieter] Roorda van Eysinga [1796-1856]. Batavia: Ter Lands drukkery, 1824.
Box Box 46
Dictionnaire malai, hollandais et français, par C. P. J. Elout [1795-1843], traduit du dictionnaire malais et anglais de W[illiam] Marsden [1754-1836]. Harlem: Jean Enschedé et fils, 1825.
Box Box 46
Dictionnaire hollandais et malai, suivi d'un Dictionnaire français et malai, de C. P. J. Elout [1795-1843], d'apres le dictionnaire anglais et malais de W[illiam] Marsden [1754-1836]. Added title page in Dutch. Harlem: J. Enschedé et fils, 1826.
Box Box 35
Maleisch-nederduitsch woordenboek naar het werk van Dr, W. Marsden en andere Bronnen, compiled by J[an] Pijnappel [1822-1901]. Haarlem, Amsterdam: Joh. Entschedé en Zonen; Frederik Muller, 1863, bound with Supplement op het Maleisch-Nederduitsch Woordenboek van Dr. J. Pijnappel, Gz., by H[illebrandus] C[ornelius] Klinkert, 1869, with separate title page.
Box Box 15
Nieuw Hollandsch-Maleisch, Maleisch-Hollandsch woordenboek . Derde, veel vermeerderde en verbeterde druk, by A. H. L. Badings. Schoonhoven: Nooten, 1879.
Box Box 27
Vocabulaire Français-Malais et Malais-Français, precédé par un précis de grammaire malaise, by J. Montano, by J[ohn] Errington de la Croix [1848-1905]. Paris: Ernest Leroux, 1889.
Box Box 17
Nieuw Maleisch-Nederlandsch Zakwoordenboek, ten behoeve van hen, die het Maleisch met Latijnsch karakter beoefenen, by H[illebrandus] C[ornelius] Klinkert. Leiden: E. J. Brill, 1892.
Box Box 18
Lijst van Woorden in het Maleish, Hollandsch, Rottineesche en Timoreesch, by E. F. Kleian. Batavia: Albrecht & Rusche, 1894.
Box Box 29
Vocabulary of the English and Malay Languages with notes. Third edition. Vol. I- English-Malay, by Frank A[thelstane] Swettenham. Paris: Ernest Laroux, 1894. Third edition.
Box Box 18
Revised edition (1896): Vocabulary of the English and Malay Languages with notes. Revised edition (Vol. II), by Frank A[thelstane] Swettenham. London: W. B Wittingham, 1896.
Box Box 16
Malay-English vocabulary: containing 6500 Malay words or phrases with their English equivalents together with an appendix of household, nautical and medical terms, etc., by W[illiam] G[irdlestone] Shellabear [1862-1947]. Singapore: American Mission Press, 1902.
Box Box 6
Second, revised and enlarged edition (1912): Malay-English vocabulary containing over 7000 Malay words or phrases with their English equivalents, together with an appendix of household, nautical and medical terms, etc., by W[illiam] G[irdlestone] Shellabear. Singapore: Printed and Published by The Methodist Publishing House, 1912. Second revised and enlarged edition.
Box Box 46
A Malay-English dictionary [Part I]; Part II (Sin to Nya); Part III. Appendices, Index, Addenda and Corrigenda, by R[ichard] J[ames] Wilkinson [1867-1941]. Singapore: Kelly & Walsh, 1903, 1902-3.
Box Box 27
Bijdragen tot de kennis van het Midden Maleisch (Besemahsch en Serawajsch dialect), by O[scar] L[ewis] Helfrich. Batavia: Landsdrukkerij, 1904.
Box Box 13
Kelly & Walsh's Handbook of the Malay Language for the use of tourists and residents (Third edition). Singapore: Kelly & Walsh, 1906.
Box Box 1
An abridged Malay-English dictionary (romanised), by R[ichard] J[ames] Wilkinson [1867-1941]. Kuala Lumpur: Printed at the F.M.S. Government Press, 1908.
Box Box 17
Nieuw praktisch Nederlandsch-Maleisch woordenboek, by W. H. Ridderhof & C. D. L. Janssen. Zutphen: W. J. Thieme & Co., 1934.
Box Box 16
Nieuw praktisch Maleis-Nederlands woordenboek, by W. H. Ridderhof. Zutphen: W. J. Thieme & Co., 1936.
Box Box 67
Dictionary of Colloquial Malay (Malay-English & English-Malay), by R[ichard] O. Winstedt. Singapore: Kelly & Walsh Limited, 1937.
Box Box 19
A Dictionary of Malayan Medicine, by John D[esmond] Gimlette & H[enry] W[agstaffe] Thomson. London, New York, Toronto: Oxford University Press, 1939.
Box Box 17
A simple but complete grammar of the Malay language including an English-Malay vocabulary, a Malay-English dictionary, three appendices and a number of translation exercises, by James Pearce. Perth: [the author?] Service Printing Co., 1944.
Box Box 21
Handbook of the Malay Language containing Phrases, Grammar and Dictionary with special attention to Military and Vocational Requirements, by Eduard F[erdinand] Winckel. South Pasedena, California: P.D. and Ione Perkins, 1944.
Box Box 15
Dictionary of Standard Malay (Malay-English), by Vernon E[dwards] Hendershot & W[illiam] G[irdlestone] Shellabear. Mountain View, California: Pacific Press Publishing Association, 1945.
Box Box 75
A Practical Modern Malay-English Dictionary with an Appendix of Arabic Spellings, by Sir Richard Winstedt. Singapore: Kelly & Walsh Limited, [1953].
Box Box 57
Buku Kata Tiga Bahasa Melayu-Inggeris-China Dengan Bunyi Melayu dan China. Vocabulary in Three Languages, Malay-English-Chinese (with Pronunciation). [Title also in Chinese characters], by Jamaluddin bin Haji Ibrahim. Seremban: Anika Store, [1957].
Box Box 67
A Dictionary of English-Malay and Malay-English, by Sulaiman Bin Ahmad. Kuala Lumpur: Jubilee (Book) Store, 1958.
Box Box 17
An Unabridged English-Malay Dictionary, by Richard Winstedt. Singapore: Marican & Sons, 1958.
Box Box 33
Malay-English. English-Malay Dictionary. No place, no publisher, n.d. [pre-1968].
Series:
MALAYALAM
Scope and Contents: see also INDIA, LANGUAGES OF: POLYGLOT
Box Box 32
A dictionary of high and colloquial Malayalim and English, dedicated by permission to His Highness the Rajah of Travancore, by B[enjamin Bailey [1791-1871]. Cottayam: Printed at the Church Mission Press, 1846.
Box Box 49
A Malayalam and English dictionary, by Hermann Gundert (1814-1893). Mangalore; London: C. Stolz; Trubner & Co., 1871-1872.
Box Box 28
Anglo-Malayalam dictionary. Second Edition, by Tobias Zacharias, revised and enlarged by his son, Oliver Zacharias. Mangalore: Basel Mission Book and Tract Depository, 1933.
Box Box 48
Malaialam-russkii slovar. okolo 40 000 slov, Mikhail Sergeevich Andronov. Moscow: "Sov. entsiklopediia," 1971.
Series:
MALAYO-POLYNESIAN LANGUAGES: POLYGLOT
Box Box 10
Kleines vergleichendes malayo-polynesisches Wörterbuch, by Gerhard Kahlo [1893- ]. Leipzig: Otto Harrassowitz, 1941.
Box Box 67
Say it in Maldivian (Dhivehi), by H[assan] A[hmed] Maniku & J[ayaratna] B[anda] Disanayaka. Colombo, Sri Lanka: Lake House Investments, 1990.
Box Box 67
Series:
MALE
Scope and Contents: see also BONGU
Series:
MALECITE-PASSAMAQUODDY
Box Box 11
Maliseet vocabulary, by Montague Chamberlain [1844-1924]. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard Cooperative Society, 1899.
Box Box 29
Die Sprache der Mbaka-Limba, Mbum und Lakka: Wörterlisten und Grammatik, by Günter Tessman [1884- ]. Berlin: Seminars für Orientalische Sprachen, 1930.
Box Box 56
A Maltese-Arabic Word-list, Showing which of the corresponding Arabic roots are shared by other Semitic Tongues or used in the Quran, C.L. Dessoulaby. London: Luzac & Co, 1938.
Box Box 26
Maltese-English Dictionary, Vol. One A-l, Vol. Two M-Z and Addenda, by Joseph Aquilina. Malta: Midsea Books Ltd, 1987.
Box Box 18
Mambwe-English Dictionary, by Andrezej Halemba. Ndlola, Zambia: Mission Press, 1994.
Box Box 21
Diccionario analitico del Mampruli, Evangelina Arana Swadesh & Mauricio Swadesh. Mexico City: Museo de las culturas, Instituto nacional de Antropologia e Historia, S.E.P., 1967.
Box Box 11
Handwörterbuch der Mandschusprache. I. Lieferung (A-gunggung). II. Lfg. (gunghun-niyalamaingge). III. Lierferung (niyalmangge-z'urz'ung), in three parts, by Erich Hauer [1878-1936]. Tokyo: Verlag Deutsche Gesellschaft für Natur- und Völkerkunde Ostasiens, 1952 [Parts I-II], 1955 [Part III].
Box Box 6
A Concise Manchu-English Lexicon, by Jerry Norman. Seattle: University of Washington Press, 1978.
Box Box 28
Deutsch-mandjurisches Wörterverzeichnis: nach H[ans] C[anon] von der Gabelentz' Mandschu-deutschem Wörterbuch, ed. by Hartmut Walravens & Martin Grimm. Wiesbaden: Franz Steiner, 1978.
Box Box 64
Dictionary of the Kiniassa Language, compiled by Rev. John Rebman. Westmead: Gregg Press, 1967.
Box Box 64
Series:
MANDINGO
Scope and Contents: see MANDINKA
Box Box 55
La langue mandingue et ses dialects (Malinke, Bambara, Dioula). I. Introduction, grammaire, lexique français-mandingue. 2° volume. Dictionnaire Mandigue-français, by Maurice Delafosse. Paris: Librairie Orientaliste Paul Geuthner, 1929, 1955. Two vols.
Box Box 78
Étude dialectologique des parlers "mandingues" du Sénégal, by Abdoulaye Balde. 2 vols. Niamey: Centre d'études linguistiques et historiques par tradition orale; Organisation de l'unité africaine, 1982.
Box Box 30
Kaeti en Wambon: twee Awju-dialecten, by P[eter] Drabbe [1887- ]. 's-Gravenhage: Martin Nijhoff, 1959.
Box Box 30
Series:
MANGAIA
Scope and Contents: see RAROTONGAN
Box Box 30
Series:
MANG'ANJA
Scope and Contents: see NYANGA
Box Box 62
A Dictionary of Mangareva (or Gambier Islands), by Edward Tregear. Wellington, N.Z.: John McKay, Government Printing Office, 1899.
Box Box 49
Essai de grammaire de la langue des iles Gambier, ou Mangareva, by the Catholic Missionaries of the archipelago. Braine-le-Comte: Imprimèrie Zech, 1908.
Box Box 62
Tikitionario 'Arani-Mangareva. Dictionnaire Français-Mangarevien, by Karl H. Rensch. Canberra: Archipelago Press, 1991.
Box Box 62
Series:
MANGAREVIEN
Scope and Contents: see MANGAREVA
Box Box 37
La Langue des Makere, des Medje et des Mangbetu, by A. Vekens. Ghent: Éditions Dominicaines 'Veritas', 1928.
Box Box 30
Grammaire des dialectes mangbetu et medje, suivie d'un manuel de conversation et d'un lexique, by J. Larochette. Tervuren: Commission de Linguistique Africains, 1958.
Box Box 34
Kamus Manggarai. I. Manggarai-Indonesia. II. Indonesia-Manggarai, two vols., by Jilis A.J. Verheijen. 's-Gravenhage: Martinus Nijhoff, 1967, 1970.
Box Box 74
[cover title] Notes on the Mangyan Language, by E. E. Schneider. Manila: Bureau of Printing, 1912.
Series:
MANOBO, DIBABAWON
Box Box 14
Dibabaon-Mandayan Vocabulary, by Myra Lou Barnard & Jannette Forster. Manila: Summer Institute of Linguistics, in cooperation with the Bureau of Public Schools and the Institute of National Language of the Department of Education, 1954.
Series:
MANOBO, MATIGSALUG
Box Box 11
Malepet ne diksunari te hep-at ne lalag = A short four-language dictionary : MatigSalug Manobo, Cebuano Visayan, Pilipino, English. Manila, Philippines: The Institute, 1984.
Series:
MANOBO, WESTERN BUKIDNON
Box Box 14
A Vocabulary of Central Mindanao Manobo, by Richard E. Elkins & Mrs. Elkins. Manila: The Summer Institute of Linguistics in cooperation with The Bureau of Public schools and The Institute of National Language of The Department of Education, 1954.
Box Box 27
Manobo-English Dictionary, by Richard E. Elkins. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press, 1968.
Box Box 14
Mansaka Vocabulary, by Gordon Svelmoe & Norman Abrams. Manila: Summer Institute of Linguistics University of North Dakota in cooperation with the Bureau of Public Schools and the Institute of National Language of the Department of Education, 1955.
Box Box 14
Series:
MANZA
Scope and Contents: see CONGO LANGUAGES, POLYGLOT
Box Box 1
A Dictionary of the New-Zealand Language, and a concise grammar; to which are added a selection of colloquial sentences, by William Williams. Paihia: Printed at the Press of the C. M. Society, 1844.
Box Box 26
Second edition, 1852: A Dictionary of the New-Zealand Language, and a concise grammar; to which is added a selection of colloquial sentences. Second edition, by William Williams. London: Williams and Norgate, 1852.
Box Box 77
Third edition, 1871: A Dictionary of the New Zealand Language; to which is added a selection of colloquial sentences, by William Williams. London and Edinburgh: Williams & Norgate, 1871.
Box Box 62
Fourth edition, 1892: A Dictionary of the New Zealand Language, by William Williams. Aukland and Edinburgh: Upton & Co. and Williams & Norgate, 1892.
Box Box 2
[Abridged] Fourth edition (1915): A Dictionary of the New Zealand Language, by the Right ReverendWilliam Williams, D.C. L., Bishop of Waiapu, New Zealand. Fourth edition, with numerous additions and corrections and an introduction, by W. L. Williams. Wellington: Whitcombe & Tombs, 1915.
Box Box 57
Maori and English Dictionary, by Richard Taylor. Aukland: George T. Chapman, [ca. 1871].
Box Box 41
First lessons in the Maori language: with a short vocabulary, by W[illiam] L[eonard] Williams [1829-1916]. Auckland: Upton & Co., 1872. Second edition.
Box Boxes 17 and 57
New and complete manual of Maori conversation: containing phrases and dialogues on a variety of useful and interesting topics, together with a few general rules of grammar; and a comprehensive vocabulary, by S[ister Marie Joseph] A[ubert]. Wellington, N.Z.: Lyon & Blair Printers, 1885. Also: Binding variant: original blue cloth over boards, lettered and decorated in red.
Box Box 13
The Maori-Polynesian comparative dictionary, by Edward Tregear. Wellington, N.Z.: Lyon and Blair, 1891. 2/14/00. AU$148 (=$91). Basilisk Bookshop.
Box Box 64
Complete Manual of Maori Grammar and Conversation with Vocabulary, edited by A. T. Ngata. Revised and enlarged edition. Christchurch, Wellington, and Dunedin: Whitcombe and Tombs Limited, [1918].
Box Box 61
Reeds' Concise Maori Dictionary Maori-English English-Maori, by A. H. & A. W. Reed. Wellington, N.Z.: A. H. & A. W. Reed, 1948.
Box Box 67
Second edition (1949): Reeds' Concise Maori Dictionary. Maori-English. English-Maori, by A. H. & A[lexander] W[yclif] Reed. Wellington, N.Z.: A. H. & A. W. Reed, 1949.
Box Box 71
Reeds' Lilliput Dictionary. Maori-English. English-Maori, by A. H. & A[lexander] W[yclif] Reed. Wellington, N.Z.: A. H. & A. W. Reed, 1960.
Box Box 71
Lilliput Maori Place Names, by A[lexander] W[yclif] Reed. Wellington: A. H. & A. W. Reed, [1962].
Box Box 16
Maori picture dictionary, by A[lexander] W[yclif] Reed [1908- ]. Wellington; Auckland: A.H. & A.W. Reed, 1965.
Box Box 67
English-Maori Dictionary, by Bruce Biggs. Auckland, N.Z.: A. H. & A. W. Reed, 1966.
Box Box 6
Aboriginal place names and their meanings, by A[lexander] W[yclif] Reed. [Artarmon] Sydney, Wellington: A. H. & A. W. Reed, 1967.
Box Box 29
A word-list of South Island Maori, by Ray Harlow. [Auckland]: Linguistic Society of New Zealand, 1985.
Box Box 65
The Complete English-Maori Dictionaryby Bruce Biggs. Auckland University Press / Oxford University Press, 1985.
Box Box 36
Dictionnaire néo-zélandais - français. New Zealand - French dictionary, by Ewen Jones & Myreille Pawliez. Paris; Montreal: Éditions L'Harmattan, 1998.
Box Box 36
Series:
MAPUCHE
Scope and Contents: see MAPUDUNGUN
Box Box 17
Diccionario Hispano Chileno, by Andres Febres, enlarged by Antonio Hernandez y Calzada. Santiago: Imprenta del Progreso, 1846.
Box Box 61
Diccionario Comentado Mapuche-Español. Araucano Pehuenche Pampa Pichunche Rancülche Huilliche, by Esteban Erize. [Bahia Blanca]: Instituto de Humanidades, Universidad Nacional del Sur, 1960.
Box Box 14
Diccionario ilustrado: mapudungun, español, ingles, by Arturo Hernández Sallés, Nelly Ramos Pizarro, and Carlos Cácamo Luna, illustrator. Providencia, Santiago, Chile: Pehuen, 1997.
Box Box 14
Series:
MARA (CHIN LANGUAGE)
Scope and Contents: see LAKHER
Series:
MARA (AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINE)
Box Box 3
Basic Materials in Mara: Grammar, Texts and Dictionary, by Jeffrey Heath. Canberra: Department of Linguistics, Research School of Pacific Studies, The Australian National University, 1981.
Box Box 69
Maranao Dictionary, compiled by Howard P. McKaughan & Batua A. Macaraya. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press, 1967.
Box Box 39
A Comprehensive Dictionary, English and Marathi. New edition, improved and enlarged, by Baba Padmanji. Bombay: Education's Society Press, 1870
Box Box 39
Series:
MARATINO
Scope and Contents: see COAHUILTECO
Box Box 39
Series:
MARICOPA
Scope and Contents: see HAVASUPAI
Box Box 28
An eastern Cheremis manual phonology, grammar, texts and glossary, by Thomas A[lbert] Sebeok [1920- ] & Frances J. Ingemann. Bloomington: Indiana University, 1961. 12/24/98. $21. Black Oak Books.
Box Box 5
Marindineesch-Nederlandsch woordenboek, by H[enricus] Geurtjens. Bandoeng: A. C. Nix & Co., 1933.
Box Box 17
See TAHITIAN: Buschmann, 1843 for first published vocabulary of Marquesan.
Box Box 51
Grammaire et Dictionnaire de la Langue des Iles Marquises. Marquisien-Français, 2 vols., by René Ildefonse Dordillon. Paris: Insitut d'Ethnologie, 1931-1932.
Box Box 60
Pona te'ao tapapatina = Lexique marquisien-français/ Author: Le Cléac'h, Hervé. Publication: Papeete, Tahiti : [s.n.], 1997
Box Box 7
[Cover title] English Marshallese Dictionary. N.p.: [EML Division of the Transport Company of Texas, 1963].
Box Box 34
Tikjinere-Dictionary. Kajin Majöl & Kajin Inlij. Marshallese & English. Kwajalein Island, Marshall Islands: Kwajalein Education Committee, 1968.
Box Box 34
Series:
MARTINIQUE CREOLE
Scope and Contents: see LESSER ANTILLEAN CREOLE FRENCH
Series:
MATLATZINCA, ATZINGO and MATLATZINCA, FRANCISCO DE LOS RANCHOS
Box Box 13
Diccionario matlatzinca-español, compiled by Roberto Escalante Fernandez. Toluca, Mexico: Instituto Mexiquense de Cultura, 1997.
Box Box 11
Mattole: an Athabaskan language, by Fang-kuei Li. Chicago: The University of Chicago Press, 1930.
Box Box 33
Maung grammar: texts and vocabulary, by Arthur Capell & H.E. Hinch. The Hague Paris: Mouton, 1970.
Series:
MAYAN LANGUAGES
Scope and Contents: see also CAKCHIQUEL; ITZAJ; K'EKCHI'; QUICHÉ; TZOTZIL
Box Box 34
Das nördliche Mittel-Amerika nebst einem Ausflug nach dem Hochland von Anahuac. Reisen und Studien aus den Jahren 1888-1895, by Karl Sapper [1866-1945]. Braunschweig: Friedrich Viewig und Sohn, 1897.
Box Box 9
Pequeño diccionario de voces guatemaltecas, ordenadas etimologicamente, by Jorge Luis Arriola. Guatemala, C.A.: [Tipografia nacional], 1941.
Box Box 29
Diccionario español-maya, by Ermilo Solis Alcala. [Ochil? Mexico]: Yikal Maya Than, 1950.
Box Box 25
Diccionario etnolingüístico del idioma maya yucateco colonial. I. Mundo Fisico. II. Aprovechamiento de los recoursos naturales, two vols., by Cristina Álvarez. Mexico: Universidad Nacional Autónoma de México, Instituto de Investigaciones Filológicas, Centro de Estudios Mayas, 1980.
Box Box 18
Vocabulario de Mayathan. Mayan Dictionary. Maya-English English-Maya, by Dorothy Andrews Heath de Zapata. Merida, Yucatan, Mexico: [s.n.], 1980.
Box Box 26
Maya t'an. Spoken Maya. Introduction to Grammar, Common Phrases, Special Vocabularies, English-Maya-Glossary, by William J. Litzinger & Robert D. Bruce. [Mexico City]: Ediciones Euroamericanas, 1997.
Box Box 53
A dictionary of the Maya language as spoken in Hocabá, Yucatan, compiled by Victoria R[eifler] Bricker [1940- ], Eleuterio Po§ot Yah, & Ofelia Dzul de Po§ot. Salt Lake City: University of Utah Press, 1998.
Box Box 9
Diccionario mazahua-español, by the Colegio de lenguas y literatura indígenas. [Cover title] Diccionario Español-Mazahua. Mexico: Toluca, Edo. de Mexico: Gobierno del Estado de Mexico; Instituto Mexiquense de Cultura, 1997.
Series:
MAZATECO DE CHIQUIHUITLAN
Box Box 25
Diccionario mazateco de Chiquihuitlan, Oaxaca, by Carole Jamieson Capen. Tucson, AZ: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1996.
Box Box 25
Series:
MBAI
Scope and Contents: see SARA
Box Box 10
Vocabulaire mbala, by Pius Ndolo & Florence Malasi. Tervuren: Musée royal de l'Afrique centrale, 1972.
Box Box 10
Series:
MBUM
Scope and Contents: see MALIMBA
Box Box 53
"Vocabulary of the Language of the Pigmies of the Ituri Forest (Wambutti)," by Dr. J. David from a paper on "Notizen über die Pygmaen des Ituri Waldes" in "Globus" (Friedrich Vieweg und Sohn, Brunswick) (Band 46. No. 12) 22 September 1904. One page typescript.
Box Box 40
Die Mehri-Sprache in Südarabien. Texte und Wörterbuch, by Alfred Jahn. Vienna: Alfred Hölder, 1902.
Box Box 40
Series:
MEIME
Scope and Contents: see PERSIAN DIALECTS
Series:
MELANESIAN LANGUAGES: POLYGLOT
Box Box 11
The Melanesian languages, by R[obert]H[enry] Codrington [1830-1922]. Oxford: The Clarendon Press, 1885.
Box Box 11
Series:
MELANESIAN PIDGIN ENGLISH
Scope and Contents: see NEO-MELANESIAN
Box Box 31
A dictionary of the Mele language (atara imere), Vanuatu, by [D.] Ross Clark. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics, Research School of Pacific and Asian Studies, Australian National University, 1998.
Box Box 64
The Mende Language containing Useful Phrases, Elementary Grammar, Short Vocabularies, Reading Materials, by F[rederick] W[illiam] H[ugh] Migeod. London: Kegan Paul, 1908.
Box Box 57
Mende Natural History Vocabulary, by F[rederick] W[illiam] H[ugh] Migeod. London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner & Co., 1913.
Box Box 31
A Hand-book of the Mende Language, by Rev. A. T. Sumner. Freetown: Government Printing Office, 1917.
Box Box 29
A View of Sierra Leone, by F[rederick] W[illiam] H[ugh] Migeod [1872- ]. New York: Brentano's, 1927.
Box Box 63
A Mende-English Dictionary, by Gordon Innes. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1969.
Box Box 42
"The Menomini Indians," by Walter James Hoffman in: Fourteenth Annual Report of the Bureau of Ethnology to the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution 1892-93 in Two Parts: Part I, by J. W. Powell. Washington: Government Printing Office, 1896, pp. 11-295.
Box Box 69
Menominee Lexicon, by Leonard Bloomfield, ed. by Charles F. Hockett. Milwaukee: Milwaukee Public Museum, 1975.
Box Box 69
Series:
MEROLU TELUGU
Scope and Contents: see TELUGU
Box Box 32
Shawnee Stems and the Jacob P. Dunn Miami Dictionary, by C[harles] F[rederick] Voegelin [1906- ]. Parts I-V. Indianapolis: Indiana Historical Society, 1938-1940. 7/21/99. $80. Michael Ginsberg Books.
Box Box 32
Part I. Stems in p-. Prehistory Research Series, Vol. I, No. 1, January 1938.
Box Box 32
Part II. Stems in t- and ...-. Prehistory Research Series, Vol. I, No. 3, June 1938.
Box Box 32
Part III. Stems in k- and š- and 2- with appendix, non-initial elements. Prehistory Research Series, Vol. I, No. 8, October 1939.
Box Box 32
Part IV. Stems in l-, m-, and n-. With appendix. Gestalt Technique of Stem Composition in Shawnee, by B. L. Worf. Prehistory Research Series, Vol. I, No. 9, April 1940.
Box Box 32
Part V. Stems in w- and h- vowel. With index, Parts I-V. Prehistory Research Series, Vol. I, No. 10, August 1940.
Box Box 66
Kaskaskia Illinois-to-French dictionary, by Carl Masthay. 757 p. : ill. ; 29 cm. St. Louis, MO: C. Masthay, [2002].
Box Box 4
Dictionary of the language of the Micmac Indians who reside in Nova Scotia, New Brunswick, Prince Edward Island, Cape Breton and Newfoundland, by Rev. Silas Tertius Rand. Halifax: Nova Scotia Printing Co., 1888.
Box Box 23
Micmac Dictionary, by Albert D. DeBlois. Hull, Quebec: Canadian Museum of Civilization, 1996.
Box Box 3
Tìdn-Áal: A Study of Midob (Darfur-Nubian), by Roland Werner. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer Verlag, 1993.
Box Box 12
Lexique migama: migama-français et français-migama (Guera, Tchad) avec une introduction grammaticale, by Hermann Jungraithmayr & Abakar Adams. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer, 1992.
Box Box 32
Minangkabausch-Maleisch-Nederlandsch woordenboek, J[ohannes] L[udovicus] van der Toorn. 's Gravenhage: Martinus Nijhoff, 1891.
Box Box 32
Series:
MINNESOTA OJIBWA
Scope and Contents: see OJIBWA
Box Box 65
Le Miny: "Langue des chefs" de l'île de Lifou (Iles Loyauté - Nouvelle Calédonie). Lexique Miny-Drehu-Français Drehu-Miny-Français, by Maurice H. Lenormand. Nouméa: Editions Populaires, 1990.
Box Box 65
Series:
MINYUNG
Scope and Contents: see AWABAKAL
Box Box 65
Series:
MISIMA-PANEATI
Scope and Contents: see MUYUW
Series:
MISKITO
Scope and Contents: see also SUMO
Box Box 67
Grammar of the Miskito language with exercises and Vocabulary, compiled by H[ermann] Berckenhagen. Bluefields, Moskito Coast: G. Winter, 1894.
Box Box 14
"Notes on the Miskto and Suma Languages of Eastern Nicaragua an Honduras," by Eduard Conzemius, in: International Journal of American Linguistics, New York, Vol. 5, No. 1 (March 1929), pp. 57-115.
Box Box 34
Diccionario miskito-español, español-miskito, by C. R. Heath & W. G. Marx. Tegucigalpa, Honduras: Calderon, 1953.
Box Box 20
Diccionario elemental Miskito-Español Español-Miskito. [Managua, Nicaragua]: Centro de Investigación y Documentación de la Costa Atlántica, [1986].
Box Box 20
Series:
MISSION INDIAN VOCABULARIES
Scope and Contents: see COSTANOAN; SALINAN
Box Box 11
The Michif dictionary: Turtle Mountain Chippewa Cree, Patline Laverdure & Ida Rose Allard, ed. by John C. Crawford. Winnipeg, Manitoba: Pemmican Publications, 1983.
Box Box 78
Esquisse de la langue Mituku, by Leo Stappers. Tervuren, Belgium: Musée Royal de l'Afrique Centrale, 1973.
Series:
MIWOK, CENTRAL SIERRA
Box Box 61
Central Sierra Miwok Dictionary with Texts, by L. S. Freeland & Sylvia M. Broadbent. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1960.
Box Box 36
Bodega Miwok Dictionary, by Catherine A. Callaghan. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1970.
Box Box 61
Lake Miwok Dictionary, by Catherine A. Callaghan. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1965.
Series:
MIWOK, NORTHERN SIERRA
Box Box 36
Northern Sierra Miwok Dictionary, by Catherine A. Callaghan. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1987.
Box Box 36
Plains Miwok dictionary, by Catherine A. Callaghan. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1984.
Box Box 65
Arte en Lengva mixteca, compiled by Antonio de los Reyes. Alençon: Comte H. de Charencey, 1889.
Series:
MIXTECO DE SAN JUAN COLORADO
Box Box 25
Diccionario mixteco de San Juan Colorado, by Sara Stark Campbell, Andrea Johnson Peterson & Filiberto Lorenzo Cruz. Mexico, D.F.: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1986. 10/19/98. $9.00. SILing.
Box Box 37
Minor Mlabri: a hunter-gatherer language of northern Indochina, by Jørgen Rischel. Copenhagen: Museum Tusculanum Press, University of Copenhagen, 1995. 3/16/99. $44.50. Coachman Enterprises.
Series:
MOBILIAN (MOBILIAN JARGON)
Box Box 59
The Mobilian Trade Language, by James M[ack] Crawford. Knoxville, TN: The University of Tennessee Press, 1978.
Box Box 14
"Mobilian Jargon:linguistic, sociocultural, and historical aspects of an American Indian lingua franca," by Emanuel J. Drechsel. Ph.D. Thesis, University of Wisconsin, Madison, 1979.
Box Box 59
"An Intergrated Vocabulary of Mobilian Jargon, a Native American Pidgin of the Mississippi Valley," by Emanuel J. Drechsel, in: Anthropological Linguistics, Vol. 38, No. 2 (Summer 1996), pp. 248-354.
Box Box 59
Series:
MOCA
Scope and Contents: see SHAKACHO
Box Box 14
A Mojave Dictionary, by Pamela Munro, Nellie Brown, & Juidth G. Crawford. Los Angeles: Department of Lingusitics, UCLA, 1992.
Box Box 27
Radical Words of the Mohawk Language with their Derivatives, by James Bruyas. S.l.: s.n., n.d. [ca. 1862].
Box Box 15
English-Mohawk Lexicon. A Spelling Wordlist of Six Nations Mohawk using the Isaac Orthography, by Ruth Isaac, Ima Johnson, Vina Loft & Claudine VanEvery-Albert. Brantford, Ontario: The Woodland Indian Cultural-Educational Centre, 1986.
Box Box 14
One Thousand Useful Mohawk Words, by David Kanatawakhon Maracle. Guildford, Conn.: Audio-Forum, 1992.
Box Box 65
Mokilese-English Dictionary, by Sheldon P. Harrison & Salich Albert. Honolulu: The University Press of Hawaii, 1977.
Box Box 29
Lexique mokilko: Mokilko-francais et francais-mokilko (Guera, Tchad), by Herrmann Jungraithmayr. Berlin: D. Reimer, 1990.
Box Box 4
A Dictionary of Modern Spoken Mon, by H. L. Shorto. London: Oxford University Press, 1962.
Series:
MONASTIC SIGN LANGUAGE
Box Box 13
The Cistercian sign language: a study in non-verbal communication, by Robert A. Barakat. Kalamazoo, Mich.: Cistercian Publications, 1975.
Box Box 13
Dictionary of the Lomongo language, by E[dward] A[lgernon] Ruskin [b. 1871] & L[ily Adele Waldron Wall] Ruskin [1871 -]. London: Christian Literature Society, n.d. [1928].
Box Box 65
Dictionnaire Français-Lomongo (Lonkundo), by G. Hulstaert. Antwerp: Éditions de Sikkel, 1952.
Box Box 56
Dictionnaire Lomongo-Français A-J. K-Z., two vols., by G. Hulstaert. Tervuren, Belgium: Musée Royale du Congo Belge, 1957.
Series:
MONGOLIAN, HALH
Scope and Contents: see also ALTAIC LANGUAGES: POLYGLOT
Box Box 22
Wörterbuch der heutigen mongolischen Sprache mit kurzem Abriss der Grammatik und ausgew¨a;hlten Sprachproben, by R[obert] Bleichsteiner [1891-1954] & W[alther] Heissig in collaboration with W[ilhelm] A[lexios] Unkrig. Vienna, Peking: Siebenberg-Verlag, 1941.
Box Box 21
Khalkha-Mongolische Grammatik mit Bibliographie, Sprachproben und Glossar, by Nikolaus Poppe. Wiesbaden: Franz Steiner Verlag, 1951.
Box Box 48
Mongolsko-russkii slovar. okolo 22 000 slov, by A. Luvsandendev. Moscow: Gosudarstvennoe Izdatelstvo Inostrannykh i Natsionalnykh Slovarei, 1957.
Box Box 47
Russko-mongolskii slovar. okolo 30 000 slov, by A[leksandr] R[inchinovich] Damba-Rinchine. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1960.
Box Box 37
The Zirni Manuscript. A Persian-Mongolian Glossary and Grammar, by Shinobu Iwamura, with the collaboration of Natsuki Osada and the late Tadashi Yamasaki. Kyoto: Kyoto University, 1961.
Box Box 65
A Concise English-Mongolian Dictionaryby John G. Hangin. Bloomington, Indiana: Indiana University, 1970.
Box Box 59
Mongolian-English Dictionary, compiled by Charles Bawden. London & New York: Kegan Paul International, 1997.
Box Box 19
Bolaang Mongondowsch-Nederlandsch Woordenboek, mit Nederlandsch-Bolaang Mongondowsch register, by W. Dunnebier. 's-Gravenhage: Martinus Nijhoff, 1951.
Box Box 19
Series:
MONJAMBO
Scope and Contents: see NGBAKA MA'BO
Box Box 52
Mono-Alu folklore: (Bougainville Strait, Western Solomon islands), by Gerald [Clair William] Camden Wheeler [1872- ]. London: George Routledge, 1926.
Box Box 21
Dictionnaire Français-Montagnais, avec un vocabulaire Montagnais-Anglais, une courte liste de noms geographiques et une grammaire Montagnaise, compiled by Geo[rge Joseph Guyon] Lemoine. Boston: W.B. Cabot and P. Cabot, 1901.
Box Box 4
Issue in wrappers (1901):except for two additional blank leaves at beginning and end of volume, identical to issue in limp tan cloth, but issued in gray wrappers, lettered in black; spine and rear cover blank.
Box Box 20
Die Monumbo-Sprache. Grammatik und Wörterverzeichnis, by Franz Vormann & Wilh. Scharfenberger. Vienna: Mechitharisten-Buchdruckerei, 1914.
Box Box 9
[Cover title] Diccionario bilingue: maya mopan y espanol ; espanol y maya mopan, [by Mateo and Rosemary Ulrich]. [Guatemala]: [Instituto Linguistico de Verano], 1976.
Box Box 9
Series:
MORDVIN
Scope and Contents: see ERZYA
Box Box 3
Étude sur la langue des Mossi (Boucle du Niger) suvie d'un vocabulaire & de textes, by F[ernand] Froger. Paris: Ernest Laroux, 1910.
Box Box 29
Les noms individuels chez les Mosi, by Maurice Houis. Dakar: [printed in Limoges, France], 1963.
Box Box 22
A Dictionary of Moroccan Arabic: English-Moroccan, ed. by Harvey Sobelman & Richard S. Harrell. Washington, D.C.: Georgetown University Press, 1963.
Box Box 37
A Dictionary of Moroccan Arabic: Moroccan-English, ed. by Richard S. Harrell. Washington, D.C.: Georgetown University Press, 1966.
Box Box 68
Moseteno Vocabulary and Treatises, by Benigno Bibolotti. Evanston and Chicago: Northwestern University, 1917.
Box Box 68
Series:
MOSQUITO
Scope and Contents: see MISKITO
Box Box 68
Series:
MOSSI
Scope and Contents: see MÒORÉ
Box Box 6
A dictionary of the language of Mota, Sugarloaf Island, Banks' Islands, with a short grammar and index, by R[obert] H[enry] Codrington & J[ohn] Palmer. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1896.
Box Box 8
Grammar and Vocabulary of the Language Spoken by Motu Tribe (New Guinea), by W[illiam] G[eorge] Lawes. Sydney: Charles Potter, 1888. Second edition.
Box Box 68
Third edition: Grammar and Vocabulary of the Language Spoken by Motu Tribe (New Guinea), by Rev. W. G. Lawes. Sydney: Charles Potter, 1896. ALSO a second copy with dust jacket.
Box Box 73
A Grammar of the Motu Language of Papua, by R. Lister-Turner & J.B. Clark, second edition, edited Percy Chatterton. Sydney: A.H. Pettifer, [1941].
Box Box 20
A Dictionary of the Motu Language of Papua, by R. Lister-Turner & J. B. Clark, second edition, edited by Percy Chatterton. Sydney: A. H. Pettifer, [1941].
Box Box 59
"A Sketch of the Structure of Oob No'ok (Mountain Pima)," by David Leedom Shaul, in: Anthropological Linguistics, Vol. 36, No. 3 (Fall 1994), pp. 277-365.
Box Box 25
Movima y castellano, compiled by Roberto Judy & Judit Emerich de Judy. Cochabamba, Bolivia: Publicado por el Instituto Linguistico de Verano en colaboracion con el Ministerio de Asuntos Campesinos y el Ministerio de Educacion y Bellas Artes, Oficialia Mayor de Cultura, Departamento de Arqueologia, Etnologia, y Folkloro, 1962.
Box Box 25
Series:
MUN
Scope and Contents: see KIM MUN
Box Box 33
Muna-English dictionary, by René van den Berg, in collaboration with La Ode Sidu. Leiden: KITLV Press, 1996.
Box Box 65
Mundani-English Lexicon, compiled by Elizabeth Parker & Christine Durant. Yaounde: Société Internationale de Linguistique, 1990.
Box Box 54
A Mundari-English Dictionary, by Manindra Bhusan Bhaduri. Calcutta: Calcutta University Press, 1931.
Box Box 54
Series:
MUNJI
Scope and Contents: see INDO-IRANIAN FRONTIER LANGUAGES
Box Box 54
Delaware-English English-Delaware Dictionary, by John O'Meara. Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 1996.
Box Box 3
Diccionario Huitoto Murui. Tomo I, compiled by Shirley Burtch. Yarinacocha, Pucallpa, Peru: Ministerio de Educacion : Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1983.
Box Box 3
Series:
MUSKOGEAN
Scope and Contents: see ALABAMA
Box Box 46
A Vocabulary or phrase book of the Mutsun language of Alta California, by Felipe Arroyo de la Cuesta. New York: Cramoisy Press, 1862.
Box Box 43
ALSO: [cover title] The Mutsun Dialect of Costanoan based on the Vocabulary of De la Cuesta, by J[ohn] Alden Mason. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1916.
Box Box 43
Series:
MUYU, NORTHERN
Scope and Contents: see MANDOBO
Box Box 43
Series:
MUYU, SOUTHERN
Scope and Contents: see MANDOBO
Box Box 12
A dictionary of Mupun, by Zygmunt Frajzyngier. Berlin: Reimer, 1991.
Box Box 43
A Grammar of the Mpongwe Language, with Vocabularies, by the Missionaries of the A. B. C. F. M., Gaboon Mission, Western Africa. New York: Snowden & Prall, 1847.
Box Box 34
Dictionnaire Mpongwe-français, suivi d'élements de grammaire. Dictionnaire Français-Mpongwe, suive d'élements de grammaire, by André Raponda-Walker [1871- ]. Metz; Brazzaville: La Libre Lorraine; Imprimerie Saint-Paul, 1934, 1961. Two volumes.
Box Box 15
Notes on the Naga Tribes, in communication with Assam, by John Owen. Calcutta: W. H. Carey and Co., 1844.
Box Box 14
Nahali: A Comparative Study, by F[ransiscus] B[ernardus] J[acobus] Kuiper. Amsterdam: N.V. Nord-Hollandsche Uitgevers Maatschappij, 1962.
Box Box 14
Glossarium azteco-latinum et latino-aztecum cura et studio Bernardini Biondelli collectum ac digestum, by Bernardino Biondelli [1804-1886]. Milan: Valentiner et Mues, 1869.
Box Box 3
Arte mexicana, by Antonio del Rincon [1556-1601]. Cover titla: Gramatica y vocabulario mexicanos. 1595. Reimpresion de 1885, ed. by Antonio Peñafiel . Mexico City Oficina tip. de la Secretaría de fomento, 1885.
Box Box 18
Llave del Náhuatl: colección de trozos clásicos, con gramática y vocabulario, para utilidad de los principiantes, by Angel Mariá Garibay K[intana]. Otumba, Mexico: [Imprenta Mayli, s.a.], 1940. BOUND WITH: Vocabulario mejicano de la Sierra de Zacapoaxtla, Puebla, compiled by Harold Key & Mary Ritchie de Key. Illustrated by Alberto Beltran & Catarina Voigtlander. Mexico: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1953.
Box Box 21
Aztekische Schriftsprache. Grammatik (mit Lautlehre), Text und Glossar, by Jakob Schoembs. Heidelberg: Carl Winter Universit¨a;tsverlag, 1949.
Box Box 14
Los mil elementos del mexicano clásico: base analitica de la lengua nahua, by Mauricio Swadesh {1909-1967] & Madalena Sancho . Mexico City: Universidad Nacional Autonóma de México, Instituto de Investigaciones Históricas, 1966.
Box Box 21
An Analytical Dictionary of Nahuatl, by Frances Karttunen. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1983.
Box Box 21
A Nahuatl-English Dictionary and Concordance to the Cantares Mexicanos with an Analytical Transcription and Grammatical Notes, by John Bierhorst. Stanford, California: Stanford University Press, 1985.
Box Box 26
Diccionario analitico del Nahuatl. Espanol-nahuatl, nahuatl-espanol, by Ausencio Alva Hernandez. [Puebla, Mexico]: Secretaria de Cultura, 1996.
Box Box 27
Nam: an Ancient Language of the Sino-Tibetan Borderland. Text, with Introduction, Vocabulary and linguistic studies, by F[rederick] W[illiam] Thomas. London: Oxford University Press, 1948.
Box Box 11
Deutsch-Nama Wörterbuch: nebst Anhang Afrikaans-Duitse woorderlys van die vernaamste Duitse woorde in die Deutsch-Nama Wörterbuch, by Fr[iedrich] Rust. Windhoek: Rheinische Mission in Sudwestafrika, 1960.
Box Box 3
Goldisch-deutsches Wörterverzeichniss mit vergleichender Berücksichtigung der übrigen tungusischen Dialekte, by Wilhelm Grube[1855-1908]. St. Petersburg: Bei den Commissionaren der Kaiserlichen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 1900.
Box Box 48
Goldsko-Russkii slovar, by P. Protodiakonov. Vladivostok: Parovay tipo-litografia, 1901.
Box Box 4
The Nandi. Their language and folk-lore, by [Sir] A[lfred] C[laud] Hollis [1874- ] Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1909.
Box Box 15
A Nharo Wordlist, by Alan Barnard. Durban: University of Natal Department of African Studies, 1985.
Box Box 14
A short practical dictionary of the Gitksan language, by Lonnie Hindle & Bruce Rigsby.. Moscow, Idaho: s.n., 1973.
Box Box 14
Series:
NATICK
Scope and Contents: see WAMPANOAG
Series:
NATIVE AMERICAN LANGUAGES
Box Box 41
Tribes of the extreme Northwest, by William Healey Dall [1845-1927], and Tribes of western Washington and northwestern Oregon, by George Gibbs [1818-1873]. Washington: Government Printing Office, 1877. Series: Contributions to North American ethnology, Vol. 1. Department of the Interior. U.S. Geographical and Geological Survey of the Rocky Mountain Region.
Box Box 6
Comparative Vocabularies of the Indian Tribes of British Columbia, with a Map illustrating Distribution, by W[illiam] Fraser Tolmie & George M[ercer] Dawson. Montreal: Dawson Brothers, 1884. Also a second copy with different binding.
Box Box 31
Indian local names, with their interpretation, by Stephen G[ill] Boyd. York, Pa: The author, 1885.
Box Box 68
A Vocabulary of the Navaho Language, by The Franciscan Fathers. St. Michaels, Arizona: The Franciscan Fathers, [1912]. 2 Vols.
Box Box 34
A Stem Vocabulary of the Navaho Language. Navaho-English, Volume One. English-Navaho. Volume Two, by Berard Haile. St. Michaels, Arizona: St. Michaels Press, 1950, 1951.
Box Box 67
A Vocabulary of Colloquial Navaho, by Robert W. Young & William Morgan. [Washington, D.C.]: United States Indian Service, 1951. Vol. Two.
Box Box 7
Navajo-English Dictionary, by Leon Wall & William Morgan. Window Rock, Arizona: Navajo Agency, Branch of Education, 1958.
Box Box 36
A Navajo Lexicon, by Harry Hoijer. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1974.
Box Box 42
The Navajo language: a grammar and colloquial dictionary, by Robert W. Young [1912- ]. Albuquerque: University of New Mexico Press, 1980.
Box Box 79
Analytical Lexicon of Navajo, by Robert W. Young & William Morgan, Sr., with the assistance of Sally Migette. Albuquerque: University of New Mexico Press, 1992.
Box Box 16
Dictionary of the Tebele & Shuna Languages. With illustrative sentences and some grammatical notes, by W[illiam] A[llen] Elliott. London: David Nutt, 1897.
Box Box 2
Second edition, 1910: Notes for a Sindebele dictionary and grammar, with illustrative sentences. Second edition, by W[illiam] A[llan] Elliot. Bristol: Sindebele Publishing Company, [ca. 1910].
Box Box 2
Series:
NEMBE
Scope and Contents: see IJO, SOUTHEAST
Series:
NENETS
Scope and Contents: see also SAMOYED LANGUAGES
Box Box 48
Nenetsko-russkii slovar: okolo 22000 slov, by N[ataliia] M[itrofanovna] Tereshchenko. Moscow: Izd-vo sovetskaia entsklopediia, 1965.
Box Box 32
Nengone Dictionary. Part I. Nengone-English. Part II English-Nengone, by D[arrell] T. Tryon & M[arie]-J[oseph] Dubois. Volume 1 of 2. Canberra: The Australian National University, 1969, 1971.
Box Box 35
Nengone Dictionary. Part I. Nengone-English. Part II English-Nengone, by D[arrell] T. Tryon & M[arie]-J[oseph] Dubois. Volume 2 of 2. Canberra: The Australian National University, 1969, 1971.
Box Box 35
Series:
NEO-MELANESIAN / PIDGIN ENGLISH
Scope and Contents: see TOK PISAN
Box Box 20
Nepali Grammar and Vocabulary, by A[rchibald] Turnbull. London; Calcutta: W. Thacker & Co.; Thacker, Spink & Co., 1923. Third edition.
Box Box 3
English-Nepali Dictionary, from material collected by R[obert] Kilgour, revised and arranged by H.C. Duncan, with the assistance of G.P. Pradhan. Darjeeling: Government Branch Press, 1923.
Box Box 12
Tea Districts Labour Association Language Hand-Book Nepali. Printed for private circulation only. Calcutta: Begg Dunlop & Co.; printed by P. A. Bonardi at the Catholic Orphan Press, 1927.
Box Box 76
A Comparative and Etymological Dictionary of the Nepali Language, by Ralph Lilley Turner. London: Kegan Paul Trench, Trubner & Co., 1931.
Box Box 73
Colloquial Nepali, by G.G. Rogers. Calcutta: Thacker Spink, 1950.
Box Box 61
Dictionary of Roman Gurhkali and English, by D[uncan] C. Forbes. Singapore: Published by the Author, 1955.
Box Box 61
Basic Gurkhali Dictionary (Roman Script), by M. Meerendonk. N.p.[Malaya?]: [published by the author], 1960.
Box Box 55
Nepali-English Dictionary, by Gabriel Rana. Darjeeling: Shyam Brothers, 1968.
Box Box 48
Nepalsko-russkii slovar. 38 000 slov, by I[zrail] S[avelevich] Rabinovich. Moscow: "Sov. entsiklopediia," 1968.
Box Box 64
Nepali-English Dictionary (with pronunciation in Roman Nepali), compiled by Chandra Lal Singh & Matshyandra Lal Singh. Kathmandu: Educational Enterprise, Ltd., 1983.
Box Box 61
Nepali Vocabulary [With an Introduction to the Nepali Language] [English-Roman-Nepali], by Dinesh Shrestha 'Ashrit'. Kathmandu: Rajani Prakashan, 1986.
Box Box 64
Ajanta's Comprehensive Dictionary English-English-Nepali (comprising explanatory illustrations) with Characteristic Meanings, along with Explanations mostly viewed in English, English and Nepali Sense as well commonly used basis important phrases, idioms and abbreviations, edited by K.L. Karmacharya & P.R. Vaidya. Delhi: Ajanta Prakashan, n.d.
Box Box 15
A Dictionary of Classical Newari, by Hans Jørgensen. Copenhagen: Levin & Munksgaard, 1936.
Box Box 78
Newari-English Dictionary: Modern Language of Kathmandu Valley, by Thakur Lal Manandhar. Dehli: Agam Kala Prakashan, 1986.
Box Box 24
A Concise Dictionary Newar-English, by S[resthacharya] Iswaranand. Kathmandu, Nepal: Pilgrims Book House, 1995.
Box Box 75
Journal of an exploring tour beyond the Rocky Mountains, under the direction of the A.B.C.F.M. performed in the years 1835, '36 containing a description of the geography, geology, climate, and productions; and the number, manners, and customs of naives. With a map of the Oregon Territory, by Samuel Parker [1779-1866]. Ithaca, N.Y.: Published by the author; Mack, Andrus & Woodruff, printers, 1838.
Box Box 62
A Dictionary of the Numipu or Nez Perce language, by a missionary of the Society of Jesus in the Rocky Mountains. Part I English-Nez Perce [no further parts issued], [by Father Anthony Morvillo, S.J.] N.p.: St. Ignatius Mission Print, Montana, 1895.
Box Box 35
Nez Perce dictionary, by Haruo Aoki. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1994.
Box Box 29
Wörterbuch der Priestersprache der Ngaju-Dayak: (Bahasa Sangiang--Ngaju-Dayakisch--Bahasa Indonesia--Deutsch), by Martin Baier [1934- ], August Hardeland [1814-1891] & Hans Scharer [1904-1947]. Dordrecht, Holland; Providence, U.S.A.: Foris Publications, 1987.
Box Box 29
Series:
NGALOOMA
Scope and Contents: see NGARLUMA
Box Box 61
Ngandi grammar, texts, and dictionary, by Jeffrey Heath. Canberra: Australian Institute of Aboriginal Studies, 1978.
Box Box 4
Ngarinjin-English Dictionary. Volume I. A-I., by H.H.C. Coate and A.P. Elkin. Sydney: University of Sydney, 1974.
Box Box 36
A Partial Vocabulary of the Ngalooma Aboriginal Tribe, by Harold Aubrey Hall, with concordance and commentary by C.G. von Brandenstein. Canberra: Australian Institute of Aboriginal Studies, 1971.
Box Box 67
Vocabulary of the Ngarrugu Tribe N.S.W., by R.H. Mathews. Original printed pale orange stapled wrapprs, lettered and decorated in black. Pp. 335-342 (offprint from the Journal and Proceedings of the Royal Society of N.S. Wales, Vol. XLII, [Sydney, 1908]). 8/10/97. A$20 (=$12.50). Berkelouw.
Box Box 6
Vocabulaire Français-Ngbaka, by Védaste Maes. Tervuren, Belgium: Musée Royal de l'Afrique Centrale, 1968.
Box Box 1
Vocabulaire français-gmbwaga-gbanziri-monjombo, precedé d'éléments de grammaire, by J. Calloc'h. Paris: Paul Geuthner, 1911.
Box Box 1
Series:
NGGELA
Scope and Contents: see GELA
Box Box 74
A Dictionary of Ngizim, by Russell G. Schuh. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1981.
Box Box 28
Ngombe-Nederlands-Frans woordenboek. Dictionnaire ngombe-neerlandais-francais, by N. Rood. Tervuren, Belgium: [Koninklijk Museum van Belgisch-Congo], 1958.
Box Box 19
The Yay Language. Glossary, Texts, and Translations, ed. by Thomas John Hudak. Ann Abor, Michigan: Center for South and Southeast Asian Studies, University of Michigan, 1991.
Box Box 19
Series:
NHARO
Scope and Contents: see NARO
Box Box 41
Niassisch-deutsches Wörterbuch. Unter Mitwirkung H. Lagemann (Lahagoe, Nias) und W. Frickenschmidt (Poeloe Tello) für den südlichen Dialekt. Mit Anhang: Zur Vergleichung des Niassischen mit anderen malaio-polynesischen Sprachen, by H[einrich] Sundermann [1849-1919]. Moers: Druck von J.W. Spaarmann, 1905.
Box Box 69
Dictionary of the Car-Nicobarese Language, by G[eorge]Whitehead. Rangoon: American Baptist Mission Press, 1925.
Series:
NICOBARESE, CENTRAL
Box Box 54
A Dictionary of the Nancowry Dialect of the Nicobarese Language; in two parts: Nicobarese-English and English-Nicobarese, by F[rederik] A[dolph] deRoepstorff, edited by Mrs. DeRoepstorff. Calcutta: Printed at the Home Department Press, 1884.
Box Box 61
A Dictionary of Nigerian Arabic, by Alan S. Kaye. Fullerton, California: California State University, Department of Linguistics, 1979.
Box Box 37
Nigerian Arabic - English Dictionary, by Alan S. Kaye. Malibu, CA: Undena Publications, 1986 [check date].
Series:
NIGERIAN LANGUAGES: POLYGLOT
Box Box 34
In the Shadow of the Bush, by P[ercy] Amaury Talbot [1877-1945]. London: William Heinemann, 1912.
Box Box 52
First American edition, 1912 (sheets of British edition): In the Shadow of the Bush, by P[ercy] Amaury Talbot [1877-1945]. New York; London: George H. Doran; William Heinemann, 1912.
Box Box 30
Specimens of languages from Southern Nigeria, by Northcote W[hitridge] Thomas[1868- ]. London: Harrison, 1914.
Box Box 43
Vocabulary of Nigerian Names of Trees Shrubs and Herbs, [by officers of the Colonial Field Service in Nigeria]. Lagos: Printed and published by the Government Printer, 1936.
Box Box 64
Nigerian Slangs: A Dictionary of slangs and unconventional English used in Nigeria, by C.N.C. Asomugha. Onitsha, Nigeria: Abic Publishers, 1981.
Box Box 64
Series:
NIRRANYERI
Scope and Contents: see WIRNAGU
Box Box 36
Nisenan Texts and Dictionary, by Hans Jørgen Uldall & William Shipley. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1966.
Box Box 36
Series:
NISKWALLI / NISQUALLI
Scope and Contents: see NATIVE AMERICAN LANGUAGES
Box Box 36
Series:
NITLAKAPAMUK
Scope and Contents: see THOMPSON
Box Box 24
Vocabulary and grammar of the Niue dialect of the Polynesian language Part I. A grammar of Niue. Part II. Niue-English. Part III. English-Niue, by Edward Tregear [1846-1931] & S[tephenson] Percy Smith [1840-1922]. Wellington: John Mackay, Government Printer, 1907.
Box Box 75
Niue Dictionary, by J. M. McEwen. Wellington, N.Z.: Department of Maori and Island Affairs, 1970.
Box Box 13
Tohi Vagahau Niue. Niue Language Dictionary. Niuean-English with English-Niuean Finderlist, ed. by Wolfgang B. Sperlich. [Honolulu]: Government of Niue & University of Hawaii, 1997.
Box Box 13
Series:
NKOLE
Scope and Contents: see NYANKOLE
Box Box 13
Series:
NKONYA
Scope and Contents: see AWUTU
Series:
NON-ARYAN LANGUAGES OF INDIA AND HIGH ASIA
Box Box 8
A Comparative Dictionary of the Non-Aryan Languages of India and High Asia, with a dissertation. Based on the Hodgson lists, official records, and mss., by W[illiam] W[ilson] Hunter. London: Trübner & Co., 1868.
Box Box 24
Noticias de Nutka, diccionario de la lengua de los Nutkeses, y Descripcion del volcan de Tuxtla, by José Mariano Moziño & Alberto Maria Carreño. Mexico: Imprenta y Fototipia de la Secretaria de fomento, 1913.
Box Box 24
Series:
NORFOLK
Scope and Contents: see PITCAIRN-NORFOLK
Series:
NORTHERN CACHAR LANGUAGES
Box Box 63
Notes on Northern Cachar, by R. Stewart, extracted from: Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, Vol. XXIV, Part VII, 1855. Calcutta: Baptist Mission Press, 1856.
Series:
NORTH STRAITS SALISH
Scope and Contents: see also CLALLAM, LUSHOOTSEED, SOUTHERN PUGET SOUND SALISH
Box Box 26
A Phonology, Morphology, and Classified Word List for the Samish Dialect of Straits Salish, by Brent D. Galloway. Hull: Canadian Museum of Civilization, 1990.
Box Box 34
Saanich, North Straits Salish Classified Word List, by Timothy Montler. Hull, Quebec: Canadian Museum of Civilization, 1991.
Box Box 2
Senga handbook: a short introduction to the Senga dialect as spoken on the lower Luangwa North-Eastern Rhodesia, A[rthur] C[ornwallis] Madan [b. 1846]. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1905. 10/98. $60.00. McBlain.
Box Box 3
Grammaire synthétique du Lontomba, suivi d'un vocabulaire, by L[ouis] [Octave] Gilliard. Brussels: Éditions de l'Essorial, 1928.
Series:
NUBIAN
Scope and Contents: see also MIDOB
Box Box 54
Die Nuba-Sprache, by Leo Reinisch. 2 vols. Vienna: Wilhelm Braumüller, 1879. Vol. I: "Erster Theil. Grammatik und Texte." Vol. II: "Zweiter Theil. Nubsich-Deutsches und Deutsch-Nubisches Wörterbuch."
Box Box 28
An English-Nubian Comparative Dictionary, by G.W. Murray. London: Oxford University Press, 1923.
Box Box 8
Dongolese Nubian. A Lexicon. Nubian-English. English-Nubian, by Charles Hubert Armbruster. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1965.
Box Box 28
Nubisches Wörterverzeichnis: nubisch-deutsches und deutsch-nubisches Wörterverzeichnis nach dem Kenzi-Material des Samuêl Alî Hisên (1863-1927), by Inge Hofmann [1939- ]. Berlin: Reimer, 1986.
Box Box 65
A Nuer-English Vocabulary, compiled by C. H. Stigand. London: Cambridge University Press, 1923.
Box Box 18
Nuer-English Dictionary, by Ray Huffman. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer (Ernst Vohsen), 1929.
Box Box 18
Series:
NUFOR
Scope and Contents: see NUMFOR
Box Box 9
Nukuoro Lexicon, by Vern Carroll & Robias Soulik. Honolulu: The University Press of Hawaii, 1973.
Box Box 5
Noemfoorsch Woordenboek. Uitgegeven onder auspicieën van Het Nieuw-Guinea Studie-Comité en Het Koninklijk Instituut voor de Taal-, Land- en Volkenkunde, te 's-Gravenhage, by J. L. and F[rans] J[ohannes] F[rederik] van Hasselt. Amsterdam: N. V. Drukkerij en Uitgeverij J. H. de Bussy, 1947.
Box Box 11
Nunggubuyu-English Dictionary: Part I A-M. Part II; N-Y, 2 vols., by E[arl] J. Hughes. Sydney: University of Sydney, 1971.
Box Box 9
Nunggubuyu dictionary, by Jeffrey Heath. Canberra: Australian Institute of Aboriginal Studies, 1982.
Box Box 65
A Grammar of the Nupe Language, together with a Vocabulary, by A.W. Banfield & J.L. Macintrye. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1915.
Box Box 21
A Concise Nuxalk-English Dictionary, by H. F. Nater. Hull, Quebec: Canadian Museum of Civilization, 1990.
Box Box 41
Nyamwesi-Wörterbuch, by Edmund Dahl. Hamburg: L. Friederichsen, 1915.
Box Box 53
"Vocabulary of English Words and Sentences translated into Nyangbo." 8 ff. Typescript with basic English vocabulary., approximately 300 words, and equivalents in Nyangbo. No author or date, but c. 1910.
Box Box 2
Dictionary of the Nyanja Language, being The Encyclopaedic Dictionary of the Mang'anja Language by the late Rev. David Clement Scott, D.d., M.A., edited and enlarged by Alexander Hetherwick. London: The Religious Tract Society, [1929].
Box Box 18
Second edition, second printing, 1951: Dictionary of the Nyanja Language, being The Encyclopaedic Dictionary of the Mang'anja Languageby the late Rev. David Clement Scott, D.d., M.A., edited and enlarged by Alexander Hetherwick. London: United Society for Christian Literature. 1951.
Box Box 17
Nyanja-English vocabulary, By Herbert Barnes, enlarged and revised by M. W. Bulley. London: Sheldon Press, 1929.
Box Box 67
English-Cinyanja Dictionary, prepared by the Zambesi Mission. London: United Society for Christian Literature, n.d. [c. 1955]. New edition.
Box Box 61
A Short English-Nyanja Vocabulary, by Thomas Price. Lusaka: Publications Bureau, n.d. [c. 1960].
Box Box 36
Manuscript Chichewa dictionary, by N. B. Njobvalema of Lilonqwe, circa 1970's.
Box Box 73
Dicionário Português-Cinyanja, by Missionários da Companhia de Jesus [the Jesuit Missionaries]. Lisbon: Junta de Investigações do Ultramar, 1964.
Box Box 2
Typescript materials for Chichewa Dictionary, no author indicated, dated 1970-71, approximately 200 legal size leaves, in several stages, with manuscript notes.
Box Box 24
Dictionary of plant names in Malawi, by Blodwen Binns and J. P. Logah. Zomba. Malawi: The Government Printer, 1972.
Box Box 61
The Student's English-Chichewa Dictionary. Blantyrs: Claim, 1986. Original wrappers. Original published under the title "English-Nyanja Dictionary" in 1972.
Series:
NYANKOLE
Scope and Contents: see also NYORO
Box Box 19
A simplified Runyankore-Rukiga-English and English-Runyankore-Rukiga dictionary: in the 1955 revised orthography with tone-markings and full entries under prefixes, compiled by C. Taylor. Kampala: The Eagle Press, East African Literture Bureau, 1959.
Box Box 65
Dicionário Ganguela-Português: Lingua falada nas regiões Cubango, Nhemba e Luchaze, Provincia de Angola, by Domingo Vieira Baião. Lisbon: Centro de Estudos Filológicos, 1940.
Box Box 66
Die Sprache der Nyiha in Ostafrika, by Joseph Busse. Berlin: Akademie-Verlag, 1960.
Box Box 15
A Lunyoro-Lunyankole-English and English-Lunyoro-Lunyankole Dictionary, by M[argaret] B[eatrice] Davis. Kampala; London: Uganda Book Shop; Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1938.
Box Box 61
Nzema Nee Nrelenza Edwebohile Buluku / Nzema-English, English-Nzema Dictionary, by P.A. Kwesi Aboagye. Kelevole: P.A. Kwesi Aboagye, 1965.
Box Box 61
Series:
OFO
Scope and Contents: see BILOXI
Box Box 63
[Cover title] A Grammar and Dictionary of the Otchipwe Language, by [Frederic] Baraga. Montreal: Beauchemin & Valois, 1879. Contains two volumes bound in one: A Theoretical and Practical Grammar of the Otchipwe Language for the use of Missionaries and other persons living among the Indians, by [Frederic] Baraga, A Second Edition, by a Missionary of the Oblates. Montreal: Beauchemin & Valois, 1878; and A Dictionary of the Otchipwe Language explained in English. Part I. English-Otchipwe, by [Frederic[ Baraga, A New Edition, by a Missionary of the Oblates. Montreal: Beauchemin & Valois, 1878.
Box Box 26
A dictionary of the Otchipwe language, explained in English. Part II. Otchipwe-English, by R. R. Bishop[Frederic] Baraga[1797-1868]. A new edition, by a missionary of the Oblates[probably Père Albert Lacombe]. Montreal: Beauchemin & Valois, 1880.
Box Box 13
A Concise dictionary of the Ojibway Indian language compiled and abridged from larger editions by English and French authors. [Cover title] A cheap and concise dictionary of the Ojibway and English languages compiled for the use of the Ojibway Indians in two parts. Part I. English and Ojibway. Toronto, Canada: International Colportage Mission, 1903.
Box Box 13
Second edition (1912): A cheap and concise dictionary in two parts Ojibway Indian langauge. Part I. English and Ojibway. Second Edition. Second Thousand. compiled and abridged from larger Editions by English and French authors. Toronto, Ontario; Rochester, NY: Internationl Colportage Mission, 1912.
Box Box 13
A cheap and concise dictionary in two parts Ojibway Indian langauge, second part Ojibway-English, compiled and abridged from larger Editions by English and French authors. Toronto, Ontario; Rochester, NY: Internationl Colportage Mission, 1907.
Box Box 26
Eastern Ojibwa. Grammatical Sketch, Text & Word List, by Leonard Bloomfield. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press, [1957].
Box Box 54
A Chippewa Language Work Book for Beginners, by Coy Eklund. S.l.: s.n., [ca. 1976].
Box Box 38
Ojibwewi-Ikikowinan: an Ojibwe Word Resource Book, ed. by John Nichols & Earl Nyholm. Saint Paul, Minnesota: Minnesota Archaeological Society, 1979.
Box Box 26
Dictionary English-Ottawa Ottawa-English, by Charles E. Dawes. Oklahoma: Charles E. Dawes, 1982. 7/99. $17.00. E-bay.
Box Box 19
A Concise Dictionary of Minnesota Ojibwe, by John D. Nichols & Earl Nyholm. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1995.
Box Box 57
Sketch of grammar of the Chippeway language: to which is added a vocabulary of some of the most common words, by John Summerfield, "alias Sahgahjew Agahbahweh.". Cazenovia [N.Y.]: J.F. Fairchild, 1834.
Box Box 19
A Dictionary of the Chippewa Indian Language from a manuscript written about one hundred years ago and never before printed. [Flint, Michigan]: Harry C[apelle]. Hill, 1943.
Series:
OKINAWAN, CENTRAL
Box Box 53
Essay in aid of a grammar and dictionary of the Luchuan language, by Basil Hall Chamberlain. Yokohama, Shanghai, Hong Kong, Singapore: Kelly & Walsh; Tokyo: Z. P. Maryua & Co.; London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner & Co., 1895.
Box Box 53
Series:
OKO-JUWOI
Scope and Contents: see ANDAMANESE LANGUAGES: POLYGLOT
Box Box 24
Ollari:a Dravidian speech, by Sudhibhushan Bhattacharya. Delhi: Manager of Publications, 1957.
Box Box 24
Series:
ONONDAGA
Scope and Contents: see under DELAWARE
Box Box 34
A study of the Leuangiua Language, by P[eter] A. Lanyon-Orgill. London: Luzac & Co., 1944.
Box Box 65
An Oriya dictionary in three volumes. Vol. I, embracing an introductory grammar, and English and Oriya dictionary, and a list of official terms. Vol. II. An Oriya dictionary, with Oriya synonyms, compiled by Amos Sutton & Bhobananund Niaya Alankar. Cuttack: Orissa Mission Press, 1841-42.
Box Box 11
The new dictionary (English-Oriya-English), by Satrughna Nath, revised by Girija Sankar Roy. Balubazar; Cuttack, [India]: Cuttack Trading Co., 1963.
Box Box 15
An English-Adiwasi Oriya Vocabulary, compiled by Uwe Gustafsson. Madras: Summer Institute of Linguistics, South Asia, 1987.
Series:
OROMO, BORANA-ARSI-GUJI
Box Box 23
A Galla-English, English-Galla dictionary, by E[dwin] C. Foot. Cambridge: the University Press, 1913.
Box Box 17
Vocabolario della lingua Oromonica (lingua Galla) in due parti, italiano-galla e galla-italiano. Seconde edizione, by E[ttore]Viterbo. Milan: Ulrico Hoepli, 1936. Second edition.
Box Box 21
Dizionario Italiano-Borana, by Bartolomeo Venturino. Marsabit, Kenya: Catholic Mission, 1976.
Box Box 13
Oromo dictionary, by Gene B. Gragg, with Terfa Kumsa and other Oromos. East Lansing, Mich.: African Studies Center, Michigan State University, in cooperation with Oriental Institute, University of Chicago, 1982.
Box Box 73
A Dictionary of the Osage Language, by Francis La Flesche. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1932.
Box Box 55
Osetinsko-russkii slovar: 20000 slov, by A.M. Kasaev. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1952.
Box Box 55
Series:
OSTYAK
Scope and Contents: see KHANTY
Box Box 62
Diccionario Castellano-Otomi - Otomi-Castellano. Itzmiquilpan, Mexico: Ediciones del Patrimonio Indigena del Valle del Mexquital y del Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1956.
Series:
OTOMI, SOUTHEASTERN
Box Box 22
El otomi de Ixtenco, by Yoland Lastra. Mexico, D.F.: Universidad Nacional Autonoma de Mexico, Instituto de Investigaciones Antropologicas, 1997.
Box Box 22
Series:
OUDJAAVANSCH
Scope and Contents: see KAWI
Box Box 22
Series:
PAKOH
Scope and Contents: see KATUIC
Box Box 2
Relation des îles Pelew, situées dans la partie occidentale de l'océan Pacifique, composée sur les journaux et les communications du capitaine Henri Wilson et de quelques-uns de ses officiers, qui, en août mil sept cent quatre-vingt-trois, y ont fait naufrage zur l'Antelope, paquebot de la Compagnie des Indes orientales, by George Keate, trans. from the English. Two vols. Paris: Le Jay; Maradan, 1788.
Box Box 15
New Palauan-English Dictionary, by Lewis S. Josephs. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press, 1990.
Box Box 67
A Dictionary of English-Palaung and Palaung-English, by Mrs. Leslie [Mary Lewis Harper] Milne. Rangoon: Government Printing and Stationery, Burma, 1931.
Box Box 67
Series:
PAME, CENTRAL
Scope and Contents: see CHICHIMECA PAME, NORTHERN
Box Box 74
Woordenlijst van de Bareë-Taal, gesproken door de Alfoeren van Centraal Celebes beoosten de rivier van Poso, benevens de Topebato-Alfoeren bewesten genoemde rivier, by Alb[ertus] C[hristiaan]Kruyt. 'S-Gravenhage: Martinus Nijhoff, 1894.
Box Box 30
Bare'e-Nederlandsch woordenboek:met Nederlandsch-Bare'e register, by N[icolaus] Adriani [1865-1926]. Leiden: E. J. Brill, 1928.
Box Box 36
Tümpisa (Panamint) Shoshone Dictionary, by Jon P. Dayley. Berkeley: University of California Press, [1989].
Box Box 36
Series:
PANJABI
Scope and Contents: see PUNJABI
Box Box 15
Dictionary. Papago / Pima-English. O'othham-Mil-gahn. English-Papago/Pima. Mil-gahn-O'othham, compiled by Dean & Lucille Saxton. Tucson, Arizona: The University of Arizona Press, 1969. Also second printing, 1977.
Box Box 23
A dictionary of Papago usage, by Madeleine Mathiot. Two vols. Bloomington, Indiana: Indiana University, 1973, 1976.
Box Box 65
Dictionary. Papago / Pima-English. O'othham-Mil-gahn. English-Papago / Pima. Mil-gahn-O'othham, by Dean Saxton, Lucille Saxton, & Susie Enos. Tucson, Arizona: The University of Arizona Press, 1995. Later printing of revised edition of 1983.
Box Box 27
Woordenlijst en samenspraak, Hollandsch-Papiamentsch-Spaansch, compiled by W.M. Hoyer. [Willmestad], Curacao: A. Bethencourt e hijos, 1918.
Box Box 23
Vocabulary and Dialogues: English - Papiamento - Dutch, compiled by W. M. Hoyer. [Willemstad], Curaçao: Hollandsche Boekhandel, 1936.
Box Box 20
"Second edition", 1948: Vocabulary and Dialogues: English / Papiamento / Dutch, compiled by W. M. Hoyer. Willemstad,Curaçao: Hollandsche Boekhandel N.V., 1948.
Box Box 23
[Third edition], 1949: A little Guide. English-Papiamento-Netheland[sic], compiled by W. M. Hoyer. Curaçao: Boekhandel Bethencourt, 1949.
Box Box 25
Eror- i omishonnan di dikshonario papiamentu-ulandes, ulandes-papiamentu, skirbi pa Mario Dijkhoff / ku koperashon di Magalis Vos de Jesus, 1980 de Walburg Pers. Korsou: Boekhandel Salas, 1981.
Box Box 29
English / Papiamentu bilingual dictionary, by Betty Ratzlaff. Bonaire, Netherlands Antilles: The TWR Dictionary Foundation, 1992.
Series:
PAPUA NEW GUINEA LANGUAGES
Scope and Contents: see also ANEITYUMESE, ASMAT, BARUYA, FASU, KATE, KILIVILA, KOARI, LONIU, MAILU, MOTU, NEO-MELANESIAN, POLICE MOTU, TOARIPI, YABEM
Box Box 57
A comparative vocabulary of the dialects of British New Guinea, by Sidney H[erbert] Ray. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1895.
Box Box 26
A dictionary of the Pukkhto or Pukshto language, in which the words are traced to their sources in the Indian and Persian languages, by H[enry] W[alter] Bellew. Lahore: Rai Sahib M. Gulab Singh, 1901.
Box Box 61
Reprint edition (1980's): A Dictionary of the Pukkhto or Puskhto Language in which the Words are Traced to their Sources in the Indian and Persian Languages, by Henry Walter Bellew. Peshawar Cantt: Saeed Book Bank, n.d. [c. 1980's].
Box Box 67
An English-Pushtu Vocabulary for Lower and Higher Standard Examinations in Pushtu, by Mirza Said Muhammad. Rawalpindi: Printed at the 'Frontier Exchange' Press, 1905.
Box Box 72
The Pakkhto idiom: a dictionary [A-L] M-Z, 2 vols., by George Waters Gilbertson, assisted by Arif Ullah, Yusufzai, Makhmud, Afridi, Ali Akbar Khan, Qandahari. Hertford: Published by the Author, 1932.
Box Box 48
Kratkii afgansko-russkii slovar. Okolo 12000 slov, by P.B. Zudin. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1950.
Box Box 47
Russko-afganskii slovar: okolo 21000 slov, by P.B. Zudin. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1955.
Box Box 48
Karmannyi russko-afganskii slovar. 7000 slov, by K[onstantin] A[leksandrovich] Lebedev. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1961.
Box Box 7
Afgansko-russkii slovar (Pushto). 50 000 slov, M[artiros] G[rigorevich] Aslanov. Moscow: Izd-vo "Sovetskaia Entsiklopediia", 1966.
Box Box 18
Pasigraphical dictionary and grammar, by Anton Bachmaier. London: Trübner, 1871 [on wrappers]; Augsburg: printed by A. Volkhart, 1870 [on title page].
Box Box 18
Series:
PAUMARÍ
Scope and Contents: see APURINÃ
Box Box 73
The Pengo Language: Grammar, Texts, and Vocabulary, by T. Burrow & S[udhibhushan] Bhattacharya. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1970.
Series:
PENNSYLVANIA DUTCH
Box Box 57
Pennsylvania German Manual, for Pronouncing, Speaking and Writing English. A Guide Book for Schools and Families. In Three Parts: Part I. Pronuncing Exercises. Part II. Pennsylvania German Reader. Part III Pennsylvania German Dictionary, by A[braham] R[easor] Horne. Kutztown, PA.: Urick & Gehring, 1875.
Box Box 64
Second, revised and enlarged edition, 1896: Pennsylvania German Manual for Pronouncing, Speaking and Writing English. Guide Book for Families and Schools. Revised and Enlarged Edition. In Four parts: Part I-English Pronunciation. Part II-Pennsylvania German Literature with English Translation. Part III-Pennsylvania German Dictionary. Part IV-English Vocabulary, by A[braham] R[easor] Horne. Allentown, Pennsylvania: National Educator Print., 1896.
Box Box 8
Third edition, second printing, 1910: Horne's Pennsylvania German Manual. How Pennsylvania German is spoken and written. For pronouncing, speaking and writing English. Third edition. Enlarged and profusely illustrated. Part I. English Pronunciation. Part II. Pennsylvania German literature, with English translation. Part III. Pennsylvania German dictionary, with grammar and spelling rules. Part IV. English vocabulary, by A[braham] R[easor] Horne. Allentown, Pennsylvania: T. K. Horne, 1910. Second printing of third (1905) edition.
Box Box 2
Common sense Pennsylvania German dictionary containing nearly all the Pennsylvania German words in common use, with their English equivalents, by James C. Lins. Kempton, Pa.: James C. Lins, 1887.
Box Box 7
Glossary of 6167 English Words and Expressions and their Berks County Pennsylvania Dutch Equivalents, by Howard Snader. Reading, Pennsylvania: Reading Eagle Press, 1948.
Box Box 65
Pennsylvania Dutch Dictionary and Handbook with special emphasis on the dialect that was, and is, spoken in York County, Pennsylvania. [English-Pennsylvania Dutch], by Edwin R. Danner. York, PA: William Penn Senior High School and Atreus Wanner Vocational School, 1951.
Box Box 15
The English Pennsylvania Dutch dictionary. A glossary of English words and expressions with their Pennsylvania Dutch equivalents together with an illustrated compilation of many unique and fascinating facets of the wonderful Pennsylvania Dutch people and their historical background, including their culture and customs, arts and crafts, folklore and folkways, by Howard Snader. Reading, Pa.: Culinary Arts Press, c. 1965.
Box Box 15
The Pennsylvania German dialect. Pennsylvania German-English dictionary and Pennsylvania German proverbs and sayings, and short conversations, with English translations. Also the life story of a Pennsylvania German boy growing up, and what life is like as an: Old Order Mennonite, by Allan M. Buehler. [Cambridge, Ontario: The Author, 1977].
Box Box 15
Series:
PENNSYLVANIA GERMAN
Scope and Contents: see PENNSYLVANIA DUTCH
Series:
PERSIAN DIALECTS: BAKHTIARI, BADAKHSHANI, HAWRAMI, JAWSHAQAN, JUDEO-PERSIAN; MADAGLASHTI, MEIME, TABARISTAN, VELATRU
Box Box 66
The Phonology of the Bakhtiari, Badakhshani, and Madaglashti Dialects of Modern Persian, with Vocabularies, by D[avid] L[ockhart] R[obinson] Lorimer. London: Royal Asiatic Society, 1922.
Box Box 13
Dialectes des Israélites de Hamadan et d'Ispahan et dialecte de Baba Tahir, by Roubène Abrahamian. Paris: Adrien-Masionneuve, 1936.
Box Box 31
Vazhename-ye Tabari, by Sadegh Kiya. Tehran: n.p., 1312 [1937].
Box Box 9
Three Persian Dialects, by Ann K.S. Lambton. London: The Royal Asiatic Society, 1938.
Box Box 6
The Dialect of Awroman (Hawraman-I Luhon). Grammatical sketch, texts, and vocabulary, by D. N. MacKenzie. Copenhagen: Ejnar Munksgaard, 1966.
Box Box 6
Notes on Phalãra, an unknown Dardic language of Chitral, by Georg Morgenstierne. Oslo: Jacob Dybwad, 1941.
Box Box 2
Die Sprache von Sau in Ostafghanistan. Beitr¨a;ge zur Kenntnis des Dardischen Phulãra, by Georg Buddruss. Munich: Kitzinger in Kommission, 1967.
Series:
PHILIPPINE LANGUAGES
Box Box 14
A Composite Vocabulary of Philippine Languages, by The Institute of National Language. Manila: Institute of National Language, 1953.
Box Box 20
Philippine Minor Languagues: Word Lists and Phonologies, ed. by Lawrence A[ndrew] Reid. [Honoluly]: University of Hawaii Press, 1971.
Box Box 59
Manuel Glotológico del Idioma Wo'tiheh, by Pedro J[uan] Krisologo B. Caracas: Centro de Lenguas Indigenas, Instituto de Investigaciones Historicas, Universidad Catolica "Andres Bello", 1976.
Box Box 37
Wes-Kos [Pidgin-English] Glossary: [Preliminary copy] English >Pidgin-English, compiled and edited by G. D. Schneider. Mimeographed manuscript prepared for the Peace Corps, dated Summer 1965.
Box Box 37
Wes-Kos [Pidgin-English] proverbs, idioms, names, compiled by Gilbert D. Schneider. [Athens, Ohio: Center for International Studies], 1965.
Box Box 40
[Cover title] An Introduction to West African Pidgin English, by David [J.] Dwyer, supervised by Davis Smith. [East Lansing]: Produced for the United States Peace Corps by the African Studies Center, Michigan State University, n.d. [1967].
Series:
PIDGINS
Scope and Contents: see also AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL PIDGIN; BISLAMA; CHINESE PIDGIN ENGLISH; CHINOOK JARGON; MOBILIAN TRADE LANGUAGE; NEO-MELANESIAN; PIDGIN, CAMEROON; SOUTH SEA ISLANDS PIDGIN; WEST INDIAN ENGLISH
Box Box 13
Pidgin English, by Edgar Sheppard Sayer. Toronto, Canada: E. S. Sayer, 1944.
Box Box 66
Pidgin phrasebook, Trevor Balzer. 1999 2nd ed.
Box Box 66
Series:
PILIPINO
Scope and Contents: see TAGALOG
Series:
PIMA BAJO, SONORA
Box Box 21
The Pima Bajo of Central Sonora, Mexico, by Campbell W. Pennington. Salt Lake City: University of Utah Press, [1980]. 2 vols.
Box Box 1
Nawat-English Toponymic Lexicon, by Arden E. M. du Boi. San José, Costa Rica: Editorial Texto, 1976.
Box Box 20
The Pipil Language of El Salvador, by Lyle Campbell. Berlin, New York, Amsterdam: Mouton Publishers, [1985].
Box Box 22
The Pitcairnese language, by A[lan] S[trode] C[ampbell] Ross. London: Andre Deutsch, 1964.
Box Box 18
A Dictionary of Norfolk Words and Usages, compiled by Beryl Nobbs. [Norfolk Island: Beryl Nobbs, printed by Photopress International, 1986].
Box Box 15
Second edition (1992): A Dictionary of Norfolk Words and Usages plus English-Norfolk Appendix. Second edition. [Norfolk Island: Beryl Nobbs, printed by Photopress International, 1992].
Series:
PLAINS INDIAN SIGN LANGUAGE
Box Box 76
"Sign Language among North American Indians compared with that among other peoples and deaf-mutes," by Garrick Mallery, in: First Annual Report of the Bureau of American Ethnology to the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, 1879-'80. Washington: Government Printing Office, 1881, pp. 263-552.
Box Box 71
The Indian sign language, with brief explanatory notes of the gestures taught deaf-mutes in our institutions for their instruction and a description of some of the peculiar laws, customs, myths, superstitions, ways of living, code of peace and war signals of our aborigines, by W[illiam] P[hilo] Clark [1845?-1884]. Philadelphia: L.R. Hamersly & Co., 1885.
Box Box 31
Universal Indian sign language of the Plains Indians of North America together with a dictionary of synonyms covering the basic words represented; also, a codification of pictographic symbols of the Ojibway and Sioux nations, William Tomkins. San Diego, Calif.: William Tomkins, 1926.
Box Box 5
[Cover title] How to talk in the Indian sign language, by Buffalo Child Long Lance [1890-1932]. Akron, Ohio: B.F. Goodrich Rubber Co., 1930.
Box Box 24
How: sign talk in pictures, by Iron Eyes Cody [1904- ] assisted by Ye-Was, illustrated by Clarence Ellsworth, posed by Iron Eyes and Ye-Was. Cover title: How: Indian Sign Talk in Pictures. Hollywood, Calif.: Published as a Boelter Classic by Homer H. Boelter Lithography, 1952.
Box Box 24
Second, enlarged and revised edition (1970): Indian talk: hand signals of the American Indians, by Iron Eyes Cody, illustrated by Ken Mansker, Flathead Indian Artist, and posed by Iron Eyes, Yeawas, Robert and Arthur. Healdsburg, Calif.: Naturegraph Publishers, 1970.
Box Box 15
[Cover title] Indian Dictionary, by M[argaret] M. Browne. Casper, Wyoming: S.E. Boyer, n.d.
Box Box 15
Series:
POCHUTLA
Scope and Contents: see ZAPOTECO, EASTERN POCHUTLA; ZAPOTECO, WESTERN POCHUTLA
Series:
POKOMAM, EASTERN
Scope and Contents: see also QUICHÉ
Box Box 27
Diccionario pocomam y español, edited by Carolina de McArthur & Ricardo McArthur. [Guatemala]: Instituto Lingüístico de Verano de Centroamérica, 1995.
Box Box 71
Brief English-Motuan Vocabulary for Medical Personnel, compiled by Lieut. J. N. Walshe. [New Guinea: N[ew] G[uinea] F[orces?] Printing Unit, c. 1942].
Box Box 55
A Primer of Police Motu, by Percy Chatterton. Port Moresby: Department of Education [printed by The Cairns Post Pty. Ltd, Cairns, Australia], 1950.
Box Box 71
Revised edition, post-1962: A Primer of Police Motu, by Percy Chatterton. Sydney: Pacific Publications, n.d. [ca. 1962].
Box Box 55
New, renamed edition, 1972: Hiri Motu (Police Motu), by Percy Chatterton. S.l.: [U.F.M Press, 1972].
Box Box 20
A Dictionary of Police Motu, [edited by Richard Brett, Raymond Brown, Ruth Brown & Velma Foreman]. [Port Moresby: Institute of Summer Linguistics, 1962].
Box Box 16
Police Motu. An introduction to the Trade Language of Papua (New Guinea) for Anthropologists and other fieldworkers, edited by S[tephen] A[dolphe] Wurm & J. B. Harris. Canberra: Linguistic Circle of Canberra, 1963.
Box Box 17
The Rhyming List of 2,1000 Common English Words with Explanations in Police Motu, by N. Gore. [Papua New Guinea]: n.p., n.d. [c. 1965?].
Box Box 36
Opuscula. Essays chiefly philological and ethnographical, by Robert Gordon Latham [1812-1888]. [London]; Edinburgh; Leipzig: Williams & Norgate, 14 Henrietta Street, Covent Garden, London and 20 South Frederick Street, Edinburgh. Leipzig, R. Hartmann, (Leipzig printed by B.G. Teubner), 1860.
Series:
POPOLOCA DE SAN JUAN ATZINGO
Box Box 25
Diccionario popoloca de San Juan Ataingo Puebla, by Jeanne Austin Krumholz, Marjorie Kalstrom Dolson & Miguel Hernandez Ayuso. Sucursal en Tucson, Az, E.U.A.: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1995.
Box Box 25
Diccionario popoluca de Oluta: popoluca-espanol, espanol-popoluca, by Lawrence E. Clark [1929- ]. Mexico, D.F.: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1981.
Box Box 35
Proto-Minahasan. Phonology, Morphology and Wordlist, by J[ames] N. Sneddon. Canberra: Department of Linguistics, Research School of Pacific Studies, Australian National University, 1978.
Box Box 11
Proto-Polynesian word list I, by David S. Walsh. Auckland: Linguistic Society of New Zealand, 1966.
Box Box 71
Manual o vocabulario de la lengua pampa y del estilo familiar para el uso de los jefes y oficiales del ejercito, y de las familias a cuyo cargo estan los indigenas, Federico Barbara [1828-1893]. Buenos Aires: Imprenta y Liberia de Mayo, 1879.
Box Box 29
Gramatica y Diccionario de la lengua pampa (pamparanquel-araucano) de Juan Manuel [Jose Domingo Ortiz] de Rosas, ed. by Oscar R. Suarez Caviglia & Enrique Stieben. Buenos Aires: Editorial Albatros, 1947.
Box Box 29
Series:
PUGET SALISH
Scope and Contents: see LUSHOOTSEED
Box Box 29
Series:
PUKKHTO / PUKSHTO
Scope and Contents: see PASHTO
Box Box 22
A dictionary, English and Punjabee, outlines of grammar, also dialogues, English and Punjabee, with grammar and explanatory notes, by Captain [Samuel Cross] Starkey. Calcutta: printed by d'Rozario and Co., 1849.
Box Box 15
An English-Panjabi Vocabulary of 5800 Words, by T[homas] Grahame Bailey. Calcutta: printed at the Baptist Mission Press, and published by the author, 1919.
Box Box 48
Pandzhabsko-russkii slovar. oloko 35000 slov, by Izrail Savelevich Rabinovich. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1961.
Box Box 3
Arte de la lengua tarasca, dispuesto con nuevo estilo y claridad por el r. p. m. fr. Diego Basalenque[1577-1651]... año de 1714. Cover title: Arte del idioma tarasco por el P. Fr. Diego Basalenque año de 1714. Mexico City: Oficina tip. de la Secretaria de fomento. 1886.
Box Box 20
Diccionario de la lengua phorhepecha: español-phorhepecha, phorhepecha-español, by Pablo Velásquez Gallardo. Mexico City: Fondo de Cultura Economica, 1978. Also a second copy, reprinted 1988.
Box Box 20
Series:
PUSHTU
Scope and Contents: see PASHTO
Box Box 55
Die Kechua-Sprache, by J[ohann] J[akob] v[on] Tschudi. Vienna: Kaiserliche-königliche Hof- und Staatsdruckerei, 1853. 2 volumes [I. & II. Abteilung: Sprachlehre und Sprachproben; III. Abteilung: Wörterbuch]
Box Box 1
Leyendas de los indios quichuas, by Filiberto de Oliveira Cezar [1856-1910]. Buenos Aires: Imp. de R. Puig, 1892.
Box Box 29
Vocabularies of the general language of the Incas of Peru or Runa simi (called Quichua by the Spanish grammarians), by Sir Clements [Robert] Markham [1830-1916]. London : Williams & Norgate, 1908.
Box Box 24
Vocabulario trilingue: español-queshwa (Quechua)-ingles: con un apendice de aforismos en lengua inkayka, by Faustino Espinoza Navarro. Cuzco: H.G. Rozas, 1956.
Box Box 34
Gramatica y diccionario qechua, by A. Orlando Vela F. [Lima]: Ediciones Studium, [1965].
Box Box 25
Vocabulario quechua del Pastaza, by Peter Landerman. Yarinacocha, Peru: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1973.
Box Box 23
Diccionario español-quechua, by Francisco [Javier] Carranza [Romero]. Seoul: Korea: Instituto de Estudios Iberoamericanos, Universidad Nacional de Seúl, 1992.
Box Box 66
Diccionario básico del idioma aymara /Gómez Bacarreza, Donato. La Paz : Instituto de Estudios Bolivianos, 1999.
Series:
QUECHUA, HUANUCO, HUALLAGA
Box Box 12
Rimaycuna: quechua de Huanuco: diccionario del quechua del Huallaga, con indices castellano e ingles, by David John Weber et al. Lima, Peru: Instituto Lingüistico de Verano, 1998.
Box Box 14
Diccionario Quiché-Español, by Juan de Leon. Guatemala: [Editorial Landivar], 1954.
Box Box 15
Diccionario Castellano-Quiché y Voces Castellano-Pocomam, by Celso Narciso Teletor. Guatemala City: [Tipografía NacIonal], 1959.
Box Box 30
Quiche-English dictionary, by Munro S. Edmonson. New Orleans: Middle American Research Institute, Tulane University, 1965. 8/7/99. $60. Ethnographic Arts Publications.
Box Box 12
Diccionario del idioma k'iche', by Pedro Florentino Ajpacaja Tum et al. Antigua Guatemala: Proyecto Lingüistico Francisco Marroquin, 1996.
Box Box 31
An English-Rade Vocabulary, by Soren Egerod. Stockholm: Museum of Far Eastern Antiquities, 1978.
Box Box 39
A Rhade-English Dictionary with English-Rhade Finderlist, by J[ames] A. Tharp & Y-Bham Buon-Ya. Canberra: Department of Linguistics, Research School of Pacific Studies, The Australian National University, 1980.
Box Box 39
Series:
RALUANA
Scope and Contents: see KAUANA
Box Box 39
Vokabular der Rama-Sprache nebst grammatischem Abriss, by Walter Lehmann [1878- ]. Munich: Verlag der Bayerischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 1914.
Box Box 29
Diccionario y gramatica de la lengua de la Isla de Pascua: pascuense-castellano, castellano-pascuense, by Jordi Fuentes. [Santiago de Chile]: Editorial Andres Bello, 1960. 5/21/99. $100. Libros Latinos.
Box Box 54
Vocabulary of the Mangaian Language, F[rederick] W[illiam] Christian. Honolulu: Bernice P. Bishop Museum, 1924.
Box Box 9
A Dictionary of the Maori Language of Rarotonga, manuscript by Stephen Savage. Wellington, N.Z.: Department of Island Territory, 1962.
Box Box 62
Cook Islands Maori Dictionary, by Jasper Buse & Raututi Taringa, ed. By Bruce Biggs & Rangi Moeka'a. Canberra: The Australian National University, 1996.
Series:
RENNELLESE SIGN LANGUAGE
Box Box 1
A lexicon of signs from a Polynesian outliner [sic] island: a description af 217 signs as developed and used by Kagobai, the only deaf-mute of Rennell Island, by Rolf Kuschel. Copenhagen: Universitet, Psykologisk Laboratorium (Akademisk Forlag), 1974.
Series:
RESIGARO
Scope and Contents: see also CHICHIMECA PAME, NORTHERN
Box Box 5
Vocabulario resígaro, by Trevor R. Allin. [Lima]; [Yarinacocha, Peru]: Ministerio de Educación ; Instituto Lingüístico de Verano, 1979.
Series:
RÉUNION CREOLE FRENCH
Box Box 21
P'tit glossaire: le piment des mots creoles, by Jean Albany. Paris: J. Albany, 1974.
Box Box 24
Dictionnaire creole reunionnais/francais, by Daniel Baggioni..[Reunion]: Université de la Réunion, Faculté des lettres et sciences humaines, 1990. Second, enlarged edition. 1998.
Box Box 24
Series:
RHADE
Scope and Contents: see RADE
Box Box 24
Series:
RIF
Scope and Contents: see TARIFIT
Series:
ROMANI (GYPSY) LANGUAGES
Box Box 62
Zigeuner-Arabisch. Wortschatz und Grammatik der arabischen Bestandteile in den morgenl¨a;ndischen Zigeunersprachen nebst einer Einleitung über das arabische Rotw¨a;lsch und die Namen der morgenl¨a;ndischen Zigeuner, by Enno Littmann. Bonn-Leipzig: Kurt Schroeder Verlag, 1920.
Box Box 4
Études sur les Tchinghianés; ou, Bohémiens de l'Empire ottoman, by Alexandre G. Paspati [ Alexandros Georgiou Paspates]. Constantinople: Imprimérie Antoine Koroméla, 1870.
Box Box 66
Romani and Dard. George Fraser Black. English Book 6 p. New York, Public library, 1916.
Box Box 11
A glossary of Greek Romany as spoken in Agia Varvara (Athens), by Gordon M. Messing. Columbus, Ohio: Slavica Publishers, 1988.
Box Box 16Z
Gypsy-English / English-Gypsy Concise Dictionary, by Atanas Slavov. New York: Hippocrene Books, 1999. 9/15/99. $17.95. Powell's.
Box Box 4
Wörterbuch des Zigeunerdialektes von Zakopane, mit Einleitung, Erg¨a;nzungen und Anmerkungen von Edward Klich = Stownik Cyganow z Zakopanego, 2 wstepem, uzupetnieniami i uwagami E. Klicha, by Jan Michat Rozwadowski. Krakow: Naktadem Polskiej Akademiji Umiejetnosci, 1936.
Series:
ROMANI, CARPATHIAN
Box Box 72
Romani cib, das ist: Grammatik und worterbuch der zigeuner sprache, nebst einigen fabeln in derselben. Dazu als Anhang die Hantyrka, oder die "echische Diebessprache, by Anton Jaroslaw Puchmayer [1769-1820]. Prague: Gedruckt in der Fürst-erzbischöflichen Buchdruckerey, 1821. 4/4/00. DM 680 (=$331). Versandantiquariat Lechler.
Box Box 11
Wörterbuch des dialekts der deutschen Zigeuner, by Rodolf von Sowa [1853-1900]. Leipzig: Brockhaus, 1898.
Box Box 24
Einführung in die mitteleurop¨a;ische Zigeunersprache, mit Wörterverzeichnis, by Eduard Hrkal. Leipzig: Otto Harrassowitz, 1940.
Box Box 12
"Bosnian Romani: Vocabulary," by Rade Uhlik, ed. with annotations and etymologies by Frederick George Ackerley, in: Journal of the Gypsy Lore Society, Third Series, Vol. XXI, Parts 1-2, January-April, 1942, pp. 24-55. AND "Bosnian Romani: Vocabulary," continuation in Journal of the Gypsy Lore Society, Third Series, Vol. XXI, Parts 3-4, July-October, 1942, pp. 110-141.
Box Box 55
Srpskohrvaatsko-Ciganski Recnik (Romane Alava), by Ráde Uhlik. Sarajevo: Svjetlost, 1947.
Box Box 14
Wörterbuch Romani-Deutsch-Englisch für den südosteurop¨a;ischen Raum. Mit einer Grammatik der Dialektvarianten, by Norbert Boretzky & Birgit Igla. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz Verlag, 1994.
Box Box 24
The Zincali; or, An account of the gypsies of Spain. With an original collection of their songs and poetry, and a copious dictionary of their language, by George [Henry] Borrow. London: John Murray, 1841.
Box Box 24
First American edition, 1842: The Zincali; or, An account of the gypsies of Spain. With an original collection of their songs and poetry, by George [Henry] Borrow. New York: Wiley and Putnam, 1842. Two volumes in one.
Box Box 12
Les Tsiganes: histoire, ethnographie, linguistique, grammaire, dictionnaire, by C. J. Popp Serboianu. Paris: Payot, 1930.
Box Box 12
"Vulcanius' Romani Vocabulary," in: Journal of the Gypsy Lore Society, Third Series, Vol. IX, Part 1.
Box Box 16
Dictionnaire tsigane-français: dialecte kalderash, by Georges Calvet. Paris: L'Asiatheque, 1993.
Box Box 21
Dicionários Xironga-Português e Português-Xironga, precedidos de certas instruções necessárias à formação de grande número de palavras, by José Luis Quintão. Lisbon: Agéncia geral das Colóniasm, Divisão de Publicaçõs e Biblioteca, 1951.
Box Box 73
Dicionário Ronga-Português, by Rodrigo de Sá Nogueira. Lisbon: Junta de Investigações do Ultramar, 1960.
Box Box 73
Series:
ROSHAN DIALECT
Scope and Contents: see SHUGNI
Series:
ROTI
Scope and Contents: see also MALAY
Box Box 6
Rottineesch-Hollandsch Woordenboek, by J[ohann] C[hristoph] G[erhard] Jonker. Leiden: E. J. Brill, 1908.
Box Box 56
Rotuman Grammar and Dictionary comprising Rotuman phonetics and grammar and a Rotuman-English dictionary, C[lerk] Maxwell Churchward. [Sydney]: Printed by the Australasian Medical Publishing Company limited for the Methodist Church of Australasia, Department of Overseas Missions, 1940.
Box Box 57
A Roviana and English dictionary with English-Roviana index and list of Natural history objects, by J. H. L[awry] Waterhouse. Guadalcanar, British Solomon Islands: Printed at the Melanesian Mission Press, 1928.
Box Box 57
Series:
RUANDA
Scope and Contents: see KIVU PGYMY
Box Box 57
Series:
RUSHAN
Scope and Contents: see SHUGHNI
Box Box 57
Series:
RWANDA
Scope and Contents: see also HAYA
Box Box 71
Dictionary and Grammar of the Language of Sa'a and Ulawa, Solomon Islands, by Walter G[eorge] Givens. Washington, D.C.: Carnegie Institution, 1918.
Box Box 4
William J. Gedney's The Saek Language: Glossaries, Texts, and Translations, edited by Thomas John Hudak. Ann Arbor, Michigan: The University of Michigan, Center for South and Southeast Asian Studies, 1993.
Box Box 4
Series:
SAGADA IGOROT
Scope and Contents: see IGOROT
Box Box 13
Die Saho-Sprache, Erster Band. Texte der Saho-Sprache. Zweiter Band. Wörterbuch der Saho-Sprache, by Leo Reinisch [1832-1919]. Vienna: Alfred Hölder, 1889, 1890. 2 vols.
Box Box 28
Sahu-Indonesian-English dictionary and Sahu grammar sketch, by L[eontien] E. Visser & C.L.Voorhoeve. Dordrecht, Holland ; Providence, U.S.A.: Foris Publications, 1987.
Box Box 41
Saka Studies, by Sten Konow. Oslo: Oslo Ethnografiske Museum, 1932.
Series:
SALINAN
Scope and Contents: see also COSTANOAN
Box Box 46
A Vocabulary of the language of San Antonio Mission, California, by Bonaventure Sitjar. New York: Cramoisy Press, 1861.
Box Box 16
[Cover title] The Language of the Salinan Indians, by J[ohn] Alden Mason. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1918.
Box Box 16
Series:
SALISH
Scope and Contents: see NORTH STRAITS SALISH
Box Box 2
A Grammar and Dictionary of the Samoan Language, by George Pratt. London: Trübner & Co., 1878. Second edition.
Box Box 2
Third edition, revised, 1893: A Grammar and Dictionary of the Samoan Language, with English and Samoan Vocabulary, by George Pratt. [London]: London Missionary Society, 1893.
Box Box 67
Fourth edition, enlarged and revised, 1911: Pratt's Grammar and Dictionary of the Samoan Language. Fourth edition, enlarged and revised, by J. E. Newell. Malua, Samoa: London Missionary Society, 1911.
Box Box 18
Dictionnaire Samoa-Français-Anglais et Français-Samoa-Anglais précédé d'une grammaire de la langue Samoa, by L. Violette. Paris: Maisonneuve, 1879.
Box Box 57
Grammatik der Samoanischen Sprache nebst Lesestücken und Wörterbuch, by H. Neffgen. Vienna & Leipzig: A. Hartleben's Verlag, [1903].
Box Box 67
English translation, 1918: Grammar and Vocabulary of the Samoan Language Together with Remarks on some of the Points of Similarity between the Samoan and Tahitian and Maori Languages, by H. Neffgen, trans. from the German by Arnold B. Stock. London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner & Co., 1918.
Box Box 67
English and Samoan Vocabulary, (O le Faasologaupu Peritania ua Faa-Samoaina.) Being Part III. Of the Grammar and Dictionary of the Samoan Language, by J[ames] E[dward]Newell. Malua, Samoa: London Missionary Society, 1905. 4th ed.
Box Boxes 1 and 3
Samoan Dictionary: Samoan-English. English-Samoan, by G[eorge] B[ertram] Milner. London: Oxford University Press, 1966.
Box Box 17
Interim edition, published in Manila, 1978: Samoan Dictionary: Samoan-English. English-Samoan, by G[eorge] B[ertram] Milner. Manila: Samoan Free Press, 1978. Bibliophile.
Box Box 21
A Lexicon of Foreign Loan-Words in the Samoan Language, by Horst Cain. Cologne, Vienna: Böhlau Verlag, 1986.
Series:
SAMOYED LANGUAGES
Box Box 28
Samojedische Wörterverzeichnisse, compiled and newly edited by Kai Donner [1888-1935]. Helsinki: Suomalais-ugrilaisnen seura, 1932.
Box Box 28
Series:
SAN ANTONIO MISSION
Scope and Contents: see SALINAN
Box Box 35
Die Sandawe: linguistisches und ethnographisches Material aus Deutsch-Ostafrika, by Otto Dempwolff. Hamburg: L. Friederichsen, 1916.
Box Box 53
"Vocabulary of English Words and Sentences Translated into Fiomi, Tatoga, Sandawi." Manuscript wordlist entered on 20 p. printed form, c. 1910.
Box Box 27
A classified vocabulary of the Sandawe language, by Ryohei Kagaya. Tokyo: Institute for the Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa, Tokyo University of Foreign Studies (ILCAA), 1993.
Box Box 33
Blanco Woordenlyst, uitgegeven op last der Regeering van Ned. Ind. ten behoeve van Taalvorschers in den Ned. Ind. Arch. Tagulandangsch. N.p., n.d. [ca. 1950's].
Box Box 34
Sangirees-Nederlands woordenboek met Nederlands-Sangirees register, by K. G. F. Steller. 's-Gravenhage: Martin Nijhoff, 1959.
Series:
SANGO
Scope and Contents: see also CONGO LANGUAGES, POLYGLOT
Box Box 55
Vocabulaire Français-Sango et Sango-Français, Langue commerciale de l'Oubangui-Chari, précédé d'un abrége grammatical, by J. Calloc'h. Paris: Librairie Paul Geuthner, 1911.
Box Box 2
Sango, langue vehiculaire de l'Oubangui-Chari, by [Charles] Tisserant. Edited by the Vicariat Apostolique de Bangui. Issy-Les Moulineux (Seine): Les Presses missionnaires, 1950.
Box Box 42
A Dictionary of Sango, Charles R[ussell] Taber. Hartford, Ct: Hartford Seminary Foundation, 1965.
Box Box 73
A Grammar of Sango, by William J. Samarin. The Hague: Mouton & Co., 1967.
Box Box 19
Dictionnaire Sango-Français. Bàkàrí Sango-Fàránzì et Lexique Français-Sango. Kεtε Bàkàrí Fàránzì-Sango, by Luc Bouquiaux. Paris: SELAF, 1978.
Box Box 40
A Santal Dictionary, by P[aul] O[laf] Bodding. Oslo: I Kommisjon Hos Jacob Dybwad, 1929-1936. 5 vols.
Box Box 10
Vocabulaire du patois arabe tchadien ou "tourkou" et des dialectes sara-madjinngaye et sara-m'baye (s.-o. du Tchad), suivi de conversations et d'un essai de classification des tribus saras, les superstitions locales, les coutumes et les pratiques de la medicine indigene dans la race sara, by Gaston Muraz [1887- ]. Paris, Limoges, Nancy: Charles-Lavauzelle, n.d. [ca. 1928].
Box Box 29
Beknopt Sasaksch-Nederlandsch woordenboek, by R[oelof] Goris [1898-1965]. Singaradja (Bali): Kirtya Liefrinck-van der Tuuk, 1938.
Box Box 29
Series:
SAVARA
Scope and Contents: see SAVARA
Box Box 29
Series:
SAVI
Scope and Contents: see PHALURA
Box Box 20
Sawuneesche Woordenlijst, by J. K. Wijngaarden. 's-Gravenhage: Martinus Nijhoff, 1896.
Box Box 20
Series:
SEA DAYAK
Scope and Contents: see DAYAK
Series:
SEA ISLANDS CREOLE ENGLISH
Box Box 24
The Black Border. Gullah Stories of the Carolina Coast (With a Glossary), by Ambrose E[lliott] Gonzales. Columbia, S.C.: The State Company, 1922.
Box Box 27
Gulluh fuh oonuh (Gullah for you). A Guide to the Gullah Language, by Virginia Mixson Geraty. Orangeburg, South Carolina: Sandlapper Publishing Co., 1997.
Box Box 57
Ngu'-Vu'ng Sedang. Sedang Vocabulary, by Kenneth D. Smith. Saigon: Bô Giáo-Duc, 1967.
Box Box 4
Selepet-English Dictionary, by K.A. & N.A. McElhanon. Canberra: The Australian National University, 1970.
Series:
SELKUP
Scope and Contents: see also SAMOYED LANGUAGES
Box Box 32
Selkupisches Wörterverzeichnis. Tas-Dialekt, by István Erdélyi. Bloomington, Indiana: Indiana University; Mouton & Co., 1970.
Box Box 6
Selkup Texts with Phonetic Introduction and Vocabulary, by László Szabó. Bloomington, Indiana: Indiana University Publications, 1976.
Box Box 56
A Vocabulary of Central Sakai (Dialect of the Aboriginal Communities of the Gopeng Valley), by R[ichard] J[ames] Wilkinson. Kuala Lumpur: Printed by J. Brown at the Frederated Malay States Government Press, 1915.
Box Box 34
Sengoi-English, English-Sengoi dictionary, by Nathalie Means & Paul B. Means, ed. by Gordon P. Means. [Toronto]: Joint Centre on Modern East Asia, University of Toronto, York University, 1986.
Box Box 76
Seneca Morphology and Dictionary, by Wallace L. Chafe. Washington, D.C.: Smithsonian Press, 1967.
Box Box 37
Onödowa'ga:' Gawë:nö' Oiwa'shö'öh. Words of the Seneca Language, prepared by Wallace Chafe. Salamanca, N.Y.: Seneca Bilingual Education Program, Salamanca City Central School District, 1983.
Box Box 37
Series:
SENGA
Scope and Contents: see NSENGA
Box Box 65
Essai de Phonologie du Tyembara (dialecte Sénoufo), by Paulette Roulon. [Paris]: [Societé d'Études Linguistiques et Anthropologiques de France], 1968 [wrappers dated 1972].
Box Box 65
Series:
SESUTO
Scope and Contents: see SOUTHERN SOTHHO
Box Box 9
A Dictionary of Moca (Southwestern Ethiopia), by Wolf Leslau. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press, 1959.
Series:
SHAMBALA
Scope and Contents: see also BANTU LANGUAGES
Box Box 7
Schambala-Wörterbuch, by F. LangHeinrich. Hamburg: L. Friederichsen, 1921.
Box Box 7
Series:
SHAN
Scope and Contents: see TAI MAU
Series:
SHAWNEE
Scope and Contents: see also MIAMI
Box Box 28
Ten years of Upper Canada in Peace and War, 1805-1815: being the Ridout letters, with annotations by Matilda [Ridout]Edgar [1844-1910]; also an Appendix of the Narrative of the Captivity among the Shawanese Indians, in 1788, of Thos. Ridout, afterwards Surveyor-General of Upper Canada, and a Vocabulary, compiled by him, of the Shawanese Language. Toronto: William Briggs, 1890.
Box Box 67
Sherpa Nepali English: Conversation and Basic Words, by Ang Phinjo Sherpa. Kathmandu: [Published by the author], n.d. [1989].
Box Box 61
Shilluk Grammar, with a Little Shilluk Dictionary, by B[ernardo] Kohnen. Verona: Missione Africane, 1933.
Box Box 73
Grammar of the Shina (Sina) Language, consisting of a full grammar, with texts and vocabularies of the main or Gilgiti Dialect and briefer grammars (with vocabularies and texts) of the Kohistani, Guresi and Drasi dialects, by T. Grahame Bailey. London: The Royal Asiatic Society, 1924.
Box Box 9
A dictionary, with notes on the grammar of the Mashona language, commonly called Chiswina, [by H. Buck]. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1924.
Box Box 41
English-Chiswina Dictionary with an outline Chiswina Grammar, originally compiled by E. Biehler, revised and published by the Jesuit Fathers. [Mariannhill, Natal]: The Jesuit Fathers, 1927. Third edition, enlarged. [BOX 11] Also: a second copyin poor condition, spine persished, but with contemporary ownership signature of D. M. Close, dated Oct. 1932, and with numerous manuscript additions and notes throughout.
Box Box 67
"Fourth edition," retitled reprint, 1950: A Shona Dictionary, with an outline Shona grammar, originally compiled by E[dward] Biehler. Cape Town: Longmans, Green and Co., 1950.
Box Box 57
A Vocabulary of the Dialects of Mashonaland in the new Orthography, by Bertram H[erbert] Barnes. London: The Sheldon Press, 1932.
Box Box 15
Standard Shona Dictionary, by M. Hannan, S.J. London; New York: Macmillan & Co.; St. Martin's Press, 1959.
Box Box 9
Reprinted, with corrections (1961): identical to above copy, but corrected reprint with 1961 date on title page.
Series:
SHOSHONI
Scope and Contents: see also UTE-SOUTERN PAIUTE
Box Box 27
Shoshonean dialects of California, by A[lfred] L[ouis] Kroeber [1876-1960]. Berkeley: The University Press, 1907.
Box Box 32
Newe natekwinappeh: Shoshoni stories and dictionary, by Wick R. Miller. Salt Lake City: University of Utah Press, 1972.
Box Box 48
Rushanskie i Khufskie teksty i slovar, by V[alentina] S[tepanovna] Sokolova. Moscow; Leningrad: Izd-vo Akademii nauk SSSR, 1959.
Box Box 6
Bartangskie teksty i slovar, by V[alentina] S[tepanovna] Solokova. Moscow: Izd-vo Akademii nauk SSSR, 1960.
Box Box 22
Shuswap-English dictionary, A[ert] H[endrik] Kuipers. Leuven: Peeters, 1983.
Box Box 22
Series:
SIAGHA-YENIMU
Scope and Contents: see MANDOBO
Series:
SIERRA LEONE LANGUAGES
Box Box 5
Specimens of Languages from Sierra Leone, by Northcote W[hitridge] Thomas. London: Harrison and Sons, 1916.
Box Box 5
Series:
SIKSIKA
Scope and Contents: see BLACKFOOT
Box Box 12
Vergleichendes Wörterverzeichnis der Sichule-Sprache auf der Insel Simalur an der Westkuste von Sumatra, by Hans K¨a;hler [1912- ]. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer, 1959.
Box Box 12
Series:
SILOZI
Scope and Contents: see LOZI
Box Box 27
Hindi-Inglisa-Sindhi sabda-kosa. Hindi-English-Sindhi dictionary, by Deepchandra [Tilokchand][1909- ], Deva Dutta K. Sharma & Prabhudas Brahmachari. Ajmer: Sunder Sahitya Publishing House, 1962.
Box Box 65
A School Dictionary: Part First: Cingalese & English; contains the Cingalese words in use only, rendered into English. Part Second: English and Cingalese; contains English primitive words and those of utility only, rendered into Cingalese. An Introduction is prefixed, containing observations on these languages, designed to assist in their acquirement, and an Appendix Is added, containing the Latin and the French Phrases which occur most frequently in English books, by John Callaway. Colombo: Printed for the Author, at the Wesleyan Mission Press, 1821.
Box Box 17
A Pocket Dictionary Of The English And Sinhalese Languages, by the Rev. James Nicholson, Wesleyan Missionary, revised and enlarged by the Rev. David de Silva, and revised again by the Rev. J. Simon de Silva. Colombo: Methodist Book Room, 1901; BOUND WITH: A Sinhalese-English Dictionary abridged from Clough's Dictionary, by Revs. T[homas] Moscrop & R. A. Mendis. Collupitiya: W. Methodist Book Room, 1899.
Box Box 37
A Sinhalese-English dictionary, by the late Rev. Charles Carter. Colombo: Published by The Baptist Missionary Society, printed by The "Ceylon Observer" printing works, 1924.
Box Box 62
An Etymological Glossary of the Sinhalese Language, by Wilhelm Geiger. Colombo: The Royal Asiatic Society Ceylon Branch, 1941.
Box Box 48
Singalsko-russkii slovar: okolo 37 000 slov, by A[leksandr] A[leksandrovich] Belkovich. Moscow: Sovetskaia Entsiklopediia, 1970.
Box Box 69
Clough's Sinhala English Dictionary, by B[enjamin] Clough. New Delhi: Asian Educational Services, 1982. Second New and Enlarged Edition.
Box Box 69
Series:
SIOUX
Scope and Contents: see DAKOTA; LAKOTA
Box Box 11
Vocabulario castellano-sirionó, by Anselmo E[bner] Schermair {1902- ].Innsbruck: Innsbrucker Gesellschaft zur Pflege der Geissteswissenschaften, 1962.
Box Box 11
Series:
SKAGIT-NISQUALLY
Scope and Contents: see LUSHOOTSEED
Box Box 43
[cover title] Slave Indians, Tenne, [attributed to Robert Kennicott, 1835-1866]. [S.l.: s.n., n.d. [1869?].
Box Box 43
Series:
SM'ALGYAX
Scope and Contents: see TSIMSHIAN
Box Box 64
Somali-English and English-Somali Dictionary, Evangeliste de Larajasse. London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner & Co., 1897.
Box Box 16
Somali-English dictionary, by R[oy] C[live] Abraham. London: University of London Press, 1964.
Box Box 65
Second impression (1966): Somali-English Dictionary, by R. C. Abraham. University of London Press, 1966. Second impression.
Box Box 63
Petit Lexique Somali-Français, by Christophe Philibert. Paris: Librarie C. Klincksieck, 1976.
Box Box 29
The Modernisation of Somali Vocabulary, with Particular Reference to the Period from 1972 to the Present, by John Charles Caney. Hamburg: Helmut Buske Verlag, 1984.
Box Box 27
Somali-English Dictionary, by Virginia Luling. Wheaton, Maryland: Dunwoody Press, 1987.
Box Box 19
English-Somali Somali-English Dictionary. Ingirisi Soomaali Qaamuus Soomaali Ingirisi, compiled by Mohamud Korshel. New Delhi: Star Publications, 1994.
Box Box 49
Manuel de la langue soñgay parlée de Tombouctou à Say dans la boucle du Niger, by [Augustin] Hacquard [1860-1901] &. [Auguste] Dupuis[-Yakouba] [b. 1865]. Paris: J. Maisonneuve, 1897.
Box Box 38
Lexique Songhoy, by Sididié Oumar Traoré. [Bamako]: Institut des Sciences Humaines du Mali, 1976.
Box Box 38
Series:
SONGE
Scope and Contents: see CONGO LANGUAGES, POLYGLOT
Box Box 38
Series:
SONGHOY
Scope and Contents: see SONGHAI
Box Box 38
Series:
SONGUM
Scope and Contents: see also BONGU
Box Box 61
Grammar and Vocabulary of the Language of Sonsorol-Tobi, by A[rthur] Capell. Sydney: University of Sydney, 1969.
Box Box 57
English-Sora Dictionary, compiled by G[idugu] V[enkata] Ramamutri. Madras: Printed by the Superintendent, Government Press, 1933.
Box Box 57
ALSO: Sora-English Dictionary, by G[idugu] V[enkata] Ramamutri. Madras: Printed by the Superintendent, Government Press, 1938.
Box Box 67
Noord-Sotho. Northern-Sotho. Terminologie en spelreëls No. 2. Terminology and Orthography No. 2. The Department of Bantu Education. Pretoria: Staatsdrukker; The Government Printer, 1962.
Series:
SOTHO, SOUTHERN
Scope and Contents: see also FANAGOLO
Box Box 24
Sesuto-English vocabulary. Mantsue a Sesotho le tlalosetso ea 'ona ka sEnglish. [Morija]: Khatiso ea Moria, 1876.
Box Box 71
Second, enlarged edition, 1893: Se-Suto-English and English-Se-Suto vocabulary. Mantsue a se-Sotho le se-English le hlaloso ea 'ona, with an elementary sketch of se-Suto grammarby E. Jacottet, by A[dolphe] Mabille [1836-1894]. Moria: Khatiso, 1893. 1/26/00. $500. Rulon-Miller.
Box Box 64
Fifth edition, 1924: Sesuto-English Dictionary, compiled by A. Mabille & H. Dieterlen. Morija: Sesuto Book Depot, 1924. Fifth edition.
Box Box 6
New, revised and enlarged edition, 1950: Southern Sotho-English Dictionary, by A. Mabille & H. Dieterlen, reclassified, revised and enlarged by R. A. Paroz. Morija, Basutoland: Morija Sesuto Book Depot, 1950.
Box Box 65
First printing of the 1950 edition in the new orthography, 1961: Southern Sotho-English Dictionary, by A. Mabille & H. Dieterlen, reclassified, revised and enlarged by R. A. Paroz. Morija, Basutoland: Morija Sesuto Book Depot, 1961.
Box Box 55
Steps to learn the Sesuto language comprising an elementary grammar, graduated exercises, and a short vocabulary, Second Edition, [by F. Hermann Kruger]. Morija, Basutoland: A. Mabille, 1883. Second edition.
Box Box 55
Everyday Sesotho Grammar, by M. R. L. Sharpe. Morija: Morija Sesuto Book Depot, 1952.
Box Box 17
Suid-Sotho / Southern Sotho. Terminologie en Spelreëls No. 2. Teminology [sic] and Spelling No. 2. Department of Bantu Education. Pretoria: Staatsdrukker; The Government Printer, 1962.
Series:
SOUTH AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL LANGUAGES
Box Box 72
The Native Tribes of South Australia, comprising The Narrinyeri, by the Rev. George Taplin. The Adelaide tribe, by Dr. Wyatt, J.P. The Encounter Bay Tribe, by the Rev. A. Meyer. The Port Lincoln Tribe, by the Rev. C.W. Schürmann. The Dieyerie Tribe, by S. Gason. Vocabulary of Woolner District Dialect (Northern Territory) by John Wm. Ogilvie Bennett, with an Introductory Chapter by J.D. Woods. Adelaide: E. S. Wigg & Son, 1879.
Box Box 10
"Native Vocabulary of Miscellaneous New South Wales Objects," by Jas. Larmer, in: Journal and Proceedings of the Royal Society of New South Wales, 1898, pp. 223-229.
Series:
SOUTHERN PUGET SOUND SALISH
Box Box 78
Southern Puget Sound Salish: Texts, Place Names and Dictionary, by Warren A. Snyder. Sacramento, Cal.: The Sacramento Anthropological Society, Sacramento State College, 1968.
Series:
SOUTHERN RHODESIAN LANGUAGES
Box Box 14
A Southern Rhodesian Botanical Dictionary of Native and English Plant Names, by H[iram] Wild. Salisbury, Southern Rhodesia: The Government Printer, 1952.
Box Box 33
Second edition, enlarged and revised, [1972]: A Rhodesian botanical dictionary of African and English plant names, by Hiram Wild, revised and enlarged by H. M. Biegel and S. Mavi. Salisbury, Rhodesia: Government Printer, 1972.
Series:
SOUTH SEA ISLAND VOCABULARIES
Box Box 23
Captain Cook's South Sea Island vocabularies, by Peter A. Lanyon-Orgill. London: published by the author, 1979.
Box Box 23
Series:
SOUTH SEA ISLANDS PIDGIN ENGLISH
Scope and Contents: see AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL PIDGIN ENGLISH
Series:
SPANISH DIALECT, ST. BERNARD PARISH, LOUISIANA
Box Box 20
The Spanish Dialect in St. Bernard Parish, Louisiana, by Raymond R. MacCurdy. Albuquerque: The University of New Mexico Press, 1950.
Series:
ST. LUCIAN CREOLE
Box Box 62
Dictionary of St. Lucian Creole. Part 1: Kwéyòl-English. Part 2: English-Kwéyòl, compiled by Jones E. Mondesir, edited by Lawrence D. Carrington. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter, 1992.
Box Box 62
Series:
SUBANU
Scope and Contents: see CEBUANO
Box Box 62
Series:
SUDANESE ARABIC
Scope and Contents: see ARABIC, SUDANESE SPOKEN
Series:
SUDANESE AFRICAN LANGUAGES
Box Box 78
Zentralsudanische Studien: Wörterverzeichnisse der Deutschen Zentral Afrika Expedition 1910/1911, nachgelassene Aufnahmen von Gustav Nachtigal und eignene Sammlungen, ed. by Johannes Lukas. Hamburg: Friederichsen, De Gruyter & Co., 1937.
Series:
SUKUMA
Scope and Contents: see also BANTU LANGUAGES, HAYA
Box Box 19
A Vocabulary of Sukuma, compiled by I[rvine] Richardson, ed. by W.M. Mann. London: School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London, 1967.
Box No Box
English-Sulu-Malay vocabulary with useful sentences, tables, &c., by Andson Cowie, edited by Wm. Clark Cowie. London: Printed for the Editor by T. May, 1893.
Box Box 36
[no title page] Soembaneesche Wordenlijst, by W. Pos. Extract from Bijdragen tot de taal-, land- en volkenkunde van Nederlandsch- Indie, ser. 6, v.9, pp. [184]-284. 1901.
Box Box 18
Kamberaas (Oost-Soembaas)-Nederlands Woordenboek met Nederlands-Kamberaas Register, by L. Onvlee, Oe. H. Kapita & P. J. Luijendijk. Dordrecht: Foris Publications, 1984.
Series:
SUMO
Scope and Contents: see also MOSKITO
Box Box 38
Vocabulario preliminar del ulwa (sumu meridional). [Managua, Nicaragua]: [Cambridge, Mass.]: Centro de Investigaciones y Documentacion de la Costa Atlantica; Centro de Ciencia Cognitiva, Instituto Tecnologico de Massachusetts, 1988.
Box Box 38
Diccionario Elemental del Ulwa (sumu meridional) Karawala, Región Autónoma Atlántico Sur, Nicaragua; [Bluefields]; [Cambridge, MA]: CODIUL / UYUTMUBAL; Centro de Inverstigaciones y Documentación de la Costa Atlántica; Centro de Ciencia Cognitiva, Instituto Technológico de Massachusetts, 1989.]
Box Box 10
Diccionario panamahka. Sumo-español-sumo, by Melba E. McLean Cornelio. [Managua]: CIDCA, 1996.
Box Box 5
Soendasch-Nederduitsch Woordenboek, in three parts., by H. J. Oosting. Batavia: Ogilvie and Co., 1879.
Box Box 33
Supplement door H.J. Oosting op het door hem, op last van het gouvernement van Ned.-Indie, zamengestelde Soendasch-Nederduitsch woordenboek, by H. J. Oosting. Amsterdam: Johannes Müller, 1882.
Box Box 74
Nederduitsch-Soendasch Woordenboek, by H. J. Oosting. Amsterdam: Johannes Müller, 1887.
Box Box 34
Soendaas-Nederlands woordenboek, by F. S. Eringa [d. 1983]. Dordrecht; Cinnaminson, U.S.A.: Cinnaminson, N.J., U.S.A.: Foris Publications Holland ; Sole distributor for the U.S.A. and Canada, Foris Publications U.S.A, 1984.
Box Box 34
Series:
SUNDANESE
Scope and Contents: see SUNDA
Box Box 1
Dictionnaire français-soso et soso-français, by [Jean Baptiste] Raimbault. 2. Édition. Rome: Mission Catholique de Conakry, 1923.
Box Box 33
Svan-English dictionary, compiled by Chato Gudjedjiani and Letis Palmaitis, ed. by B. George Hewitt. Delmar, N.Y.: Caravan Books, 1985. 3/12/99. $35.50. Zubal Books.
Series:
SWAHILI
Scope and Contents: see also BANTU LANGUAGES; LUO
Box Box 36
Dictionnaire français-swahili, by Ch[arles] Sacleux. Zanzibar: Mission des P. P. du St. Esprit, 1891.
Box Box 41
Second edition, revised and enlarged, 1959 (c. 1949): Dictionnaire francais-swahili, deuxième édition, revue et augmentée, by Ch[arles] Sacleux. Paris: Institut d'ethnologie, 1959 (c. 1949).
Box Box 71
A Dictionary of the Suahili Language, compiled by J[ohann] L[udwig] Krapf. London: Trübner & Co., 1882.
Box Box 72
Second edition, revised (1925): Swahili-English dictionary : being Dr. Krapf's original Swahili-English dictionary revised and re-arrangedby Rev. [H. K.] Binns. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1925.
Box Box 57
Praktische Grammatik der Suaheli-Sprache, auch für den Selbstunterricht. Mit Uebungstücken, einem Lesebuche und einem Deutsch-Kisuaheli-Wörterbuch, by A[ugust] Seidel. Vienna; Pest; Leipzig: A. Hartleben's Verlag, [1890].
Box Box 10
English-Swahili dictionary compiled for the use of the Universities' mission to Central Africa, by [A]rthur [C]ornwallis Madan [ b. 1846]. Oxford; London: Clarendon Press; Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1894.
Box Box 9
Second edition, revised (1902): English-Swahili dictionary. Second edition, revised, by A[rthur] C[ornwallis] Madan [b. 1846]. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1902.
Box Box 72
A Handbook of the Swahili Language as Spoken at Zanzibar, edited for the Universities' mission to Central Africa by the late Edward Steere, fourth edition, revised and enlarged by A[rthus] C[ornwallis] Madan. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1894.
Box Box 64
English-Swahili Vocabulary. Compiled from the Works of the Late Bishop Steere and from other Sources, by A[rthur] C[ornwallis] Madan. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1900.
Box Box 29
New edition, revised orthography (1937): English-Swahili vocabulary: compiled from the works of the late Bishop Steere and from other sources, by A[rthur] [Cornwallis] Madan [b. 1846]. London: Sheldon Press, 1937.
Box Box 53
Vocabulary of English Words & Sentences translated into six languages or dialects, viz.:- Zanzibar Swahili (Ki-Unguja), Mombasa Swahili (Ki-Mvito), Lamu Swahili (Ki-Amu), Patta Swahili (Ki-Pate), Siyu Swahili (Ki-Siu), Bajun (Faza) Swahili (Ki-Tikuu), by A. C. Hollis. S.l: n.p, n.d. [London; New York: MacMillan, 1911?].
Box Box 64
Elementary Kiswaheli Grammar or Introduction into the East African Negro Language and Life, by A. Reichart & M. Küsters. Heidelberg: Julius Groos, 1926.
Box Box 1
A standard English-Swahili dictionary (founded on Madan's English-Swahili dictionary), by the Inter-territorial Language (Swahili) Committee to the East African Dependencies, under the direction of the late Frederick Johnson. London: Oxford University Press, Humphrey Milford, 1939.
Box Box 61
Up-Country Swahili Exercises for the Soldier, Settler, Miner, Merchant, and their Wives and all who deal with Up-Country Native without Interpreters, by F. H. La Breton. Kitale: LeBreton, 1942. Fifth edition.
Box Box 13
A New English-Swahili Phrase Book, by B. J. Ratcliffe & Howard Elphinestone. Nairobi: East African Standard, [1952]. Later printing.
Box Box 17
Swahili pocket dictionary, by Margaret [Arminel] Bryan. Nairobi; London: Highway Press; Longmans, Green, 1955. Later printing.
Box Box 64
A Concise English-Swahili Dictionary. Kamusi ya Kiingereza-Kiswahili, by R.A. Snoxall. London: Oxford University Press, 1958.
Box Box 64
[In Cyrillic script] Suakhili-russkii slovar, ed. by D[mitrii] A[alekseevich] Oldgerogge. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1961.
Box Box 10
ALSO: [In Cyrillic script] Kratkii suakhili-russkii i russko-suakhili slovar, by A[leksandr] I[vanovich] Kutuzov & Ali Juma Zidikher. Moscow: Sovetskaia Entsiklopediia, 1965.
Box Box 75
Concise Swahili and English Dictionary [including Swahili-English and English-Swahili]by D.V. Perrott. London: The English Universities Press, Ltd., 1965.
Box Box 17
Swahili-English Dictionary, by Charles W[illiam] Rechenbach. [Washington, D.C.]: The Catholic University of America Press, 1967.
Box Box 40
Afrikan language dictionary: Swahili-English and English-Swahili, by D. W. Kabithe. Toledo, Ohio: Swahili Understanding International, 1980.
Box Box 67
ALSO: Manuel de kingwana: le dialecte occidental de swahili, by John Whitehead & L.F. Whitehead. Wayika, Congo Belge: La Mission de et a Wayika, 1928.
Box Box 63
Concise SiSwati Dictionary. SiSwati-English / English-SiSwati, compiled by D[avid] K. Rycroft ("Mkhosi"). Pretoria: J.L. van Schaik, 1981.
Box Box 3
Dictionnaire kitabwa-français et français-kitabwa, by August van Acker. Brussels: [Spineux et cie], 1907. 3/30/00. £35 (=$55). Anthony C. Hall.
Box Box 3
Series:
TABULAM BUNDJALUNG
Scope and Contents: see WESTERN BUNDJALUNG
Box Box 24
Étude sur laTachelit du Soûs: vocabulaire Français-Berbère, by E[dmond] Destaing [1872-1940]. Paris: Eernest Leroux, 1938.
Box Box 24
Tae' (Zuid-Toradjasch)-Nederlandsch Woordenboek met Register Nederlandsch-Tae', by H. Van der Veen. 's-Gravenhage: Martinus Nijhoff, 1940.
Box Box 22
Tagabili vocabulary, by Vivian Forsberg & Alice Lindquist. Manila: Published by the Summer Inst. of Linguistics in cooperation with the Bureau of Public Schools and the Institute of National Language of the Department of Education, 1955.
Series:
TAGALOG / PHILIPINO
Box Box 6
A Dictionary of the [Native] Plant Names of the Philippine Islands, by Elmer D[rew] Merrill. Manila: Bureau of public printing, 1903.
Box Box 15
Tagalog. The basis of the national language of the Philippines. [Cover title] A guide to the Tagalog dialect in the Philippines. Brisbane: H. Pole & Co., 1944.
Box Box 55
(Draft) Tesaurong Ingles-Tagalog, by Consuelo Torres Panganiban, Jose Ma. Panganiban, & Jose Villa Panganiban. S.l: n. p., n.d. [ca. 1947].
Box Box 65
Pocket Dictionary Tagalog-English / English-Tagalogby Clodualdo del Mundo and Andrea Amor Tablan. Manila: Abiva Publishing House, 1948.
Box Box 15
Pocket Dictionary. Talatingang Pambulsa. English-Tagalog Tagalog-English Vocabulary, by P[ablo] Jacobo Enriquez & Maria Odulio Guzman. Manila: Philippine Book Company, [1949].
Box Box 22
Publications of the Institute of National Language, Nos. 1-9. Manila: Bureau of Printing, 1954-55, as follow:
Box Box 22
No. 1: Vocabulary lists for teaching various subjects in the Filipino languages, by R[ufino] Alejandro, T[eodora] A. Agoncillo, & P. R. Glorioso. Manila: Bureau of Printing, 1954.
Box Box 22
No. 2: Economic and allied terms (Mga katawagáng pangkabuhayan at mga kauri), by V[ito] C. Santos and others. Manila: Bureau of Printing, 1954.
Box Box 22
No. 3: Legal terms (Mga katawangang pambatas), by P[onciano] B. P[eralta] Pineda and others. Manila: Bureau of Printing, 1954.
Box Box 22
No. 4: Parliamentary terms and usages (Mga katawagan at pananalitang gamit sa kapulungan), by P[onciano] B. P[eralta] Pineda and others. Manila: Bureau of Printing, 1954.
Box Box 22
No. 5: Arithmetical and geometrical terms (Mga katawagang pang-aritmetika at pangheometriya), by V[ito] C. Santos and others. Manila: Bureau of Printing, 1954.
Box Box 22
No. 6: Geographical terms (Mga katawagang pangheograpiya), by V[ito] C. Santos and others. Manila: Bureau of Printing, 1954.
Box Box 22
No. 7: Traffic signs and terms (Mga babala at katawagang pantrapiko), by V[ito] C. Santos and others. Manila: Bureau of Printing, 1954.
Box Box 22
No. 8: Mga katawagan sa pagsasaka (farming terms), by P[onciano] B. P[eralta] Pineda. Manila: Bureau of Printing, 1954.
Box Box 22
No. 9: Vocabulary of identical Tagalog and Ilocano words with identical meanings translated into English, by Catalino D. Garduque. Manila: Bureau of Printing, 1955.
Box Box 54
An English-Tagalog Dictionary. Manila: Institute of National Language, Republic of the Philippines, Bureau of Printing, 1960.
Box Box 7
Pilipino-English English-Pilipino Dictionary, compiled by Andrea A. Tablan & Carmen B. Mallari. New York: Washington Square Press, Inc., 1961.
Box Box 19
Tagalog Dictionary, by Teresita V. Ramos. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press, 1971.
Box Box 75
Pilipino-English / English-Pilipino Concise Dictionaryby Sam & Angelina Bickford. New York: Hippocrene Books, 1985.
Box Box 59
Dictionary English-Tagalog (Pilipino), compiled & edited by Ricardo Benedikto. New Delhi: Star Publications, 1997.
Box Box 62
A Tahitian and English Dictionary, with introductory remarks on the Polynesian language, and a short grammar of the Tahitian dialect: with an appendix containing a list of foreign words used in the Tahitian Bible, in commerce, etc. with the sources from whence they have been derived, [by Herbert John Davies]. Tahiti: printed at the London Missionary Society's press, 1851.
Box Box 57
Grammaire et dictionnaire de la langue maori.; dialecte tahitien, by [Tepano Jaussen]. [Saint-Germaine; Saint-Cloud]: Impr. de L. Toinon et Ce; Impr. De Mme Ve Belin], [1861].
Box Box 2
Second edition, 1898: Grammaire et dictionnaire de la langue maorie; dialecte tahitien, by Tepano Jaussen. Paris: Neia i te nenei raa no Belin, 1898.
Box Box 26
A vocabulary of English - French - Tahitian, with explanatory remarks on Tahitian dialect, by J[phn] Frank Stimson [1883- ], Orovini, Papeete, Tahiti: Published by O.B. Peterson for the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, 1924.
Box Box 2
A New grammar of the Tahitian dialect of the Polynesian language, and combined with a vocabulary of English, French, Tahitian, Second Edition, arranged and published by Geo. W. Burbidge for the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter Day Saints. [n.p.], 1930.
Box Box 17
[Cover title] Grammaire Tahitienne suivie d'un vocabulaire pratique, by Marcel Sénac. With woodcut illustrations by Roger Parry. Toulouse: Imprimerie Régionale, n.d. [c. 1938].
Box Box 23
A comparative dictionary of the Tahitian language: Tahitian-English with an English-Tahitian finding list, by Edmund Andrews [1892-1941] & Irene [Geene] D[wen] Andrews [1892- ]. Chicago: Chicago Academy of Sciences, 1944.
Box Box 65
Tahitian-English English-Tahitian Dictionary, compiled by Leonard Clairmont in collaboration with Mauu Ariiteuira Teriitahi. Hollywood, CA: Leonard Clairmont, n.d. [1960's]. Second edition.
Box Box 17
Third edition,revised, n.d.: Say It In Tahitian. Tahitian-English English-Tahitian Dictionary. Useful Phrases and Conversation. Third Edition Revised, compiled by Leonard Clairmont in collaboration with Mauu Ariiteuira Teriitahi. Los Angeles: Tahiti Musique, n.d. Third edition.
Box Box 29
Dictionnaire moderne tahitien-français et français-tahitien, by Mai-Arii Cadousteau & Jacques Anisson de Perron. Papeete (Tahiti): Stepolde, 1973.
Box Box 12
Lexique du tahitien contemporain: tahitien-français, français-tahitien, by Yves Lemaitre. Pref. de A. G. Haudricourt. Paris: Office de la recherche scientifique et technique outremer, 1973.
Series:
TAI DIALECTS, SOUTHWESTERN
Box Box 4
William J. Gedney's Southwestern Tai Dialects: Glossaries, Texts, and Translations, edited by Thomas John Hudak. Ann Arbor, Michigan: The University of Michigan, Cneter for South and Southeast Asian Studies, 1994.
Box Box 74
Dictionnaire tay blanc français avec transcription latine, by Georges Minot, in: Bulletin de l'École Française d'Extrême-Orient, Vol. XL, fasc. 1, Hanoi, 1940, pp. [1]-237 238-240.
Box Box 37
A dictionary of Dehong, Southwest China, by Yongxian Luo [1954- ]. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics, 1998.
Box Box 14
Shan Chrestomathy. An Introduction to Tai Mau Language and Literature, by Linda Wai Ling Young. Lanham, MD: University Press of America, 1985.
Box Box 47
Tadzhiksko-russkii slovar: 40 000 slov, edited by E[vgenii] E[duardovich] Bertels. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1954.
Box Box 77
Dictionnaire Français-Tamâheq (langue des Touareg), contenant: 1° tous les mots de la langue française traduisibles en Tamâheq soit directement, soit par des phrases, 2° la traduction en Tamâheq de tous ces mots avec la prononciation figurée en caractères français et en caractères tifinar'; 3° les diffèrentes acceptions des mots avec de nonbreux exemples, dictons, proverbes, traits de mœurs des imouhar', etc., etc., by S. Cid Kaoui. Alger: Adlophe Jourdan, 1894.
Box Box 77
Dictionnaire pratique Tamâheq-Français (langue des Touareg) contenant 1° plus de six mille mots de la langue Tamâheq; la traduction en français de tous ces mots avec la prononciation figurée en caractères français et en caractères tifinar'; leurs différentes acceptions, avec de nombreux exemples, dictons, proverbes, traits de mœrs des Imouhar', etc.; 2° l'indication du genre, du nombre des noms; les formes verbales, etc., by S. Cid Kaoui (see notes for previous entry). Alger: Adolphe Jourdan, 1900.
Box Box 24
Dictionnaire abregé touareg-français (dialecte de l'Ahaggar), 2 vols., by [Charles] de Foucauld [1858-1916], ed. by René [Marie Joseph] Basset [1855-1924].. Alger: Bastide-Jourdan, 1918-1920.
Box Box 7
Dictionnaire touareg-francais, dialecte de l'Ahaggar, by Charles de Foucauld [1858-1916]. 4 vols. [Paris]: Imprimerie nationale de France, 1951-1952.
Box Box 42
Lexique français-touareg dialecte de l'Ahaggar, by Jean Marie Cortade with the collaboration of Mouloud Mammeri. Paris: arts et metiérs graphiques, 1967.
Box Box 42
Series:
TAMASHEK
Scope and Contents: see TAMAHAQ, HOGGAR
Series:
TAMAZIGHT, CENTRAL
Scope and Contents: see also TACHELHIT
Box Box 38
A Computerized Lexicon of Tamazight, Berber Dialect of Ayt Seghrouchen, by Ernest T. Abdel-Massih. Ann Arbor: Center for Near Eastern and North African Studies, University of Michigan, 1971.
Box Box 32
Grammatica damulica, quae per varia paradigmata, regulas & necessarium vocabulorum apparatum, viam brevissimam monstrat, qua lingua damulica seu| malabarica, quae inter Indos Orientales in usu est, & hucusque in Europa incognita fuit, facile disci possit: in usum eorum qui hoc tempore gentes illas ab idololatria ad cultum veri Dei, salutemque aeternam evangelio Christi perducere cupiunt, .by Bartholomaeus Ziegenbalg [1683-1719]. Halae Saxonum: litteria & impensis Orphanotrophei, 1716.
Box Box 70
A Dictionary, of the Tamil and English Languages, by J.P. Rottler. In four parts. Madras: Printed at the Vepery Mission Press, 1834-1841.
Box Box 29
English and Tamil Dictionary; containing all the more important words in Dr. Webster's Dictionary of the English language. Second edition, enlarged and revised. Jaffna: American Mission Press, 1852.
Box Box 43
A comprehensive Tamil and English dictionary of high and low Tamil assisted by competent native scholars in part from manuscript materials of the late Rev. Joseph Knight and others, by Miron Winslow. Madras: P.R. Hunt, 1862.
Box Box 16
English and Tamil Vocabulary. Part I, Part II. Part III(3 vols). Madras, Allahabad, Calcutta, Rangoon, Colombo: The Christian Literature Society for India, 1919-1920-1917. Later editions.
Box Box 57
Cooly Tamil as understood by labourers on tea & rubber estates, specially arranged for planters and planting students, by W.G.B. Wells. Colombo: The Ceylon Observer, 1927. Fourth edition.
Box Box 18
A Dictionary Tamil and English based on Johann Philip Fabricius's 'Malabar-English Dictionary'. Third edition, revised and enlargedby Purushotma, and edited by D. Bexell. Tranquebar: Evangelical Lutheran Mission Publishing House, 1933. Third edition.
Box Box 26
Dictionnaire tamoul-français. Dictionnaire français-tamoul. Troisième édition., two vols., by [Louis Marie] Mousset & [Louis Savinien] Dupuis. Pondichery: Imprimerie de la Mission, 1938/1942 (two vols. in one) and 1952. Third edition.
Box Box 54
A Dictionary of English and Tamil, revised edition, compiled by P[eter] Percival. Madras: The Madras School Book and Literature Society, 1938. Revised edition.
Box Box 47
Tamilsko-russkii slovar, okolo 38000 slov, by A[leksandr] M[oiseevich] Piatigorskii & S[emen] G[esselovich] Rudin. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1960.
Box Box 25
Desriptive Grammar of Cilappatikaaram, by S. V. Subramanian. Madras: Paari Nilayam, [1965].
Box Box 34
Dena'ina noun dictionary, by James [M.] Kari. Fairbanks: Alaska Native Language Center, University of Alaska, 1977.
Box Box 12
A dictionary of the Tangale language: (Kaltungo, Northern Nigeria), by Hermann Jungraithmayr. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer, 1991.
Box Box 35
Tanga-English English-Tanga Dictionary, by F.L.S. Bell. Sydney: The University of Sydney, 1977.
Series:
TARAHUMARA, CENTRAL
Box Box 5
Tarahumara-English English Tarahumara Dictionary and an Introduction to Tarahumara Grammar, by I. Thord-Gray. Coral Gables, Florida: University of Miami Press, 1955.
Box Box 5
Series:
TTARASCO
Scope and Contents: see PURÉPECHA
Box Box 11
Diccionario español-rifeño, by Esteban Ibáñez. Madrid: [Imprenta de la viuda de E. Maestre], 1944.
Box Box 2
Diccionario rifeno-espanol (etimologico), by Esteban Ibánez. Madrid: Instituto de Estudios Africanos, 1949.
Box Box 2
Series:
TARTAR
Scope and Contents: see TATAR
Box Box 20
Tatar-English English-Tatar Dictionary, by Sergey Shakhmayev. New York: Hippocrene Books, [1994].
Box Box 29
Vocabulary of the dialects of some of the aboriginal tribes of Tasmania, by Joseph Milligan. Hobart, Tasmania: William Thomas Strutt, Government Printer, 1890.
Box Box 55
The Aborigines of Tasmania, by H. Ling Roth. Assisted by Marion E. Butler, with a Chapter on the Osteology by J. G. Garson, M.D., Vice-President Anthropological Institute, and Lecturer on Comparative Anatomy at Charing Cross Hospital; and a Preface by Edward B. Tylor, Esq. D.C.I., F. R.S. [etc.]. With Numerous Autotype Plates, from Original Drawings made by Edith May Roth. London: Kengan Paul, Trench, Trübner & Col, 1890.
Box Box 9
A Word-List of the Tasmanian Aboriginal Languages, by N.J.B. Plomley. [Launceton: Australia]: The Author in association with the Government of Tasmania, 1976.
Box Box 38
Dictionnaire ethnographique téda, précédé d'un lexique français-téda, by Charles Le Coeur. Paris: Librairie Larose, 1950.
Box Box 8
Dictionary, English and Teloogoo, by J.C. Morris. Two volumes. Madras: Printed at the Asylum Herald Press, 1835, 1839.
Box Box 15
English and Telugu Grammatical Vocabulary. Useful Words and Idiomatic Sentences. Series of Vocabularies, No. III. Second Edition. Madras: The ChristianVernacular Education Society, 1890.
Box Box 57
Galletti's Telugu Dictionary: a Dictionary of Current Telugu, by A. Galletti di Cadilhac. London: Oxford University Press, Humphrey Milford, 1935.
Box Box 27
Merolu Telugu, by D.B. Polkam. Poona: Deccan College, 1971.
Box Box 27
Series:
TEMBÉ
Scope and Contents: see GUAJAJÁRA
Box Box 27
Series:
TEMNE
Scope and Contents: see THEMNE
Box Box 27
Series:
TEN'A
Scope and Contents: see INGALIK
Box Box 67
A Handbook of the Ateso Language, by A[rthur] L[eonard] Kitching. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1915.
Box Box 63
An English-Ateso and Ateso-English Vocabulary, by J.H. Hilders & J.C.D. Lawrance. Nairobi, Kampala, Dar-es-Salaam: The Eagle Press, 1958.
Box Box 38
Tettum-Hollandsche Woordenlijst met beknopte spraakkunst, by A. Mathijsen. 's Hage; Batavia: Martin Nijhoff; Albrecht & Co., 1906.
Box Box 62
Diccionario Teto-Portuguès, by Raphael Das Dores. Lisbon: Imprensa Nacional, 1907.
Box Box 74
Tetun-English Dictionary, by Cliff Morris. Canberra: The Australian National University, 1984.
Box Box 26
Ethnozoology of the Tewa Indians, by Junius Henderson & John Peabody Harrington. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1914.
Box Box 26
Ethnobotany of the Tewa Indians, by Wilfred William Robbins, John Peabody Harrington & Barbara Freire-Marreco. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1916.
Box Box 57
Lehr- und Lesebuch der Siamesischen Sprache und Deutsch-Siamesisches Wörterbuch. Zum Selbststudium mit phonetischer Ausprachebezeichnung, Übungsaufgaben und Lesebuch, by F[ranz] J[oseph] Wershoven. Vienna. Pest. Leipzig: A. Hartleben's Verlag, [1892].
Box Box 56
Essai de dictionanaire Français-Siamois, by M[arie]-J[ospeh] Çuaz. Bangkok: Imprimerie de la Mission Catholique, 1903.
Box Box 15
English-French-Siamese word and phrase book. Petit livre de conversation anglais-français-siamois, by B[asil] O[sborn] Cartwright. Bankok: The American Presbyterian Mission Press, 1917.
Box Box 11
"Siamesiche-deutsches Wörterverzeichnis juristischer Fachausdrücke," by Walter Trittel. Berlin: Reichsdruckerei, 1932.
Box Box 1
Thai-English dictionary, by George Bradley McFarland [1866-1942]. Stanford University, Calif.; London: Stanford University Press; H. Milford, Oxford University Press, 1944. Second issue of first edition.
Box Box 57
Phonetic Dictionary of the Thai Language. Part I: Thai-English. Part II: English-Thai, by Mary R. Haas. 2 vols. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1947.
Box Box 11
Taisko-russkii slovar, by L[ev] N[ikolaevich] Morev. Moscow: Sovetskaia Entsiklopediia, 1964.
Box Box 64
Modern Thai Pronunciation Dictionary, by Master John. Bangkok: Woothisarn, 1968.
Box Box 75
English-Thai & Thai-English Dictionary, by M.L. Manich Jumsai. Chalermint Press, 1968.
Box Box 7
Robertson's Practical English-Thai Dictionary, by Richard G. Robertson. Bangkok: Asian Books, n.d. [c. Charles E. Tuttle 1969].
Box Box 36
E-Saan-Central Thai Dictionary. Revised Edition, by Sutthiya Sueppha, Karuna Kitkhayan, & Chotima Juengsawat. Thailand: U.S. Peace Corps, [1983].
Box Box 75
English Thai / Thai English Dictionaryby Chalermint. Brooklyn, N.Y.: Saphrograph Corp., [n.d.].
Box Box 75
Series:
THANGATTI
Scope and Contents: see WORIMI
Box Box 16
Outlines of a Tharaka grammar, with a list of words and specimens of the language, Gerhard Lindblom [1887- ]. Uppsala: J. -A. Lundell, 1914.
Box Box 27
A collection of Temne traditions: fables and proverbs, with an English translation : as also some specimens of the author's own Temne compositions and translations: to which is appended a Temne-English vocabulary, by Rev. C[hristian] F[rederick] Schlenker. London: Printed for the Church Missionary Society, 1861.
Box Box 53
"Vocabulary of English words and sentences translated into Temne, Baga, Limba, Valu, Bulom, Krim," [compiled by R. F. Honter]. Manuscript wordlist entered on 24 p. printed form, c. 1920.
Box Box 26
A Hand-book of the Temne language, by A. T. Sumner. Freetown: Government Printing Office, 1922.
Box Box 27
Temne names and proverbs, Abou Bai-Sharka. Freetown: People's Educational Association of Sierra Leone, 1986.
Box Box 62
A Vocabulary and Outlines of Grammar of the Nitlakapamuk or Thompson Tongue, (The Indian Language Spoken between Yale, Lillooet, Cache Creek and Nicola Lake.) together with a Phonetic Chinook dictionary Adapted for use in the Province of British Columbia, by J.R. Good. Victoria, [B.C.]: St. Paul's Mission Press, Collegiate School, 1880.
Box Box 42
Thompson River Salish dictionary: nle?kepmxcin, by Laurence C. Thompson. Missoula, MT: University of Montana, 1996.
Box Box 39
[cover title] A Dcitionary of The Dharug Language-the Inland Dialect, by J[ames] L. Kohen [Blacktown, NSW]: Blacktown and District History Society, 1990. Second edition. 1/30/99. A$35 =$22). Cornstalk Bookshop.
Series:
TIBETAN
Scope and Contents: see also NEWARI
Box Box 43
Tibetsko-russkii slovar', s' prisovokupleniem' al'favitnago spiska, by IAkov Ivanovich Shmidt [1779-1847]. St. Petersburg: Izd. Imp. Akademieiu nauk", 1843.
Box Box 30
A Tibetan-English dictionary, with special reference to the prevailing dialects. To which is added an English-Tibetan vocabulary, by H[einrich] A[ugust] J¨a;schke [1817-1883], London: [Berlin, Printed by Unger brothers (T. Grimm)], 1881.
Box Box 18
Tibetan-English-Hindi guide, containing colloquial Tibetan, with equivalents in Hindi-Tibetan, Hindi, English-Tibetan, English and romanized Tibetan, by Tashi Wangdi. Calcutta: Printed at The Baptist Mission Press, 1909.
Box Box 14
Sanskrit-Tibetan-English vocabulary: being an edition and translation of the Mahavyutpatti, by Alexander Csoma de Körös, ed. by E. Denison Ross. Calcutta: The Asiatic Society, 1910. Series:: Memoirs of the Asiatic Society of Bengal ; v. 4, no. 1 (only of 2 parts).
Box Box 70
An English-Tibetan Dictionary, containing a Vocabulary of approximately 20,000 Words with their Tibetan Equivalents, by Lama Dawasamdup Kazi [Zla-ba Bsam'Grub]. Calcutta: Baptist Mission Press, published by the University, 1919.
Box Box 30
Dictionnaire français-tibetain.Tibet oriental, by [Pierre Philippe Giraudeau] [1850- ] & Francis Goré. Paris: Adrien-Maisonneuve, 1956. Also a second copy.
Box Box 74
Kratkii tibetsko-russkii slovar, 21000 slovar, by B[oris] V[ladimirovich] Semichov, IU[rii] M[ikhailovich] Parfionovich, & B[idiia] D[andarovich] Dandaron. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1963.
Box Box 16
Der kleine Tibeter [Deutsch-Tibetsches Wörterbuchlein], by Hans Huggenberger. Basel: printed by H. Weiss, 1964.
Box Box 9
Tibetisch-deutsches Wörterbuch, by Eberhardt Richter. Leipzig: Verlag Enzyklopadie, 1966.
Box Box 20
Tibetan-English Dictionary with Supplement, by Stuart H. Buck. Washington, D.C.: The Catholic University of America Press, 1969.
Box Box 63
Dbyin Bod san sbyar gyi tshig mdzod snan ba gsar pa. The New light English-Tibetan dictionary, by T.G. Dhongthog. Dharmsala: Library of Tibetan Works and Archives, 1973. Also a second copy, with a blue cover.
Box Box 11
Tsang Han tui chao La-sa kou yu tzu tien = [Bod Rgya san sbyar gyi Lha sa'i kha skad tshig mdzod], by Tao-chuan Yu & Chia-chang Fu. Pei-ching: Min tsu chu pan she : Hsin hua shu tien fa hsing, 1983.
Box Box 56
English-Tibetan Dictionary of Modern Tibetan, compiled by Melvyn C. Goldstein with Mgawangthondup Narkyid. Berkeley: University of California Press, [1984].
Box Box 17
New English-Tibetan dictionary = Dbyin Bod san sbyar gyi tshig mdzod gsar bsgrigs, by Norbu Chophel. Dharamsala, India: Norbu Chophel, 1985.
Box Box 12
Conversational English-Tibetan dictionary, by Anil Gupta [1958- ]. Delhi, India: Sri Satguru Publications, 1992.
Box Box 15
A Tibetan-Newari Lexicon cum Phrase Book with Illustrations, by Christoph Cüppers, Kashinath Tamot & Philip Pierce. Bonn: VGH Wissenschaftsverlag, 1996.
Box Box 15
Series:
TIBBU
Scope and Contents: see TEDA
Box Box 15
Series:
TIDDIM CHIN
Scope and Contents: see CHIN, TEDIM
Series:
TIGRE
Scope and Contents: see also AMHARIC
Box Box 28
Vocabulary of the Tigre language, written down by [Karl] Moritz von Beurmann [1835–1863], published with a grammatical sketch, by Dr. A[dalbert] Merx [1838–1909]. Halle; London: Buchhandlung des Waisenhauses, Trübner & Comp., 1868.
Box Box 7
Manuale tigre-italiano, con due dizionarietti italiano-tigre e tigre-italiano e cartina dimostrativa degli idiomi parlati in Eritrea, by Manfredo Camperio [1826-1899]. Milano: Ulrico Hoepli, 1894.
Box Box 59
Wörterbuch der Tigre-Sprache. Tigre-Deutsch-Englisch, by Enno Littmann & Maria Höfner. Wiesbaden: Franz Steiner Verlag, 1956–1962.
Box Box 54
English-Tigrigna Dictionary. [in Tigre script] 'Englizena-Tegrena Mazgaba-Qalat, compiled by Board of Scholars. New Delhi: Languages-of-the-World Publications, 1992.
Box Box 16
A Tikopian vocabulary, compiled mainly from materials collected by the Rev. W. J. Durrad, of the Melanesian mission, ed. by Herbert W[illiam] Williams [1860-1937]. [Wellington, N.Z.?]: [Journal of the Polynesian Society], [1926].
Box Box 57
Tikopia-English dictionary. Taranga fakatikopia ma taranga fakainglisi, by Raymond William Firth. [Auckland] : [S.l.]: Auckland University Press; Oxford University Press, 1985.
Box Box 57
Series:
TIMORESE: (ATONI)
Scope and Contents: see also MALAY
Series:
TIMOTE-CUICA FAMILY
Box Box 14
"La vamille linguistique Timote (Venezuela)," by P. Rivet, in: International Journal of American Linguistics, New York, 4, no. 2-4 (January 1927), pp. 137-167.
Box Box 36
The Timucua language, by Albert S[amuel] Gatschet[1832-1907]. [Philadelphia], 1880. Three parts.
Box Box 36
Vocabulaire Timucua, by Raoul de La Grasserie [1839-1914]. [Orleans: Georges Jacob, [1890]. Purchased as part of previous lot.
Box Box 36
Textes en Langue Timucua, avec traduction analytique, par MM. Albert Gatschet et Raoul de la Grasserie. Paris: J. Maisonneuve, Libraire-Éditeur, 1890.
Box Box 62
A Grammar and Dictionary of the Timucua Language, by Julian Granberry. Tuscaloosa, Alabama: University of Alabama Press, 1993.
Box Box 36
Tiruray-English Lexicon, by Stuart A. Schlegel. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1971.
Box Box 18
A Dictionary of the Tiv Language, by Captain R[oy] C[live] Abraham. London: Published on behalf of the Government of Nigeria by the Crown Agents for the Colonies, 1940.
Box Box 66
A Dictionary of the Tiv Language, by Captain R[oy] C[live] Abraham. London: Published on behalf of the Government of Nigeria by the Crown Agents for the Colonies, 1940. (Second copy.)
Box Box 38
English-Tiv Dictionary, by Gerard Terpstra. Ibadan, Nigeria: Institute of African Studies, University of Ibadan, 1968.
Box Box 18
An Introductory Paper of the Tiwa Language, Dialect of Taos, New Mexico, by John P. Harrington. [Washington, D.C.]: Archaeological Institute of America, 1910.
Box Box 14
The Tiwi Language. Grammar, myths and dictionary of the Tiwi language spoken on Melville and Bathurst Islands, northern Australia, by C. R. Osborne. Canberra: Australian Institute of Aboriginal Studies, 1974.
Box Box 14
"Notes on the Tlappanecan Language of Guerrero," by Paul Radin, in: International Journal of American Linguistics, New York, Vol. 8, No. 1 (December 1933), pp. 45-72.
Box Box 4
English-Tlingit Dictionary: Nouns, compiled by Constance Naish & Gillian Story. Fairbanks, Alaska: Summer Institute of Linguistics, [1963].
Box Box 29
Die drei Sprachen des Bajastammes: To, Labi, Baja, by Günter Tessmann [1884- ]. Berlin, Seminar für Orientalische Sprachen, 1931.
Box Box 61
A Dictionary of Toaripi with English-Toaripi Index(two volumes), by H. A. Brown. Sydney: University of Sydney, 1968.
Box Box 74
Woordenlijst der Tobelo-Bòeng-Taal, by J.L.D. van der Roest. 'S-Gravenhage: Martinus Nijhoff, 1905.
Box Box 74
Tobèloreesch-Hollandsch Woordenboek met Hollandsch-Tobèloreesche inhoudsopgave, by A. Hueting. 'S-Gravenhage: Martinus Nijhoff, 1908.
Box Box 77
Memoir of the language and inhabitants of Lord North's Island, by John Pickering. Cambridge, Mass.: Metcalf and Co., 1845.
Box Box 8
Dictionnaire des particularités du français au Togo et au Dahomey, by S[uzanne] Lafage. [Abidjan]: Université d'Abidjan, Institut de linguistique appliquée, 1975.
Box Box 29
"Les dialectes du Moyen-Togo," by J. Bertho. Extract from Bulletin de l'Institut Français d'Afrique Noire, Dakar, IFAN, vol. 14, 1952.
Series:
TOKELAUAN (TOKELAU)
Box Box 1
Tokelau dictionary, compiled by Ropati Simona. Apia, Western Samoa: Office of Tokelau Affairs, 1986.
Box Box 71
Booklet on pidgin English as used in the mandated territory of New Guinea. With dictionary of nouns and phrases. This language is used in conversation with natives, Asiatics, and German white missionaries, by E[ustace] C[yril] N[orman] Helton. Brisbane: W. H. Adams, [ca.1943].
Box Box 71
Booklet on pidgin English as used in the mandated territory of New Guinea. With dictionary of nouns and phrases. This language is used in conversation with natives, Asiatics, and German white missionaries, by E[ustace] C[yril] N[orman] Helton. Brisbane: W. H. Adams, [ca.1945].
Box Box 17
[Cover title] Melanesian pidgin: phrase-book and vocabulary, [by Robert Anderson Hall]. [s.l.]: Headquarters USAFISPA, 1943.
Box Box 16
First edition, second issue (1943): Melanesian Pidgin Phrase-Book and Vocabulary, by Robert A[nderson] Hall, Jrd. Baltimore, MD: Linguistic Society of America, 1943.
Box Box 37
Melanesian Pidgin English: grammar, Texts, Vocabulary, by Robert A[nderson] Hall, Jr. Baltimore, Maryland: Linguistic Society of America at the Wavely Press, 1943.
Box Box 17
The Book of Pidgin English, Being (1) A Grammar and Notes, (2) A Pidgin English-English Dictionary, (3) An English-Pidgin English Dictionary, by John J[oseph] Murphy. Brisbane: W. R. Smith & Paterson, 1943.
Box Box 55
Second edition, 1947: The Book of Pidgin English, Being (1) A Grammar and Notes, (2) A Pidgin English-English Dictionary, (3) An English-Pidgin English Dictionary, by John J[oseph] Murphy. Brisbane: W. R. Smith & Paterson, 1947.
Box Box 57
Third edition, 1949: The Book of Pidgin English, Being (1) A Grammar and Notes, (2) An Outline of Pidgin English, (3) a Pidgin English-English Dictionary, (4) An English-Pidgin English Dictionary, by John J[oseph] Murphy. Brisbane: W. R. Smith & Paterson, 1949.
Box Box 66
"Fourth Edition," 1954: The Book of Pidgin English, Being (1) A Grammar and Notes, (2) An Outline of Pidgin English, (3) a Pidgin English-English Dictionary, (4) An English-Pidgin English Dictionary, by John J[oseph] Murphy. Brisbane: W. R. Smith & Paterson, 1954.
Box Box 1
"Fifth edition," 1956: The Book of Pidgin English, Being (1) A Grammar and Notes, (2) An Outline of Pidgin English, (3) a Pidgin English-English Dictionary, (4) An English-Pidgin English Dictionary, by John J[oseph] Murphy. Brisbane: W. R. Smith & Paterson, 1956.
Box Box 17
"Sixth edition," 1959: The Book of Pidgin English, Being (1) A Grammar and Notes, (2) An Outline of Pidgin English, (3) a Pidgin English-English Dictionary, (4) An English-Pidgin English Dictionary, by John J[oseph] Murphy. Brisbane: W. R. Smith & Paterson, 1959.
Box Box 1
"Seventh edition," 1962: The Book of Pidgin English, Being: (1) A Grammar and Notes, (2) An Outline of Pidgin English, (3) a Pidgin English-English Dictionary, (4) An English-Pidgin English Dictionary, by John J[oseph] Murphy. Brisbane: W. R. Smith & Paterson, 1962.
Box Box 55
"Eighth edition," [fourth edition] revised, 1966: The Book of Pidgin English, Being (1) A Grammar and Notes, (2) An Outline of Pidgin English, (3) a Pidgin English-English Dictionary, (4) An English-Pidgin English Dictionary, by John J[oseph] Murphy. Brisbane: W. R. Smith & Paterson, 1966.
Box Box 55
"Ninth edition," [fifth edition] revised, 1973: The Book of Pidgin English (Neo-Melanesian), Being (1) A Grammar and Notes, (2) An Outline of Neo-Melanesian, (3) Classified Vocabulary and Phrases, (4) a Neo-Melanesian-English Dictionary, (5) An English-Neo-Melanesian Dictionary, by John J[oseph] Murphy. Brisbane: W. R. Smith & Paterson, 1973.
Box Box 17
Revised [sixth] edition, 1985: The Book of Pidgin English, revised edition, by John J[oseph] Murphy. Bathhurst, N.S.W.: Robert Brown & Associates, 1985.
Box Box 6
Grammar and Dictionary of Neo-Melanesian, by Francis Mihalic. Techny, Illinois: The Mission Press, S.V.D., 1957.
Box Box 6
First edition, Australian issue: Grammar and Dictionary of Neo-Melanesian, by Francis Mihalic. Westmead, N.S.W.: Westmead Printing [for The Mission Press], 1957.
Box Box 17
A Kuk Buk in Pidgin, by Laurel Levi. Rabaul, T. N. G.: Methodist Mission Press, 1964.
Box Box 67
Concise Dictionary of New Guinea Pidgin (Neo-Melanesian) with translations in English and German, compiled by Friedrich Steinbauer. Madang, New Guinea: Kristin Press, 1969.
Box Box 19
The Jacaranda Dictionary and Grammar of Melanesian Pidgin, by Francis Mihalic. [Milton, Q.]: Jacaranda Press, 1971.
Box Box 14
"The Jicaques of Honduras," by Edward Conzemius, in: International Journal of American Linguistics, New York, Vol. 2, Nos. 3-4 (January 1923), pp. 162-170. 12/26/99. $13. Ethnographic Arts.
Box Box 41
Xus We-Yó'. Tolowa (Tututni) Language Dictionary. Second Edition. Crescent City, CA: Tolowa Language Committee, 1989.
Box Box 41
Series:
TONGA
Scope and Contents: see TUMBUKA
Box Box 63
An Account of the Natives of the Tonga Islands in the South Pacific Ocean. With an original grammar and vocabulary of their language. Compiled and arranged from the extensive communications of Mr. William Mariner, several years resident in those Islands, ed. by John Martin. 2 vols. London: John Murray, 1817.
Box Box 71
Third edition: An Account of the Natives of the Tonga Islands in the South Pacific Ocean. With an original grammar and vocabulary of their language. Compiled and arranged from the extensive communications of Mr. William Mariner, several years resident in those Islands, ed. by John Martin. 2 vols. Edinburgh: Constable & Co. and Horst, Chance & Co., 1827.
Box Box 72
A vocabulary of the Tonga language, arranged in alphabetical order: to which is annexed a list of idiomatical phrases, by S[tephen] Rabone. Neiafu, Vavau: The Wesleyan mission press, 1845. 1/31/00. $381. Rulon-Miller.
Box Box 5
Tongan dictionary: Tongan-English and English-Tongan, C[lerk] Maxwell Churchward. London: Oxford University Press, 1959.
Box Box 27
A Simplified Dictionary of Modern Tongan, by Edgar Tu'inukuafe. Aotearoa, N.Z.: Polynesian Press, 1992.
Box Box 13
An analytical dictionary of the Tonkawa language, by Harry Hoijer[1904- ]. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1949.
Box Box 19
Tontemboansch-Nederlandsch Woordenboek met Nederlandsch-Tontemboansch Register, by J[ohannes] Alb[ert] T[raugott] Schwarz. Leiden: E. J. Brill, 1908.
Box Box 59
Torwali: An Account of a Dardic language of the Swat Kohistan, by George A[bramham] Grierson. London: Royal Asiatic Society, 1929.
Box Box 25
Diccionario totonaco de Xicotepec de Juarez, Puebla, totonaco-castellano, castellano-totonaco, by Aileen A. Reid & Ruth G. Bishop. Mexico, D.F.: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1974.
Series:
TRINIDAD & TOBAGO CREOLE
Box Box 9
Cote ce Cote la. Trinidad & Tobago Dictionary, compiled by John Mendes. Trinidad: B. L. C. P. Ltd, n.d. [post-1979].
Box Box 25
Diccionario Triqui de Chicahuaxtla, Triqui-Castellano, Castellano-Triqui, compiled by Claude Good. Mexico, D.F.: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1978.
Box Box 25
Series:
TRUKESE
Scope and Contents: see CHUUK
Box Box 14
"Ts'ets'aut, an Athapascan language from Portland Canal, British Columbia," by Franz Boas & Pliny E. Goddard, in: International Journal of American Linguistics, New York, Vol. 3, No. 1 (July 1924), pp. [1]-35.
Box Box 57
English-VendaVocabulary, by L.T. Marole and F.J. de Gama. Sibasa: Marole Book Depot, 1954. Third edition.
Box Box 3
Teo Dza Tshivenda (#39) [English-Tshivenda / Tshivenda-English Dictionary], compiled by N. J. van Wermelo. Pretoria: The Government Printer, 1958.
Box Box 17
Venda. Terminologie en Spelreëls No. 2. Terminology and Spelling No. 2[= Second Edition], compiled by the Venda Language Committee, Department of Bantu Education. Pretoria: The Government Printer, 1962.
Box Box 63
Venda Dictionary. Tshivenda-English, by N[icolaas] J[acobus] van Warmelo. Pretoria: J.L. van Schaik, 1989.
Series:
TSIMSHIAN
Scope and Contents: see also CHINOOK WAWA
Box Box 33
A practical dictionary of the Coast Tsimshian language, by John Asher Dunn. Ottawa: National Museums of Canada, 1978.
Box Box 33
Sm'algyax: A Reference Dictionary and Grammar for the Coast Tsimshian Language, compiled and edited by John Asher Dunn. Seattle: University of Washington Press, 1995.
Box Box 29
An English-vernacular dictionary of the Bantu-Botatwe dialects of Northern Rhodesia, by J. Torrend. Natal, South Africa : London : P.O. Mission Siding, Northern Rhodesia : Chikuni Bookstall: Mariannhill ; Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner & Co., 1931.
Box Box 17
Tsonga. Terminologie en Spalreëls No. 2. Terminology and Orthography No. 2[= Second Edition], by the Tsonga Language Committee, Department of Bantu Education. Pretoria: The Government Printer, 1962.
Box Box 23
Lokwalo loa mahuku. A secwana le seeñeles. Kabo ea nteha. Mahuku a secwana a hetolecwe mo puoñ ea seeñeles, by John [Tom] Brown [d.1925]. London: printed for the London Missionary Society by Yates and Alexander Chancery Buildings, 1876.
Box Box 9
Second edition, revised, enlarged and rearranged (1954): Secwana dictionary: Secwana-English and English-Secwana (Revised, enlarged and re-arranged), by J[ohn] Tom Brown [d. 1925]. Lobatsi: South Africa District Committee of the London Missionary Society, [1954].
Box Box 17
Tswana. Terminologie en Spelreëls No.2. Terminology and Orthography No. 2[= Second Edition], by the Sotho Language Committee, Department of Bantu Education. Pretoria: The Government Printer, 1962.
Box Box 59
A Dictionary of some Tuamotuan Dialects of the Polynesian Language, by J. Frank Stimson & Donald Stanley Marshall. The Hague: Martinus Nijhoff, 1964.
Box Box 39
ALSO: Material Culture in the Tuamotu Archipelago, by Kenneth P. Emory. Honolulu: Department. of Anthropology, Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum, 1975.
Series:
TUCANO
Scope and Contents: see also NADËB
Box Box 24
Pequena gramatica e dicionario da lingua tucana. Missao salesiana do Rio Negro-Amazonas, by Antonio Giacone. Manaos, Amazonas, Brazil: Papelaria Velho Lino de Lino Aguiar, [1939?]. 9/13/99. $33.50 (including postage). McBlain Books.
Box Box 17
English-Tulu Dictionary, by Rev. A. Mnner. New Delhi: Asian Educational Service, 1987.
Box Box 65
Tumbuka-Tonga-English Dictionary, by Rev. Wm. Y. Turner. Blantyre, Nyasaland: Church of Scotland Mission, 1952.
Box Box 22
Zur Kenntnis der melanesischen Sprache von der Insel Tumleo, by Leonhard Schultze. Jena: Gustav Fischer, 1911.
Box Box 12
Lexique de la langue Tunen (parler des Banen du Sud-Ouest du Cameroun), by Idelette Dugast (1898- ]. Paris: C. Klincksieck, 1967.
Box Box 11
A Structural and Lexical Comparison of the Tunica, Chitimacha, and Atakapa Languages, by John R[eed] Swanton [1873- ]. Washington: Government Printing Office, 1919.
Box Box 36
Tunica Dictionary, by Mary R. Haas. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press, 1953. 5/99. $78. Argosy Books.
Box Box 38
Peace Corps English-Tunisian Arabic Dictionary, by Rached Ben Abdelkaer, Abdeljelil Ayed, & Aziza Naouar. N.p. [Washington, D.C.?]: [Government Printing Office], 1977.
Box Box 10
Dicionário Português-Tupí, by Rubem Lima. Minneapolis: Prosperity Publishing, c. 1997.
Box Box 59
English-Turkana Dictionary, by A[nthony J.] Barrett. Nairobi: Macmillan Kenya, 1988.
Box Box 67
Turkana-English Dictionary, by A[nthony J.] Barrett. London: Macmillan Education, 1990.
Box Box 48
Russko-tuvinskii slovar: 22 000 slov, by A[leksandr] A[dolfovich] Palmbakh [1897-1963]. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1953.
Box Box 48
Series:
TWI
Scope and Contents: see AKAN
Box Box 48
Series:
TYEMBARA
Scope and Contents: see SENUFO
Box Box 76
The Great Tzotzil Dictionary of San Lorenzo Zinacantán, by Robert M. Laughlin. Washington, D.C.: Smithsonian Institution Press, 1975.
Box Box 25
Diccionario Tzotzil de San Andrés con variaciones dialectales. Tzotzil-Español, Español-Tzotzil, by Alfa Hurley viuda de Delgaty & Augustín Ruíz Sánchez. Mexico City: Instituto Lingüístico de Verano, 1978.
Box Box 54
The great Tzotzil dictionary of Santo Domingo Zinacantán, with grammatical analysis and historical commentary, by Robert M. Laughlin, with John B. Haviland. Three Vols. Washington, D.C.: Smithsonian Institution Press, 1988.
Series:
TZUTUJIL, EASTERN and WESTERN
Box Box 12
Diccionario tz'utujil, by Francisco Perez Mendoza & Miguel Hernandez Mendoza. La Antigua Guatemala: Proyecto Lingüistico Francisco Marroquin, 1996. 10/8/99. $30. Libros Latinos.
Box Box 23
Diccionario tz'utujil, by Francisco Perez Mendoza & Miguel Hernandez Mendoza. La Antigua Guatemala: Proyecto Lingüistico Francisco Marroquin, 1996. Second copy, 4/2/99. $34. Libros Latinos.
Box Box 4
Die Sprache der Ubychen. Grammatische Skizze. Texte, Ubychisches Glossar nebst deutschem Index, by Adolf Dirr. Leipzig: Verlag der Asia Major, 1928.
Box Box 41
Dictionnaire de la langue oubykh avec introduction phonologique, index francais-oubykh, textes oubykhs, by Hans Vogt [1903-- ].[Oslo]: Universitetsforlaget, 1963.
Box Box 55
Inglizcha-uighurcha lughat. English-Uighur Dictionary. Urumchi: Shinjang Khalq Nashriyati, 1988.
Box Box 55
Series:
ULAWA
Scope and Contents: see SA'A
Box Box 55
Series:
ULVA
Scope and Contents: see MOSQUITO
Box Box 13
"Words, Phrases, and Short Dialogues, in the Language of the Lenni Lenape, or Delaware Indians," by Rev. John Heckewelder [Section III, with separate title page], in: Transactions of the Historical & Literary Committee of the American Philosophical Society, held at Philadelphia, for Promoting Useful Knowledge. Vol. I. Philadelphia: Abraham Small, 1819.
Box Box 69
Zeisberger's Indian Dictionary. English, German, Iroquois-the Onondaga and Algonquin-the Delaware, printed from the Original Manuscript in Harvard College Library. Cambridge: John Wilson and Son, 1887.
Box Box 75
A Lenâpé-English dictionary. From an anonymous ms. in the archives of the Moravian Church at Bethlehem, Pa., ed. with additions by Daniel G[arrison]: Brinton (1837-1899) & Albert Seqaqkind Anthony . Philadelphia: The Historical Society of Pennsylvania, 1888.
Box Box 26
The original Strachey vocabulary of the Virginia Indian language, by John P. Harrington. Washington, D.C.: United States Government Printing Office, 1955.
Box Box 29
De Uma-taal (West Midden-Celebes): spraakkunstige schets en teksten. Uitg. en van een woordenlijst voorzien, by S[amuel] J[onathan] Esser [1900-1044]. 's-Gravenhage: Martin Nijhoff, 1964.
Box Box 15
Vocabulary of the Umbundu Language Comprising Umbundu-English and English-Umbundu. Lists of Three Thousand Words used by the Inhabitants of Bailundu and Bihe, and other Countries of West Central Africa, prepared by Rev. W.H. Sanders, Rev. W.E. Fay, and other Missionaries of the [West Central African Mission] of the A[merican] B[oard] C[ommissioners] F[oreign] M[issions]. [Boston: Beacon Press, Thomas Todd, Printer], 1885.
Box Box 15
Also: Observations upon the Grammatical Structure and Use of the Umbundu or the Language of the Inhabitants of Bailundu and Bihe, and other countries of West Central Africa. By Rev. Wesley M. Stover, 1885]
Box Box 17
Second, enlarged edition, 1911: Vocabulary of the Umbundu Language Comprising Umbundu-English and English-Umbundu, [by Rev. William Fay and other Missionaries of the] West Central African Mission. [?Kamundongo, Angola]: A[merican] B[oard] C[ommissioners] F[oreign] M[issions], 1911.
Box Box 20
Mbundu English-Portuguese Dictionary, With Grammar and Syntax, by Amandus Johnson. Philadelphia: The International Printing Company, 1930.
Box Box 20
Series:
URAON
Scope and Contents: see KURUKH
Box Box 23
Manuale e Glossario della lingua indostana o urdu, by Camillo Tagliabue. Rome: Tipografia della R. Accademia dei Lincei, 1898.
Box Box 22
Guide to Military Urdu and the Elementary Examination, by Major W[illiam] Turner. Karachi: The Education Publishing Company, [1942].
Box Box 2
Hospital Conversation with Vocabulary and Phrases (in Roman Urdu), by A. W. Cornelius. Landour, Missourie, India: The Missourie Book Society, 1943.
Box Box 47
Karmannyi urdu-russkii slovar. 6000 slov, by L[idiia] B[orisovna] Kibirkshtis. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsional'nykh slovarei, 1958.
Box Box 47
Karmannyi russko-urdu slovar. 8000 slov, by A[ntonina] A[leksandrolna] Davidova & Y. L. Lawrynenko. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsional'nykh slovarei, 1958. 8/23/00. $16. Worldwide Antiquarian.
Box Box 49
Urdu-russkii slovar: 30 000 slov, S. V. Biriulev, et al. Moscow: Sovetskaia Entsiklopediia, 1964.
Series:
UTE-SOUTHERN PAIUTE
Box Box 36
Chemehuevi: A Grammar and Lexicon, by Margaret L. Press. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1979.
Box Box 61
The Uzbek Dialect of Qilich (Russian Turkestan) with Texts and Glossary, by Gunnar Jarring. Lund; Leipzig: C.W.K. Gleerup; Otto Harrassowitz, 1937.
Box Box 57
Özbekische Grammatik, mit Bibliographie, Lesestücken und Wörterverzeichnis, by A[nnemarie] von Gabain. Leipzig and Vienna: Otto Harrassowitz, 1945.
Box Box 47
Russko-uzbekskii slovar. 50 000 slov, edited by R. Abdurakhmanov. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1954.
Box Box 63
Uzbek-English Dictionary, by Natalie Waterson. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1980.
Box Box 2
Vedda Language of Ceylon: Texts and Lexicon, by M. W. Sugathapala de Silva. Munich: R. Kitzinger, 1972.
Box Box 72
Outlines of a Grammar of the Vei Language together with a Vei-English Vocabulary, and an account of the discovery of the Vei mode of syllabic writing, S[igismund] W[ilhelm] Koelle. London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner & Co., [ca. 1905]. Third edition.
Box Box 72
Series:
VELATRU
Scope and Contents: see PERSIAN DIALECTS
Box Box 72
Series:
VENDA
Scope and Contents: see TSHIVENDA
Box Box 57
Theoretisch-praktische Grammatik der Annamitischen Sprache. Mit analysierten Übungss¨a;tzen, eine Chrestomathie und einem annamitisch-deutschen Wörterbuch. Mit 9 Schrifttafeln, by A[dolf] Dirr. Vienna; Pest; Leipzig: A. Hartleben's Verlag, [1894].
Box Box 9
Nouveau vocabulaire français-tonkinois et tonkinois-français, by P[aul Emile Emmanuel Auguste] Crépin [Bourdier de Beauregard] [1866- ]. Paris: A. Challamel, 1900.
Box Box 63
Vietnamese-English Dictionary with the International Phonetic System and more than 30,000 words and idiomatic expressions, by Mrs. Le Van Hung & Dr. Le Van Hung. Paris: Éditions Europe-Asie, 1955.
Box Box 37
Vietnamese-English Vocabulary, by Nguyen Dình Hòa. Washington, D.C.: [Office of Training, National Security Agency?], 1955.
Box Box 15
Enlarged and improved edition, 1966: Vietnamese-English Dictionary, by Nguyen-Dinh-Hoa. Rutland, Vermont: Charles E. Tuttle, 1966.
Box Box 49
Vetnamsko-russkii slovar: okolo 36000 slov, by I[vetta] I[vanovna] Glebova, et al. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1961.
Box Box 13
Vietnamese Phrase Book[Cover title]. Washington, D.C.: Headquarters, Department of the Army, 1962.
Box Box 23
Deutsch-vietnamesisches Wörterbuch, by Klaus Ferkinghoff. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz, 1962.
Box No Box
Viêt-Anh Tù-Dien Loai Pho Thông. General Vietnamese-English Dictionary, by Nguyen-Van-Khôn. Saigon: Khai-Tri, [1966].
Box Box 5
Tu-Dien Dictionary English-Vietnamese Anh-Viet, by Kim-ly Molling. Hayward, California: Vietnamese-American Company, 1975.
Box Box 49
Anh-Viet tu dien y khoa gia dinh = The family medical encyclopedia, by Hoang Mai Nguyen. Glendale, California: Dai Nam, 1985.
Box Box 72
Dictionnaire français-fiote, dialecte du Kakongo, by the Holy Ghost Fathers. Paris: Maison-Mère, 1890.
Box Box 72
Series:
VISAYAN
Scope and Contents: see CEBUANO
Box Box 31
A few notes on Wa, by G[odfrey] Drage [1868- ]. Rangoon: Superintendent, Government Printer, Burma, 1907.
Box Box 31
Series:
WAKHI
Scope and Contents: see INDO-IRANIAN FRONTIER LANGUAGES
Box Box 31
Series:
WAKKA
Scope and Contents: see KABI
Box Box 31
Series:
WAMBON
Scope and Contents: see MANDOBO
Box Box 43
[Cover title] Vocabulary of the Massachusetts (or Natick) Indian Language, by Josiah Cotton. Cambridge: Metcalf and Company, 1829.
Box Box 76
Natick Dictionary, by James Hammond Trumbull. Washington: Government Printing Office, 1903.
Box Box 61
English-Wappo Vocabulary, by Jesse O. Sawyer. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1965.
Box Box 71
"Vocabulario Teurgico-Magico de los Indios Guaraos," by Basilio Maria de Barral, in: Antropológica, No. 4, 1958, pp. [27]-36.
Box Box 31
Dictionary of the Wailbri (Warlpiri, Walpiri) language.. Part II. English-Wailbri, by Reverend Laurie Reece. Sydney: University of Sydney, 1979.
Box Box 49
Wathawurrung and the Colac language of southern Victoria, ed. BY Barry j. Blake. Canberra: Pacific linguistics, Research School of Pacific and Asian Studies, Australian National University, 1998.
Box Box 23
Diccionario de la lengua guajira, [Vol. I] guajira-castellano, by Miguel Angel Jusayú [1934- ], II castellano-guajira, by Miguel Angel Jusayú & Jesús Olza Zubiri. Caracas : Maracaibo: Universidad Catolica Andres Bello, Centro de Lenguas Indigenas; Biblioteca Corpozulia, 1977, 1981.
Box Box 23
Series:
WERCHIKWAR
Scope and Contents: see BURUSHASKI
Box Box 23
Series:
WES-KOS
Scope and Contents: see PIDGIN, CAMEROON
Box Box 9
Western Abenaki. Volume 1: Abenaki-English, by Gordon M. Day. Hull, Quebec: Canadian Museum of Civilization, 1994. AND Western Abenaki. Volume 2: English-Abenaki, by Gordon M. Day. Hull, Quebec: Canadian Museum of Civilization, 1995.
Box Box 9
Series:
WESTERN APACHE
Scope and Contents: see APACHE, WESTERN
Box Box 9
Series:
WESTERN BUNDJALUNG
Scope and Contents: see BANDJALANG
Box Box 9
Series:
WESTERN SOTHO
Scope and Contents: see TSWANA
Box Box 9
Series:
WEST INDIAN ENGLISH
Scope and Contents: see BAHAMIAN ENGLISH; BARBADIAN ENGLISH; CAYMAN ISLANDS ENGLISH
Box Box 9
Series:
WHITE HMONG
Scope and Contents: see HMONG DAW
Box Box 9
Series:
WHITE MEO
Scope and Contents: see HMONG DAW
Box Box 9
Series:
WHITE TAI
Scope and Contents: see HMONG DAW
Box Box 37
Wik-Ngathan dictionary, by Peter [John] Sutton [1946- ]. Prospect, South Australia: Caitlin Press, 1995.
Box Box 11
The Wintun Indians of California and their neighbors, by Peter Knudtson. Happy Camp, Calif.: Naturegraph Publishers, 1977.
Box Box 18
Wintu Dictionary, by Alice Schlichter. Berkeley: Department of Linguistics, 1981.
Box Box 36
Wintu Dictionary, by Harvey Pitkin. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1985.
Box Box 36
Series:
WIRADHARI
Scope and Contents: see AWABAKAL
Box Box 23
"Vocabularies of Three South Australian Native Languages-Wirrung, Narrinyeri, and Wongaidya," by J. M. Black, in: Transactions and Proceedings of the Royal Society of South Australia, Vol. XLI, pp. 1-13, Adealide: Royal Society of South Australia, 1917.
Box Box 9
"Aborigines of the West Coast of South Australia. Vocabularies and Ethnographical Notes," by Daisy M. Bates, pp. 152-167, in: Transaction and Proceedings of the Royal Society of South Australia, Vol. XLII. Adelaide: Published by the Society, December 24, 1918.
Box Box 9
Series:
WITOTO
Scope and Contents: see HUITOTO
Box Box 34
Wolio dictionary (Wolio-English-Indonesian) = Kamus Bahasa Wolio (Wolio-Inggeris-Indonesia), by J[ohannes] C[ornelis)]Anceaux [1920- ].Dordrecht, Holland ; Providence, R.I., U.S.A.: Foris Publications Holland, 1987.
Box Box 71
Das Westliche Afrika, oder Sitten, Gebr¨a;uche und Gewohnheiten der Afrikaner zwischen dem Senegal und Gaambia und der Mohrenstamme in der grossen Wüste; nebst naturhistorischen Bemerkungen und der Geschichte der afrikanshcen Colonien. Aus dem französischen des R. G. V. mit 44 Kupfern, zwey Landkarten und einem Musikblatte. Pesth: Konr. Ad. Hartleben, 1816.
Box Box 66
Manuel français-ouolof, by Armand-Pierre Angrand. Dakar: Librairie Maurice Viale, n.d. [ca. 1940].
Box Box 11
Second edition (1952): Manuel Français-Ouolof, by A[rmand]-P[ierre] Angrand. Dakar, Senegal: Maison du livre, 1952.
Box Box 11
Series:
WOOLNER DISTRICT
Scope and Contents: see SOUTH AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL LANGUAGES
Box Box 7
An Attempt Towards a Comparative Grammar of Two Australian Languages. Part II. Indices and Vocabularies of Kattang and Thangatti, by Nils M. Holmer. Canberra: Australian Institute of Aboriginal Studies, 1967.
Box Box 7
Series:
WO'TIHEH
Scope and Contents: see PIAROA
Box Box 19
A Vocabulary of the Shanghai Dialect, by J[oseph] Edkins. Shanghai: Presbyterian Mission Press, 1869.
Box Box 37
An English-Chinese vocabulary of the Shanghai dialect, prepared by a Committee of the Shanghai Vernacular Society. Shanghai: American Presbyterian Mission Press, 1901.
Box Box 37
Series:
WURI
Scope and Contents: see GWAMHI-WURI
Box Box 62
Dictionnaire Xârâcùù (Nouvelle-Calédonie), by Claire Moyse-Faurie & Marie-Adèle Néchérö-Jorédié. [Noumée, New Caledonia]: Les Editions Populaires, 1986.
Box Box 41
A vocabulary of the Kaffir language. Second edition., by John Ayliff. London: The Wesleyan Mission House, 1863.
Box Box 16
An English an Kaffir Dictionary. Princiapply of the Xosa-Kaffir, but including also many words of the Zulu-Kaffir dialect, by W[illiam] J[afferd]Davis. London: Printed for the Wesleyan Missionary Society, 1877.
Box Box 17
Kafir phrase book [and Vocabulary]. Eighth edition, fortieth thousand, by James Stewart [1831-1905]. [Lovedale, South Africa]: Lovedale Mission Press, 1916.
Box Box 13
A Kafir-English dictionaryby Albert Kropf. Second Edition, ed by Robert Godfrey. [Stutterheim] South Africa: Lovedale Mission Press, 1915.
Box Box 17
Xhosa. Terminologie en Spelreëls No. 2. Terminology and Orthography No. 2[= Second Edition], compiled by the Xhosa Language Committee, Department of Bantu Education. Pretoria: The Government Printer, 1962.
Box Box 12
English-Xhosa dictionary, by A[rnold] Fischer [1926- ]. Cape Town; New York: Oxford University Press, 1985.
Box Box 1
Zu/'hoasi fonologie & woordeboek, by J[annie] W[inston] Snyman. Kaapstad & Rotterdam: A. A. Balkema, 1975.
Box Box 3
Jabêm-English Dictionary. Reproduction of the Jabêm-Deutsch Wörterbuch compiled by Rev. H. Zahn 1917 Logaweng-Neuguinea, revised by J.F. Streicher. Canberra: Department of Linguistics, Research School of Pacific Studies, The Australian National University, 1982.
Box Box 78
Iagnobskie teksty. S prilozheniem iagnobsko-russkogo slovaria, by M[ikhail] S[tepanovich] Andreev & E.M. Peshchereva. Moscow: Izd-vo Akademii nauk SSSr, 1957.
Series:
YAKIMA
Scope and Contents: see also NEZ PERCE
Box Box 46
Grammar and Dictionary of the Yakama Language, by Marie Charles Pandosy, trans. by George Gibbs & J[ohn] G[ilmary] Shea. New York: Cramoisy Press, 1862.
Box Box 2
[cover title] Dr. A. Th. v. Middendorff's Sibirische Reise. Band II. Theil 2. Über die Sprache der Jakuten. Erste Lieferung: Jakutisch-deutsches Wörterbuch. An installment of the first edition of Reise in den aussersten Norden und Osten Sibiriens, wahrend der Jahre 1843 und 1844, by Alexander Theodor von Middendorff [1815-1894.] St. Petersburg: Buchdr. der K. Akademie der Wissenschaften : Zu haben bei Eggers, 1847.
Box Box 49
Russko-iakutskii slovar: okolo 28 500 slov, by P[etr] S[avvich] Afanasev & L[uka] N[ikiforovich] Kharitonov. Moscow: Sovetskaia entsiklopediia, 1968.
Box Box 47
Dialektologicheskii slovar iazyka sakha: dopolnitelnyi tom : soderzhit okolo 5,000 slov, by M[ikhail] S[piridonovich] Voronkin, M[ikhail] P[etrovich] Alekseev, and IU[rii] I[vanovich] Vasilev. Novosibirsk: VO "Nauka", 1995.
Box Box 14
Woordenboek der Jamdeensche taal, by P[eter] Drabbe [1887- ]. Bandoeng: A.C. Nix, 1932.
Box Box 36
Yana Dictionary, by Edward Sapir & Morris Swadesh. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1960.
Box Box 38
Dictionnaire Français-Yansi (Rép. Du Zaïre), by Wendo Nguma. Bandundu, Zaire: CEEBA Publications, 1986.
Series:
YAO (Bantu)
Scope and Contents: see also BANTU LANGUAGES
Box Box 19
A dictionary of the Yao Language, by G. Meredith Sanderson. Zomba: Nyasaland Government Printer, 1954.
Box Box 15
Dicionário de Português-Chi-Yao e Chi-Yao-Português, by Miguel José Viana. Lourenço Marques: Imprensa Nacional de Moçambique, 1961.
Box Box 38
Yao-English Dictionary, by Sylvia J. Lombard, ed. by Herbert C. Purnell, Jr. Ithaca, NY: Southeast Asia Program, Cornell University, 1968.
Box Box 28
Yoeme-English English-Yoeme Standard Dictionary: a Language of the Yaqui Tribe in the American Southwest and Northern Mexico, with a comprehensive Grammar of Yoeme Language, by David L. Shaul. New York: Hippocrene Books, 1999.
Box Box 28
Series:
YAY
Scope and Contents: see NHANG
Series:
YAZGHULAMI
Scope and Contents: see also INDO-IRANIAN FRONTIER LANGUAGES
Box Box 48
IAzguliamsko-russkii slovar, D[zhoi] I[osifovna] Edelman. Moscow: "Nauka", 1971.
Box Box 27
Words of Our Country: Stories, Place Names and Vocabulary in Yidiny, the Aboriginal Language of the Cainrs-Yarrabah Region, compiled and edited by R[obert] M. W. Dixon. St. Lucia, Qld., Australia : University of Queensland Press; 1991.
Box Box 67
Mayombsch Idioticon. [Deel I. A tot en met Mup'esukila.] Deel II. Mup'ioka tot einde. Met twee kaarten, 2 vols., by Leo Bittremieux. Ghent: Drukkerij "Erasmus," 1922 [wrappers dated 1923].
Series:
YORUBA
Scope and Contents: see also HAUSA
Box Box 32
Grammar and Dictionary of the Yoruba Language with an introductory description of the country and people of Yoruba, by Rev. T.J. Bowen. Washington, D.C.: Smithsonian Institution, 1858.
Box Box 9
Dictionary of Modern Yoruba, by R[oy] C[live] Abraham. London: University of London Press, 1958.
Box Box 64
Atúmò ede Yoruba: A Short Yoruba Grammar and Dictionary, by Isaac O. Delano. London: Oxford University Press, 1958.
Box Box 64
A Dictionary of the Yoruba Language. London: Oxford University Press, 1961. Seventh impression.
Box Box 71
Yoruba Numerals, by Robert G. Armstrong. London: Published for the Nigerian Institute of Social and Economic Research by the Oxford University Press, 1962.
Box Box 71
Series:
YUGARABUL
Scope and Contents: see KABI
Box Box 71
Series:
YUGUMBIR
Scope and Contents: see BANJALANG; see also KABI
Box Box 7
Jukagirskii Jazyk, by E. A. Krejnovic. Moscow: Akademii Nauk SSSR, 1958.
Box Box 36
Yuki Vocabulary, by Jesse O. Sawyer and Alice Schlichter. Original wrappers. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1984.
Box Box 54
Brief grammar outlines of the Yulu and Kara languages (Bahr el Ghazal, Sudan - Central African Republic) with a small comparative vocabulary of Bongo, Baka, Yulu [and] Kara, by Stefano Santandrea. Rome: Printed by the Sodality of St. Peter Claver, 1970. Vocabulary reprinted from separate 1963 publication.
Box Box 54
Series:
YUMAN LANGUAGES
Scope and Contents: see COCOPA, HAVASUPAI, KILIWA, MARICOPA
Box Box 15
Grammar and Vocabulary of the Eskimo Language as spoken by the Kuskokwim and Southwest Coast Eskimos of Alaska, by John Hinz. Bethlehem, Pennsylvania: The Society for Propagating the Gospel, The Moravian Church, 1944. Also a second copy, second printing 1955.
Box Box 69
Yup'ik Eskimo Dictionary, compiled by Steven A. Jacobson. N.p: Alaska Native Language Center, University of Alaska, 1984.
Box Box 69
Series:
YUPIK, CENTRAL SIBERIAN
Scope and Contents: see INUKTITUT, NORTH ALASKAN
Box Box 69
Series:
YURAK
Scope and Contents: see NENETS
Box Box 1
Vocabulaire Français-Azande et Azande-Français, based on information furnished by Block, Bolle, et al. Bruxelles: Imprimerie Veuve Monnom, 1912.
Box Box 62
La Langue des Azande: Volume III. Dictionnaire Zande-Français, by C.R. Lagae & V.H. Vanden Plas. Ghent: Editions Dominicaines "Veritas," 1925.
Box Box 56
Zande and English Dictionary, compiled by Rev. Canon Gore & Mrs. E.C. Gore. London: Sheldon Press, 1931.
Box Box 65
Revised [second] edition: Zande and English Dictionary, compiled by Rev. Canon Gore & Mrs. E.C. Gore, revised edition by H.C. Bullen. London: Sheldon Press, 1952.
Box Box 53
Vocabviario en langva capoteca, hecho y recopilado por el mvy r verendo padre fray Juan de Cordoua, de la orden de los predicadores, que reside en esta nueua españa. Mexico: Pedro Charte & Antonio Ricardo, 1578 [facsimile edition: Mexico City: Ediciones Toledo, 1987].
Box Box 53
Series:
ZAPOTECO, EASTERN POCHUTLA
Scope and Contents: see ZAPOTECTO, WESTERN POCHUTLA
Box Box 25
Diccionario zapoteco de Mitla, Oaxaca, by Morris Stubblefield & Carol Miller de Stubblefield. Mexico, D.F.: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1991.
Series:
ZAPOTECO, SAN BARTOLOMÉ ZOOGOCHO
Box Box 25
Diccionario Zapoteco de Zoogocho Oaxaca, by Rebecca Long C. & Sofronio Cruz M. Mexico, D.F.: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1999.
Series:
ZAPOTECO, SIERRA DE JUAREZ
Box Box 25
Diccionario Zapoteco de Juarez: Zapoteco-Espanol. Espanol-Zapoteco. Ca titsa' qui' ri'u, by Neil Nellis & Jane Goodner de Nellis. Mexico: Publicado por el Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1983.
Series:
ZAPOTECO, WESTERN POCHUTLA
Box Box 35
"El Dialecto Mexicano de Pochutla, Oaxaca," by Franz Boas, in: International Journal of American Linguistics, Vol. 1, No. 1 (July 1917), pp. 9-44.
Series:
ZAPOTECO, YATZACHI
Box Box 40
Diccionario Zapoteco de Yatzachi el Bajo, Yatzachi el Alto, Oaxaca, by Inez M. Butler H[aworth]. Tucson, AZ: Instituto Lingüístico de Verano, 1997.
Box Box 40
Series:
ZEBAKI DIALECT
Scope and Contents: see INDO-IRANIAN FRONTIER LANGUAGES
Box Box 3
The Zhang-Zhung Language. A Grammar and Dictionary of the Unexplored Language of the Tibetan Bonpos, by Erik Haarh. Copenhagen; Arhus: Ein Munksgaard; Universitetsforlaget, 1968.
Box Box 4
William J. Gedney's The Tai Dialect of Lungming: Glossaries, Texts, and Translations, edited by Thomas John Hudak. Ann Arbor, Michigan: The University of Michigan, Center for South and Southeast Asian Studies, 1991.
Box Box 25
Diccionario Zoque de Copainalá, by Roy & Margaret Harrison & Castulo Garcia H. Mexico, D.F.: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1981.
Box Box 25
Vocabulario zoque de Rayon, by Roy Harrison & Margaret B. de Harrison. Mexico, D.F.: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1984.
Box Box 25
Diccionario zoque de Francisco Leon, by Ralph Engel & Mary Allhiser de Engel. Mexico, D.F.: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1987.
Box Box 55
The Zulu companion, offered to the Natal colonist, to facilitate his intercourse with the natives, by C. W. Posselt. Pietermaritzburg: D. D. Buchanan, 1850.
Box Box 18
ALSO: An English-Kafir dictionary of the Zulu-Kafir language, as spoken by the tribes of the colony of Natal, by James Perrin. Pietermaritzburg: Printed by May & Davis, 1855. 11/11/98. £200 (= $330). Christison Rare Books.
Box Box 18
New and revised edition, 1917: Perrins' English-Zulu dictionary,. Natal: P. Davis & Sons, 1917.
Box Box 62
A Zulu-Kafir Dictionary etymologically explained, with Copious Illustrations and Examples, preceded by An Introduction to the Zulu-Kafir Language, by Rev. J.L. Döhne. Cape Town: G. J. Pike's Printing Office, 1857.
Box Box 24
Zulu-English Dictionary, by John W[illiam] Colenso [1814-1888]. Pietermaritzburg: P. Davis, 1861.
Box Box 24
Fourth edition, 1905: Zulu-English Dictionaryby J[ohn] W[illiam] Colenso [1814-1883]. Fourth Authorised Edition. Revised and Enlarged. Cover title: Colenso's Zulu-English Dictionary. Fourth Edition. Natal: Vause, Slatter & Co., 1905.
Box Box 72
An easy Zulu Vocabulary and Phrase Book with Grammatical Notes, by Samuel Gibbs. Natal: P. Davis and Sons, 1892.
Box Box 55
Enlarged edition, 1902: An easy Zulu Vocabulary and Phrase Book with Grammatical Notes, by Samuel Gibbs, with additions and amendments by R. C. O Samuelson. Natal: P. Davis and Sons, 1902 [cover date: 1903].
Box Box 65
A First Kafir Course, by C. J. Crawshaw. Cape Town: J. C. Juta, 1897.
Box Box 13
A Zulu manual, or vade-mecum, being a companion volume to "The Zulu-Kafir language," and the "English-Zulu dictionary," by Charles Roberts [1836-1901]. London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner & Co. Ltd., 1900.
Box Box 67
Three native accounts of the visit of the Bishop of Natal in September and October, 1859, to Umpande, King of the Zulus; with explanatory notes and a literal translation, and a glossary of all the Zulu words employed in the same: designed for the use of students of the Zulu language. Third edition., [by John William Colenso]. Pietermaritzburg; Durban:Vause, Slatter & Co., 1901.
Box Box 35
A Zulu-English dictionary with notes on pronunciation a revised orthography and derivations and cognate words from many languages; including also a vocabulary of Hlonipa words, tribal- names, etc., a synopsis of Zulu grammar and a concise history of the Zulu people from the most ancient times, by Alfred T. Bryant. Pinetown, Natal: The Mariannhill Mission Press, 1905.
Box Box 55
An English-Zulu dictionary, with the principles of pronunciation and classification fully explained, by Charles Roberts. London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner and Co., 1915. Second edition, sixth impression.
Box Box 57
Incwadi yesisngisi nesizulu. Zulu without a grammar, by conversational exercises. For housekeepers, farmers, overseers, storekeepers, doctors, police, and all such as come into frequent contact with natives, by A[lfred] T. Bryant. Maritzburg; Durban: P. Davis & Sons, [ca. 1917]. Third edition.
Box Box 17
An abridged English-Zulu word-book. Incwadi yabantu yamazwi esingisi ecasiselwe ngesizulu, by A[lfred] T. Bryant. [Mariannhill, South Africa]: Mariannhill Mission Press. [ca. 1917].
Box Box 64
A Concise English-Kafir Dictionary, by J. McLaren. London: Longmans, Green and Co., 1923.
Box Box 32
Zulu references for interpreters and students, by Carl Faye. With 5 portraits and a map. Pietermaritzburg: City Printing Works, Limited, 1923.
Box Box 40
Zulu-English Dictionary, compiled by C[lement] M[artin] Doke & B[enedict] W[allet] Vilakazi. Johannesburg: Witwatersrand University Press, 1948.
Box Box 64
English and Zulu Dictionary, compiled by C. M. Doke, D. McK. Malcolm, & J. M. A. Sikakana. Johannesburg: Witwatersrand University Press, 1958.
Box Box 32
Zuni dictionary, by Stanley [Stewart] Newman [1905- ].[Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Research Center in Anthropology, Folklore, and Linguistics, 1958.